JP2011160990A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which obtains a correct random number value. <P>SOLUTION: When the execution of game control is to be started, the game machine reads numerical data form a random number value register and sets a corresponding random number latch flag to the off condition. By making a bit value in the bit number [4-3] of security time setting KSES a value other than "00", the game machine sets variable set time varying in a prescribed time range to a time component included in the security time. By making the bit value of a bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES a value other than "000", the game machine sets one from among a plurality of extended periods of time which can be preselected in addition to fixed time as a time component included in the security time. The game machine carries out a continuous advance notification performance on the basis of the result of a decision at start winning. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2011,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and more specifically, a plurality of types that can be identified based on the establishment of a start condition that allows the start of variable display after a game medium passes through a start area. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that includes variable display means for variably displaying identification information, and controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player when a specific display result is derived and displayed on the variable display means.

  As a gaming machine, when a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and the game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area and a start condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of identification are made. There is a pachinko gaming machine in which information (hereinafter referred to as a display symbol) is variably displayed on a variable display device, and the game interest is enhanced by a so-called variable display game that determines whether or not to give a predetermined game value based on the display result. . In such a pachinko gaming machine, a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player is obtained when the stop symbol mode when the variable display of the display symbol in the variable display game is completely stopped becomes the specific display mode. . For example, a pachinko gaming machine that has become a big hit game state has a special electric accessory called a big prize opening or an attacker opened, and a state where a player can easily win a game ball for a certain period of time continuously. provide.

  In such a gaming machine, in response to the start port switch that detects a winning ball entering the start winning port being turned on, a latch pulse from the CPU or a start port, for example, is added to the random number determination register that constitutes the random number generating means. There is a technique in which a predetermined signal such as an output from a switch is input and a count value latched in the random number determination register is acquired as a random value (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2000-61120 A

  In the technique described in Patent Document 1, after a count value is latched in the random number determination register by inputting a predetermined signal, a new count value is latched by, for example, noise before the count value is acquired. There is a problem that it is impossible to obtain an accurate random number value corresponding to a winning ball or the like that enters the start winning opening.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of obtaining an accurate random value.

  In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the claims of the present application has a start area (for example, a first start winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A, a second starting winning port formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B, etc.) ) After a game medium (for example, a game ball) passes through, and each is identified based on the establishment of a start condition permitting the start of variable display (for example, No is determined in step S221 or step S223). Variable display means (for example, the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B, the image display device 5 and the like) that variably display a plurality of possible types of identification information (for example, special symbols, decorative symbols, etc.) are provided and variably displayed. When a specific display result (for example, a confirmed special symbol that becomes a jackpot symbol or a confirmed decorative symbol for a jackpot combination) is derived and displayed on the means, a specific gaming state (for example, a big game) that is advantageous to the player A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) controlled to a non-volatile memory (for example, ROM 506) after executing predetermined initial settings (for example, security check processing including steps S1 to S14). And the like, and a game control microcomputer (for example, the game control microcomputer 100) having a built-in control CPU (for example, the CPU 505) for executing game control in the gaming machine based on the stored contents of the game machine, and the game control microcomputer And a random number circuit (for example, a random number circuit 509) that generates numerical data that becomes a random number value (for example, a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result). Is a numerical value updating means (for example, random number generator) Circuit 553, random number sequence change circuit 555, and the like) and random number value storage means (for example, random value register 559A (R1D) or random value register 559B) that captures and stores numerical data output from the numerical value updating means as the random number value. R2D), etc., and the game control microcomputer reads the random number value from the random value storage means (for example, the CPU 505 performs the process of step S506) when the game medium passes through the starting area. And the identification information as to whether or not to control the specific gaming state using the random number value read by the random number reading means based on the establishment of the start condition. Predetermining means for determining before the display result is derived and displayed (for example, the CPU 505 executes the process of step S229) And when the game medium passes through the starting area before the determination by the prior determination means, the specific game state is controlled based on the random number value read by the random number read means. Start determination means for performing a predetermined determination including whether or not to perform (for example, the portion where the CPU 505 executes the random number determination process at the time of winning in steps S205 and S210) and a predetermined signal (for example, the first start winning signal SS1 and the second 2) When the numerical data output from the numerical value updating means based on the input of the random number latch signals LL1, LL2, etc. based on the start winning signal SS2 is stored in the random value storage means, the first value is changed to a new value. The numerical data stored in the random value storage means is read out by the control CPU at the read timing of the random value. The predetermined data (for example, random number latch flags RDFM1, RDFM2, etc.) that are sometimes changed to the second value and allow the storage of new numerical data, and the predetermined data when game control by the control CPU is started. And the control start time processing means (for example, the portion where the CPU 505 executes the processing of steps S56, S121, S123, etc.) and whether the storage content of the nonvolatile memory has been changed in the predetermined initial setting. Security check means for executing a security check (eg, a portion where the CPU 505 executes steps S9 to S14), and a security time setting means capable of variably setting the security check execution time by the security check means (For example, security time setting KSES Based on the bit number [2-0], the CPU 505 executes steps S1 to S4, and based on the security time setting KSES bit number [4-3], the CPU 505 executes steps S5 to S8. Further, based on the determination result by the start determination means, before the start condition of the variable display that is the determination target is satisfied, a specific effect (for example, the notice effect YD1 shown in FIG. 66 or the like) 67. For example, the CPU of the effect control microcomputer 120 executes the processes of S728 to S731, based on the processes of steps S705 to S709. The specific effect execution means executes the notice effect YD2 shown in FIG. 67, the notice effect YD3 shown in FIG. Etc.).

  According to such a configuration, when the numerical data is stored in the random value storage means based on the input of the predetermined signal, the predetermined data is set to the first value and storage of new numerical data is restricted. When the numerical data is read from the random value storage means at the read timing of the random value, the predetermined data is changed to the second value and storage of new numerical data is permitted. Thereby, the numerical data stored in the random number storage means based on the input of the predetermined signal can be acquired as an accurate random value. When the execution of the game control is started, the control start time processing means sets the predetermined data to the second value. As a result, it is possible to prevent the numerical data stored in the random number storage means from being erroneously acquired as a random value in a state where the power supply voltage is unstable, such as when the power is shut off. Furthermore, the execution time of the security check process can be variably set. Thereby, it becomes difficult to specify the execution start timing of the game control, and it is possible to reliably prevent a sniper based on the analysis result of the control code and an illegal act by connecting a so-called “hanging board”. Further, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the determination is made based on a predetermined determination result including whether or not to control the specific gaming state using the random number value read by the random number reading means. By executing the specific effect before the variable display start condition is satisfied, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  Furthermore, variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion where the CPU 505 executes the processing of steps S251 to S262) that determines a variable display pattern of the identification information based on the determination result of the prior determination means; When the game medium passes, the extracting means (for example, the CPU 505) extracts a variable display determining random value (for example, a random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type) for determining the variable display pattern of the identification information. The random number value read by the random number reading means and the extracting means for the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied even though the game medium passes through the start area) The storage unit stores the variable display determination random number extracted by the storage unit as a storage unit with a predetermined upper limit as a limit. Stages (for example, first and second special figure reservation storage units 591A, 591B, etc.), the variable display pattern determination means, the number of reservation storage stored in the reservation storage means when the start condition is satisfied, The variable display pattern of the identification information is determined based on the random number for variable display determination extracted by the extraction unit and the determination value corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns. Based on the random number for variable display determination extracted by the extraction means and the determined values corresponding to the plurality of types of variable display patterns, the variable display pattern of the identification information is identified from among the plurality of types of variable display patterns. It is determined whether or not a variable display pattern (for example, a variation pattern with super reach) is obtained (for example, the CPU 505 performs steps S528 and S534). The specific effect executing means executes the specific effect when it is determined by the start determining means to control to the specific game state or when the specific variable display pattern is determined. (For example, the CPU of the production control microcomputer 120 executes steps S <b> 554 to S <b> 556, steps S <b> 561 to S <b> 563, or steps S <b> 705 to S <b> 709 based on the determination in step S <b> 701, etc.) At least a part of the determined values corresponding to the specific variable display pattern is the same determined value (for example, as shown in FIG. 50) regardless of the number of reserved memories stored by the reserved storage means when the start condition is satisfied. Such as a value in the range of “230” to “251” within the specific pattern common range). The determined value corresponding to the non-specific variable display pattern that is different from the specific variable display pattern is determined depending on the number of reserved memories stored by the reserved storage means when the start condition is satisfied (for example, 50 is set, and the start determination means determines whether or not the variable display determination random number extracted by the extraction means matches the same determination value. It may be determined whether or not the specific variable display pattern is obtained (for example, the CPU 505 determines whether or not the random value MR3 is within the specific pattern common range in steps S528 and S534). Etc.) The non-specific variable display pattern is a variable display pattern in which a reach state is not established, and the display result is derived and displayed after variable display of the identification information is started in comparison with the specific variable display pattern. The variable display pattern (for example, variation pattern PA1-2) for shortening the variable display time until the variable display pattern determining means is stored in the holding storage means when the variable display start condition is satisfied When the number of reserved storage to be performed is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, when the total number of reserved storage in normal time is “3” or more or “6” or more, In this case, the number of determination values corresponding to the variable display pattern for shortening is set larger than in the case where the number of reserved storage is less than a predetermined number. The variable display pattern may be determined using the determined value (for example, referring to any of the loss variation pattern type determination tables 133C and 133D selected by the CPU of the effect control microcomputer 120 in steps S258 and S259). The portion for determining the variation pattern type in S260).

  In such a configuration, at least a part of the determined values corresponding to the specific variable display pattern is set to the same determined value regardless of the number of reserved memories when the start condition is satisfied. By determining whether or not the random number for determining variable display matches, it is determined whether or not a specific variable display pattern is obtained. This makes it possible to reliably determine that the specific variable display pattern is to be obtained before the variable display of the identification information. In addition, since the determined value corresponding to the non-specific variable display pattern different from the specific variable display pattern is set according to the number of the stored storage when the start condition is satisfied, the determined storage means stores the determined value. The variable display time can be varied according to the number of reserved memories, and the situation where the variable display operating rate is reduced can be prevented as much as possible.

  Further, the numerical value updating means cyclically updates the numerical data from a predetermined update initial value to a predetermined update final value within a predetermined range in which the numerical data can be updated (for example, a random number generation circuit 553 or a random number sequence change circuit). 555), the game control microcomputer sets the predetermined update initial value every time the game control microcomputer is system-reset. A random initial value setting means that can be variably set (for example, a portion where the CPU 505 executes the process of step S55, a start value setting circuit 554, or the like) may be included.

  In such a configuration, the predetermined update initial value set for the numerical value updating means to cyclically update the numerical data can be variably set every time the game control microcomputer is reset. As a result, it becomes difficult to specify numerical data that becomes a random number value after the occurrence of a system reset, and it is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts such as aiming.

  Further, after power supply to the gaming machine is started, the random number initial value setting is provided with counting means (for example, a free-run counter 554A) for counting initial value determination data separately from the operation of the control CPU. The means may determine the predetermined update initial value using the initial value determination data counted by the counting means (for example, the start value setting circuit 554 determines the start value based on the processing of step S55 by the CPU 505). Etc.)

  In such a configuration, the predetermined update initial value is determined using the initial value determination data counted by the counting means separately from the operation of the control CPU. This makes it difficult to specify numerical data that is a random number value from the operation mode of the control CPU, and it is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts such as aiming.

  The nonvolatile memory is built in the game control microcomputer, and the game control microcomputer restricts external reading of the nonvolatile memory other than the control CPU (for example, internal resource access). A control circuit 501A or the like).

  In such a configuration, the game control microcomputer includes a read restriction circuit that restricts external reading of the nonvolatile memory other than by the control CPU. This makes it difficult to read out and analyze the control program stored in the non-volatile memory from the outside of the microcomputer for game control, and to aim at the so-called “hanging board” based on the analysis result of the control program. Unauthorized acts caused by connection can be surely prevented.

  A random number clock generation circuit (for example, the random number clock generation circuit 112) that generates a random number clock signal outside the game control microcomputer and supplies the random number clock signal to the random number circuit and the control CPU. A control clock generation circuit for generating a control clock signal (for example, the control clock generation circuit 111 and the clock circuit 502), and the random number circuit is built in the game control microcomputer, and the game control micro The computer compares the input state of the random number clock signal supplied from the random number clock generation circuit with the control clock signal generated by the control clock generation circuit, thereby obtaining the input state of the random number clock signal. Random number clock abnormality determination means (for example, frequency monitor) for determining whether abnormality has occurred. Circuit 551, and, like parts CPU505 is executing the processing in steps S62 to S66) may include.

  In such a configuration, the input state of the random number clock signal is compared by comparing the input state of the random number clock signal supplied from the random number clock generation circuit with the control clock signal generated by the control clock generation circuit. It is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the state. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game control from being executed in a state in which an abnormality has occurred in the operation of updating the numerical data serving as the random value.

  The control start time processing means is a system reset that sets the predetermined data to a second value when a system reset of the game control microcomputer is released and execution of game control by the control CPU is started. Time processing means (for example, a portion where the CPU 505 executes the process of step S56) may be included.

  In such a configuration, when the system reset of the game control microcomputer is released and the execution of the game control is started, the system reset time processing means sets the predetermined data to the second value. Thereby, for example, it is possible to prevent the numerical data stored in the random number storage means from being erroneously acquired as a random value in a state where the power supply voltage is unstable when the power is turned on.

  Power supply monitoring means (for example, a power supply monitoring circuit) that monitors a predetermined power supply voltage generated based on power supply to the gaming machine and outputs a detection signal (for example, a power-off signal) based on the decrease in the predetermined power supply voltage 303), and the game control microcomputer repeats the detection signal input state after the detection signal is output from the power source monitoring means until the game control microcomputer is stopped. Game control is performed by the control CPU when it is determined that the detection signal is not input by the detection determination means (for example, the part where the CPU 505 executes the process of step S119) and the detection determination means. Control means at power failure recovery for starting execution of game control from the top of the processing program (for example, the CPU 505 And the control start time processing means indicates that the detection signal has not been input by the detection determination means. After the determination is made, before the power interruption recovery control means causes the control CPU to start execution of game control from the beginning of the game control processing program, the predetermined data is set to the second value. A disconnection recovery processing means (for example, a portion where the CPU 505 executes the processes of steps S121 and S123) may be included.

  In such a configuration, after the detection signal is output from the power supply monitoring unit, the input state of the detection signal is repeatedly determined by the detection determination unit until the game control microcomputer is stopped. Then, after the determination that the detection signal is not input, before the execution of the game control is started from the head of the game control processing program by the control CPU, the power failure recovery processing means performs predetermined data Is the second value. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the numerical data stored in the random number storage means from being erroneously acquired as a random value when the power supply voltage is unstable, for example, when the predetermined power supply voltage is lowered.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a power supply board. It is a timing diagram which shows typically the state of a reset signal and a power-off signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the microcomputer for game control. It is a figure which shows an example of the address map in the microcomputer for game control. It is a figure which illustrates the main part of a program management area and a built-in register area. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting content in a header and function setting. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting content in 1st random number initial setting, 2nd random number initial setting, and interruption initial setting. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting content in security time setting. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an internal information register. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random value used as the game random number. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a random number circuit. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a random number sequence change register. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change operation | movement of the random number sequence update rule by a random number sequence change circuit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change operation | movement of the random number sequence update rule by a random number sequence change circuit. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a random value acquisition register. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a random number latch selection register. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a random value register. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a random number latch flag register. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a random number interrupt control register. It is a figure which shows the structural example in case a random number circuit is externally attached to the microcomputer for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an input port register. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which illustrates a variation pattern classification. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a variation pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a variation pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a common figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a starting opening prize table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the various buffers used for an input port check. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a security check process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a random number circuit setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a random number circuit abnormality test | inspection process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a power-off process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a switch process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd starting opening | mouth abnormal winning invalidation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main side error process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a random value acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a random value determination process at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the specific pattern common range etc. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal electric accessory operating process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a figure which shows an example of an abnormality alerting | reporting screen. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design fluctuation | variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a continuous notice setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during decoration design change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control command processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation when a notice effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation when a notice effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation when a notice effect is performed. It is a timing chart for demonstrating operation | movement in a random number circuit. 7 is a timing chart for explaining a read operation of a random value register, and the like. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the operation | movement etc. at the time of the fall of a power supply voltage.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is shot and shot by a ball hitting device including a shooting motor 61 shown in FIG.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). Special symbols (also referred to as “special graphics”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, are variably displayed (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. There is no limitation, and for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols. A plurality of special symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided above the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B displays the variable display hold memory number (special figure hold memory number) in the special figure game so that it can be specified (special figure hold memory display). As an example, the first hold indicator 25A displays the variable display hold memory number (first special figure hold memory number) in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A so as to be specified. To do. The second hold indicator 25B displays the variable display hold memory number (second special figure hold memory number) in the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B so that it can be specified. The variable display hold memory in the special game is started when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Occurs when winning a prize. That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. The start that is established when the start condition for starting the variable display game is not satisfied because the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The variable display holding storage corresponding to the condition is performed. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B has a number (for example, 4) corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number, for example. As long as it is configured to include a plurality of LEDs.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). The normal symbol display 20 variably displays, for example, a plurality of types of normal symbols composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. A plurality of types of normal symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. The normal symbol display 20 is not limited to the one that variably displays the numbers indicating “0” to “9” or the symbols indicating “−” as normal symbols. For example, “O” and “X” are displayed. Ordinary symbols are variably displayed by alternately lighting the decorative lamps (or LEDs) to be displayed, or by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as “left”, “middle”, and “right” in a predetermined order. It may be a thing.

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general figure hold display unit 25C displays the variable display hold memory number (the general figure hold memory number) in the general game so that it can be specified (the general figure hold memory display). Here, the variable display hold storage in the usual game occurs when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 provided in the game area. That is, when the condition for executing the variable display of the usual game is established, but the condition for starting the usual game is not established, the pending game is stored. The general-purpose hold display unit 25C may be configured to include, for example, a number (for example, four) of LEDs corresponding to the upper limit value (for example, “4”) of the general-purpose reserved storage number.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display (LCD) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol variable display by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol variable display by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game respectively correspond to the variable display. For example, in a decorative symbol display unit serving as a variable display unit divided into a plurality of parts such as three, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified are variably displayed.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. Then, in the special symbol game, any one of the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started. In response to this, variable display of decorative symbols (for example, vertical or horizontal scroll display) is performed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. Be started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game (completely stopped display), the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L in the image display device 5 are displayed. At 5C and 5R, the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped (completely stopped). The “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R are movable within the display area of the image display device 5, and display the decorative symbols in a reduced or enlarged manner. You may be able to do that. When the special symbol or the decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed, the display result in the variable display of each symbol is definitely displayed, and thereafter, the display state is such that the player can recognize that the current variable display does not proceed. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is displayed completely stopped, the variation speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”. Ornamental symbols may be displayed in a stationary state, for example, in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed deterministically, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbols completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Stopping and displaying the display symbol to the extent that the player can recognize that the variation of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is not progressing like the complete stop display or the temporary stop display is also referred to as a derivation display.

  The decorative symbols variably displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters). Numbers “1” to “8”, English letters “A” to “H”, effect images showing eight characters related to a predetermined motif, effect images combining numbers, characters or symbols and characters, and the like. The effect image indicating the character may include, for example, a person or an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or an image indicating any other figure. In addition to these eight types of decorative symbols, a blank symbol (a symbol that does not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the number of types of decorative symbols that are variably displayed is not limited to eight, but may be any number of decorative symbols.

  While the decorative symbols are changing, in the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, for example, from the smallest to the largest symbol numbers, for example, from top to bottom. Alternatively, a scrolling display that flows from the right side to the left side is performed. Then, when the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the “left” decorative symbol display portion 5L), the symbol number is scrolled from the largest to the smallest, and the symbols are displayed. When the decorative design having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative design having the largest design number may be displayed.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a start winning storage display area 5H is arranged. In the start winning memory display area 5H, a hold memory display for displaying the variable display hold number corresponding to the special figure game (special figure hold memory number) is specified. Here, the variable display suspension corresponding to the special game is that the game ball passes through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Generated based on the start winning by entering (entering). That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the presence or the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the start condition that is satisfied is satisfied. Variable display is held.

  As an example, in the start winning memory display area 5H, from the left in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is established based on the occurrence of the start winning corresponding to each of the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening. A plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed are provided to the right. Then, when the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is established based on the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening. One of the display parts that are normally non-displayed (transparent color) (for example, the display part at the left end of the display part corresponding to the first start winning opening that is not displayed) is changed to blue display. . Also, when the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied based on the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. Then, one of the display parts that are normally non-displayed (for example, the leftmost display part of the display area corresponding to the non-displayed second start winning opening) is changed to red display. Thereafter, when the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure is established, for example, one of the display parts corresponding to the first start winning opening (for example, blue display is displayed). The display part at the right end of the display part) is returned to non-display. Further, when the start condition (second start condition) for the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, for example, one of the display parts corresponding to the second start winning opening (for example, red display). The display part at the right end of the display part) is returned to non-display.

  In the start winning memory display area 5H, a number indicating the special figure reserved memory number may be displayed so that the player or the like can recognize the special figure reserved memory number. In addition to the start winning memory display area 5H or in place of the start winning memory display area 5H, a display for displaying the number of special figure reserved memories may be provided. In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the start winning memory display area 5H, the first hold for displaying the special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A display 25A and a second hold display 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A in an identifiable manner. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number as an effective start winning ball number that has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B in an identifiable manner. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B has a number (for example, 4) corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number, for example. LED).

  Thus, although the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, the special game started first is being executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. For this reason, when the start condition for starting the special figure game is not satisfied, variable display suspension corresponding to the special figure game occurs. For example, if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied when the first start condition is satisfied, the first special figure The number of reserved memories is incremented by 1 (incremented), and the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. In addition, when the second start condition is satisfied, if the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied, the second special figure The reserved memory number is incremented by 1 (incremented), and execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first special figure holding memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the special figure game using the second special figure is executed. Is started, the second special figure reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decremented).

  The variable display hold memory number obtained by adding the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number is also referred to as a total hold memory number. When simply referring to the “number of special figure hold memory”, it usually refers to a concept including any of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number. It may refer to a concept that includes the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excludes the total reserved memory number).

  The display area of the image display device 5 may be provided with a color symbol display unit that variably displays a color symbol as identification information different from the decorative symbol. As an example, when the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started in the color symbol display unit, the variation of the color symbol (for example, display color update display) is started. When the special symbol game using the second special symbol is started by the “left” color symbol display unit and the second special symbol display device 4B, the variation of the color symbol is started. The display part should just be included. Then, when the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result in the special graphic game is completely stopped and displayed, the variation of the color symbol is finished, and the fixed color symbol that is the variable display result of the color symbol is completely stopped and displayed. There are, for example, five types of symbols (“yellow”, “green”, “red”, “blue”, “purple”, etc.) for the color symbols variably displayed on the “left” and “right” color symbol display sections. It is sufficient that a plurality of types of color designs are included. Each of the color symbols is assigned a corresponding symbol number. As an example, the symbol numbers “1” to “5” may be assigned to the color symbols “yellow”, “green”, “red”, “blue”, and “purple”. For example, when the variable symbol display result (special symbol display result) is “losing”, the color symbol variable symbol display result is “yellow”, and the special symbol display result is “big hit”. When the big hit type is “non-probable change”, the fixed color design of “green” is stopped and displayed as the variable display result of the color design, the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change” In this case, the fixed color design of “red” is stopped and displayed as the variable symbol display result, and when the special symbol display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, the variable symbol display result is “ When the “blue” fixed color symbol is stopped and the special symbol display result is “small hit”, the “purple” fixed color symbol may be stopped and displayed as the variable symbol display result.

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning opening that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is an electric tulip type having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state that is a vertical position and an expanded open state that is a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. An accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided to form a second start winning opening. As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball enters (passes) into the second start winning opening. It becomes a normal open state that is difficult to do. On the other hand, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the ON state, the movable wing piece enters the tilting position, so that the game ball enters (passes through) the second start winning opening. ) Easy to expand. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, although the game ball can enter (pass) into the second start winning opening even when in the normal open state, the game ball enters (passes through) in the expanded open state ( You may comprise so that possibility that it may pass) may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured so that the game ball does not enter (pass) the second starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening. .

  As an example, the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B may include a base plate, a pair of left and right opening / closing blades (opening / closing pieces), a front plate, a support member, a winning ball guiding member, a transmission member, and a connecting arm locking member. The base plate is disposed on the front side of the game board 2 at the installation position of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. A pair of left and right opening / closing blades (opening / closing pieces) are rotatably provided on the front side of the base plate. The front plate is disposed on the front side of the opening / closing blade, and constitutes a second start winning opening together with the base plate and the opening / closing blade. The support member is disposed on the rear side (back side) of the base plate and constitutes a part of the main body of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. The winning ball guiding member is arranged on the upper part of the base plate to constitute the normal winning ball device 6A and the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, and enters (passes) into the first start winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. A guiding path for guiding the played game ball to the back side of the game board 2 is configured. The transmission member is rotatably supported in a state of being accommodated in a cylindrically formed support member, and intervenes so that the opening / closing blade and the solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory are interlocked. The solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory only needs to be disposed at a position above the rear surface of the support member. The connecting arm locking member is attached to the tip of the plunger of the solenoid 81 and is linked to the connecting arm of the transmission member.

  The base plate, the front plate, and the support member included in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are members constituting the main body of the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, and the base plate and the support member include opening / closing blades and an electric drive unit. And a support mechanism for supporting the transmission member.

  Each of the pair of left and right open / close blades is formed in a substantially triangular prism, and a blade rotation shaft protrudes rearward from a predetermined position on the lower rear surface serving as the base, and the blade rotation shaft pivots on the base plate. It is supported. Then, with the blade rotation axis as the center, the opening and closing blades face in the vertical direction to close the second start winning opening, and the closed state where the game ball does not enter (pass) into the second starting winning opening (also referred to as a closed state). ) Further, the opening / closing blade tilts outward from the vertical direction to open the second start winning opening, and an open state in which a game ball easily enters (passes) the second starting winning opening.

  A projecting piece protrudes at the lower end position (base end) when the open / close blade is in a closed state, and when the open / close blade is in an open state, the protrusion is protruded at a predetermined height position on the back surface of the front plate. When the projecting piece of the opening / closing blade comes into contact with the piece, the rotation of the opening / closing blade is restricted at a predetermined opening position. The open / close blade is formed with a flat ball receiving surface that is inclined slightly downward from the outside toward the center when in the open state. When the open / close blade is in the open state, the game ball that has dropped onto the ball receiving surface of the open / close blade is guided toward the center. When the open / close blades are in the closed state, the ball receiving surfaces of the left and right open / close blades are arranged to face each other with a width dimension slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball.

  The game ball guided toward the center by the ball receiving surface when the open / close blades are in the open state falls into a gap formed between the left and right open / close blades. This game ball is guided toward the back side by a pair of left and right ball guide ribs erected upward from the upper surface of the bottom plate of the front plate, and passes through the second start winning opening which is an opening formed in the base plate. Then, it flows into the support member on the back side.

  The left and right opening / closing blades are provided with projecting pins projecting rearward at positions eccentric from the blade rotation shafts on the rear surfaces. The tip of each linkage pin extends through the base plate to the inside of the support member. The tip of this linkage pin is linked to the transmission member, and is configured such that the opening / closing blade opens and closes in conjunction with the rotation of the transmission member.

  The support member supports the transmission member so as to be rotatable in a state in which the transmission member is accommodated therein. Further, the support member accommodates a plunger in the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory. Further, the support member has a size that can guide the game ball that has entered the interior through the second start winning opening toward the second start opening switch 22B (see FIG. 2) provided on the back side. It has a cylindrical shape.

  On the side walls arranged on the left and right sides of the support member, the rotation shaft (transmission member rotation shaft) of the transmission member can be rotated and moved in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the plunger of the solenoid 81 advances and retreats). A long bearing hole for supporting is formed. A guide groove serving as a movement guide portion for moving and guiding the guide pin of the transmission member is formed above the bearing slot in the side wall of the support member. The guide groove includes an arc groove portion (first guide portion) formed in an arc shape centered on the bearing long hole, and a linear straight groove portion (second guide line) continuously provided forward from the front end of the arc groove portion. Guide section).

  The circular arc groove portion of the guide groove formed in the support member is notched from the rear end surface of the support member toward the front. The upper arc surface (curved surface) of the arc groove portion is approximately the circumference of the transmission member centering on the guide pin of the transmission member when the transmission member rotation shaft is located on the solenoid 81 side which is the rear end of the bearing long hole. It is formed in an arc shape that forms a quarter. The lower arc surface (curved surface) of the arc groove portion is a gently upward curved surface on which the guide pin of the transmission member can ride from the lower straight surface of the linear groove portion, and is separated from the upper arc surface as it goes rearward. Is formed so as to gradually spread.

  An upper straight surface, a lower straight surface, and a front end surface are formed in the straight groove portion of the guide groove formed in the support member. The upper straight surface of the straight groove portion is continuous from the front end of the upper arc surface of the arc groove portion, and extends substantially horizontally (in the axial direction of the plunger of the solenoid 81) toward the front. Restrict upward movement. The lower straight surface of the straight groove portion is continuous from the front end of the lower arc surface of the arc groove portion and extends substantially horizontally toward the front. The front end face of the straight groove is formed in an arc shape that connects the upper straight face and the lower straight face, and restricts forward movement of the guide pin of the transmission member. Such a linear groove portion accommodates the guide pin of the transmission member when the transmission member rotation shaft is located at the rear end (rotation position) of the bearing oblong hole and moves in the rotation direction by the upper linear surface. It can be regulated by abutment, and when the transmission member rotation shaft is located at the front end (regulation position) of the bearing oblong hole, the abutment regulation by the upper straight surface is released and movement in the rotational direction is allowed. It is formed to a certain length.

  The linear groove portion of the guide groove formed in the support member is formed so as to be parallel to the bearing slot. Further, a concave groove is formed in a rearward direction from the rear end of the bearing long hole on the inner surface of the support member to the rear end surface of the housing recess, and the transmission member rotation shaft is pushed in from the back side of the support member. It can be pivotally supported in the bearing slot.

  The transmission member includes left and right linking arms and a connecting arm as a linking member that connects upper portions of the left and right linking arms. The left linkage arm is linked to the left opening / closing blade, and the right linkage arm is linked to the right opening / closing blade. Each of the left and right linkage arms is connected to an arm portion formed in a predetermined length, a transmission member rotation shaft projecting outward from the outer surface on the base end side of the arm portion, and a distal end of the arm portion. A side-view substantially C-shaped linkage pin locking portion that locks at the tip of the linkage pin of the opening / closing blade is provided. The linkage pin locking portion includes an upper locking piece and a lower locking piece formed so that the linkage pin formed on the opening / closing blade can be freely inserted, and is linked to the opening / closing blade rotating around the blade rotation axis. Thus, the link pins of the opening and closing blades that move up and down along the arc around the blade rotation axis have a left and right width dimension that allows the left and right movement. Thus, the linkage pin locking portion constitutes an opening / closing blade linkage portion.

  The connecting arm of the transmission member is composed of a rod-like member extending in the left-right direction (direction orthogonal to the axial direction of the plunger of the solenoid 81) provided between the left and right connecting arms, and both ends thereof are connected to the left and right connecting arms. Is connected to the upper portion of the arm portion in the front-rear direction (upper portion between the linkage pin locking portion and the transmission member rotating shaft). Guide pins that are slidably fitted in guide grooves formed in the support member are provided outwardly projecting from the left and right ends of the connecting arm. This guide pin is disposed at an eccentric position that is eccentric from the transmission member rotation axis that is the rotation center of the transmission member, and guides the movement of the linkage pin locking portion that is provided continuously to the tip of the arm portion of the linkage arm. Do. The connecting arm of the transmission member is engaged (linked) with a connecting arm locking member formed in a downward bifurcated shape attached to the tip of the plunger with the plunger of the solenoid 81 disposed upward. . Thus, the connection arm of the transmission member constitutes a solenoid linking part.

  When the transmission member rotation shaft is located at the rear end (rotation position) of the bearing elongated hole of the support member, the transmission member has a closed posture in which the open / close blade is closed (closed state) and the open / close blade is opened. It is pivotally supported so as to be freely rotatable between the open postures to be in a state. That is, the transmission member has a first direction for rotating the opening / closing blade from the open state to the closed state when the transmission member rotation shaft is located at the rear end (rotation position) of the bearing oblong hole, and the opening / closing blade. Can be pivoted in a second direction that rotates from the closed position toward the open position. In addition, when the transmission member rotation shaft is located on the opening / closing blade side which is the front end (regulatory position) of the bearing elongated hole of the support member, the rotation in the first direction and the second direction projects to the left and right ends of the connecting arm. It is regulated by the provided guide pin and the upper straight surface and the lower straight surface in the guide groove of the support member, and is supported so as to be movable only in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the plunger of the solenoid 81 advances and retreats).

  The connecting arm locking member includes a mounting portion that is attached to the tip of the plunger of the solenoid 81 and a pair of left and right locking portions that hang downward from the lower left and right sides of the mounting portion. The left and right latching portions each have a predetermined length and face in the up-down direction, and a front locking piece and a rear locking piece, and a connecting arm of the transmission member between the front locking piece and the rear locking piece. And a locking recess having a front-rear width that can be fitted. The locking recess has a vertical width that allows the connecting arm of the transmission member to move up and down. Then, in accordance with the back-and-forth movement of the plunger of the solenoid 81, the connecting arm of the transmission member that rotates about the transmission member rotation axis is locked so as to be able to move back and forth and move up and down.

  The solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory urges the plunger to the protruding position when the main body portion, the plunger fitted to the main body portion so as to freely advance and retreat, and the solenoid 81 in a non-excited state (off state). A coil spring. When the solenoid 81 is in an excited state (on state), the plunger moves to the retracted position against the biasing force of the coil spring.

  The opening / closing blades and the transmission member are linked by loosely fitting the linkage pins of the opening / closing blades between the upper and lower locking portions of the linkage pin locking portion of the transmission member. Between the transmission member and the solenoid 81, the connecting arm of the transmission member is loosely fitted in a locking recess formed between the front and rear locking pieces of the connecting arm locking member attached to the tip of the plunger of the solenoid 81. To be linked. Accordingly, when the solenoid 81 is excited and demagnetized, the plunger moves in the front-rear direction, and moves forward and backward with respect to the opening and closing blades, so that the forward / backward movement force is transmitted from the connecting arm locking member to the transmission member via the connecting arm. The transmission member rotates in the front-rear direction around the transmission member rotation axis that faces the direction substantially orthogonal to the plunger. The turning force of the transmission member is transmitted from the linkage pin locking portion to the opening / closing blade via the linkage pin, and the opening / closing blade rotates around the blade rotation axis facing the front-rear direction parallel to the plunger.

  In the transmission member, a connecting arm erected between the upper portions of the left and right linkage arms is locked (linked) to the plunger of the solenoid 81, and the forward / backward movement force of the single plunger is transmitted via the linkage arms and the left and right linkage arms. To the left and right open / close blades. Thereby, the structure of the transmission mechanism is simplified, and the left and right opening / closing blades are driven by the common solenoid 81, so that the left and right opening / closing blades can be rotated in synchronization with each other. Further, since the space surrounded by the left and right linkage arms, the upper connecting arm, and the bottom plate of the support member provided in the transmission member can be configured as a guide path for the game ball, the apparatus can be made as compact as possible. Further, since the transmission member and the solenoid 81 are accommodated inside the cylindrical support member, it becomes difficult to forcibly move the transmission member and the plunger of the solenoid 81 from the outside. Is effectively prevented.

  When an excitation release operation (first operation) is performed in which the solenoid 81 is switched from the excited state (on state) to the non-excited state (off state), the plunger moves forward from the retracted position toward the protruding position by the biasing force of the coil spring. To do. At this time, in the transmission member, the rear end of the connecting arm is urged toward the front opening / closing blade by the front surface of the rear locking piece of the connecting arm locking member. The guide pin of the transmission member is also biased forward, but is slidably guided downward together with the front by the upper arc surface of the arc groove portion of the guide groove in the support member. The transmission member rotation shaft is held at the rear end (rotation position) of the bearing elongated hole in the support member, and the linkage arm of the transmission member is guided to move downward. Further, the transmission member is biased forward by the front surface of the rear locking piece of the connection arm locking member, so that the transmission member moves downward in the first direction (the tip of the linkage arm moves downward). Rotate in the direction of Due to the rotation of the transmission member in the first direction, the upper locking piece of the linkage pin locking portion in the linkage arm of the transmission member locks the linkage pin of the opening / closing blade from above and lowers the linkage pin. As a result, the open / close blade rotates about the blade rotation axis to enter a closed state.

  Further, when the plunger moves forward toward the protruding position by the biasing force of the coil spring, the connection arm of the transmission member is biased forward by the connection arm locking member, and the guide pin of the transmission member is guided by the support member. Guided forward by the upper straight surface and the lower straight surface of the straight groove portion of the groove. Then, the transmission member rotation shaft is guided toward the front end (regulation position) of the bearing long hole in the support member. Thus, the transmission member slides horizontally together with the plunger toward the front. After that, when the solenoid 81 is maintained in a non-excited state (off state), in the linkage arm of the transmission member, the linkage pin locking portion is in a horizontal posture in which it is slightly downward, and the linkage pin of the opening and closing blade is in the lower limit position. The opening / closing blade is maintained in a closed state.

  When the excitation operation (second operation) in which the solenoid 81 is switched from the non-excitation state (off state) to the excitation state (on state) is performed, the plunger moves backward from the protruding position toward the retracted position against the biasing force of the coil spring. Move to. At this time, in the transmission member, the front end of the connecting arm is urged rearward by the back surface of the front locking piece of the connecting arm locking member. And the guide pin of a transmission member is guided toward back by the upper straight surface and lower straight surface in the linear groove part of the guide groove in a support member. The transmission member rotation shaft is guided from the front end (regulation position) of the bearing oblong hole in the support member toward the rear end (rotation position). Thus, the transmission member slides horizontally together with the plunger toward the rear. During this period, the transmission member moves rearward without rotating in the closed posture. Therefore, the open / close blade is maintained in a closed state.

  When the transmission member rotation shaft reaches the rear end of the bearing long hole in the support member, and the guide pin of the transmission member reaches the rear end position in the linear groove portion of the guide groove in the support member, that is, the lower end position of the arc groove portion. The contact restriction by the upper straight surface of the straight groove is released. Thus, the transmission member is in a state of being rotatable upward.

  Further, when the plunger moves backward toward the retracted position against the biasing force of the coil spring, the transmission member rotating shaft is restricted from moving backward at the rear end (rotating position) of the bearing oblong hole in the support member. Is done. And the bearing long hole and the linear groove part of a guide groove are mutually parallel, and the linear groove part is formed upwards rather than a bearing long hole, Therefore The guide pin of a transmission member is guided toward the upper back. At this time, the guide pin of the transmission member rides on the front end of the lower arc surface of the arc groove portion of the guide groove portion of the support member. Thus, the lower arc surface in the arc groove portion of the guide groove portion reliably guides the guide pin of the transmission member upward and rearward. The guide pin of the transmission member is slidably guided upward along with the back by the lower arc surface of the arc groove portion of the guide groove portion of the support member. As a result, the linkage arm of the transmission member is guided to move upward about the transmission member rotation axis located at the rear end of the bearing slot. Further, the transmission member is biased rearward by the back surface of the front locking piece of the connection arm locking member, so that the transmission member moves upward in the second direction (the tip of the linkage arm moves upward). Rotate in the direction of Due to the rotation of the transmission member in the second direction, the lower locking piece of the linkage pin locking portion of the linkage arm of the transmission member locks the linkage pin of the opening / closing blade from below and raises the linkage pin. As a result, the opening / closing blade rotates around the blade rotation axis to be in an open state.

  When the plunger moves to the retracted position and the solenoid 81 is maintained in the excited state (on state), the linkage arm of the transmission member assumes a tilting posture in which the linkage pin locking portion faces upward, The linkage pin becomes the upper limit position, and the opening / closing blade is maintained in the open state.

  When the solenoid 81 is in a non-excited state (off state), for example, when a stress for forcibly opening the open / close blade is applied to at least one open / close blade, the link pin of the open / close blade rises from the lower limit position. Then, the transmission arm is locked by the upper locking piece of the linkage arm, and the linkage arm tends to rotate upward about the transmission member rotation axis. At this time, the guide pin of the transmission member is located in front of the linear groove portion in the guide groove formed in the support member. As a result, the upward movement of the guide pin is restricted by the upper straight surface of the straight groove portion of the guide groove. As described above, the upward rotation (rotation in the second direction) of the transmission member is regulated by the contact between the guide pin of the transmission member and the upper straight surface in the groove portion immediately before the guide groove formed in the support member. The Therefore, the upward movement of the linkage pin of the opening / closing blade locked to the upper locking piece of the linkage arm of the transmission member is also regulated by the upper locking piece. In this way, even if a stress is applied to force the opening and closing blades to rotate toward the open position, the closing of the opening and closing blades in the linkage pin is restricted by the rotation-restricted transmission member. It can be maintained and prevented from being forcibly opened.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a large winning opening door solenoid 82 shown in FIG. 2) to form a big prize opening. As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the off state, the special prize opening door closes the special prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the ON state, the big prize opening door opens the big winning opening. A game ball that has entered a special winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is detected by, for example, a count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, one or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken. Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided an operation knob 30 serving as a hitting operation handle operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the resilience of the game ball is adjusted according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device. At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. ) Is provided. Below the hitting ball supply tray, there is provided an extra ball receiving tray (lower plate) that holds (stores) game balls that cannot be stored in the hitting ball supply tray.

  For example, at a predetermined position in the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 such as a central position on the front side of the upper surface of the hitting ball supply tray, an operation button that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like is installed. May be. This operation button can be pressed and can be a rotatable jog dial. The operation buttons are not limited to those that can be pressed and rotated, and may be those that can be touched and pressed, such as a touch panel. Further, instead of the operation button, a sensor that can detect a predetermined operation action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. That is, the operation button only needs to be configured to detect a predetermined operation action by the player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. The player's instruction operation on the operation button may be detected by a predetermined operation detection switch.

  Instead of these operation buttons or together with the operation buttons, for example, in a member that forms the lower plate, the player holds it at a predetermined position (for example, the central portion of the lower plate) on the upper surface of the lower plate body. A stick controller capable of tilting operation may be attached. The stick controller includes an operation rod that the player holds, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation rod (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is placed when the player holds the operation rod). . The trigger button allows a predetermined instruction operation by a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) in a state where the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). It suffices to be configured. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push / pull operation on the trigger button may be incorporated in the operation rod. A tilt direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the body of the lower plate in the lower part of the stick controller. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation pole when viewed from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. And a pair of transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including the photo sensor. In addition, the attachment position of the stick controller in the lower plate is not limited to the central portion of the lower plate, and may be a position close to the left or right.

  The attachment positions of the stick controller and the operation buttons need only be in a vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, it is good also considering the attachment position of a stick controller and an operation button as the position which moved to either the right or left in an upper plate and a lower plate, maintaining the vertical positional relationship. Alternatively, the attachment position of the stick controller and the operation button may not be in the vertical relationship but may be in the horizontal relationship, for example.

  Furthermore, a prepaid card unit (card unit) for executing processing for enabling ball lending using a prepaid card or the like may be installed at a predetermined position adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. The card unit may not only execute a lending process by taking a prepaid card, but may also execute a lending process by taking a membership card or cash.

  In the normal game with the normal symbol display 20, the normal symbol display 20 shows that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. After the general chart start condition for executing variable display is established, based on the fact that the general chart start condition for starting variable display of normal symbols, such as the end of the previous general chart game, is established, Be started. In this normal game, after a normal symbol change is started, when a predetermined variable display time (normal symbol change time) elapses, a fixed normal symbol that is a variable symbol display result is displayed in a completely stopped manner. The variable symbol display time may be determined as one of a plurality of variable display times by, for example, extracting numerical data indicating a predetermined random value at the start of each normal game. . If a specific normal symbol (a symbol per symbol) such as a number indicating “7” or a symbol indicating “O” is stopped and displayed as a fixed normal symbol that is a variable display result of the normal symbol in the normal game, The variable display result of the normal symbol is “per standard”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number other than the number indicating “7” or a symbol indicating “x” is stopped and displayed as the fixed normal symbol, for example, the variable display result of the normal symbol is “ It will be “usually lost”. Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variable display result is "per normal figure", the movable wing piece (a pair of left and right open / close blades) of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted (open state). When the predetermined time elapses, the normal opening control for returning to the vertical position (closed state) is performed.

  The special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is caused by the fact that the game ball that has entered the first starting winning port formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting port switch 22A shown in FIG. The process starts when the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied. The first start condition is satisfied when the current special figure game using the first special figure can be started, for example, when the previous special figure game, the big hit game state, or the small hit game state is finished. In the special game by the second special symbol display device 4B, a game ball that has entered the second start winning port formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start port switch 22B shown in FIG. Is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied after the second start condition is satisfied. The second start condition is satisfied when the current special figure game using the second special figure can be started, for example, when the previous special figure game, the big hit gaming state, or the small hit gaming state is finished.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, after a predetermined variable display time (special symbol variation time) has elapsed after the variable symbol special display is started, the special symbol is displayed. The fixed special symbol that will be the variable display result is displayed as a complete stop. The variable symbol display time of the special symbol is, for example, numerical data indicating a random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern type as shown in FIG. 14 or numerical data indicating a random value MR5 for determining a variation pattern at the start of each special symbol game. Corresponding to the variation pattern determined based on the above, it is determined as one of a plurality of types of variable display times. The variable display result of the special symbol in the special figure game is also referred to as a special figure display result. If a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol that will be the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, it will be a “big hit” as the specific display result, and a specific special that is different from the big bonus symbol If the symbol (small hit symbol) is stopped and displayed, it will be the “small hit” as the predetermined display result. If the special symbol (losing symbol) other than the big hit symbol or small hit symbol is stopped, the non-specific display result will be displayed. It becomes "losing". After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as the specific gaming state. Further, after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit game state different from the big hit game state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, as an example, numbers indicating “1”, “3”, and “7” are jackpot symbols, numbers indicating “5” are jackpot symbols, and “−” is indicated. The symbol is a lost pattern. It should be noted that each symbol such as a big win symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lose symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lost symbol.

  In this embodiment, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “3”, and “7” that are jackpot symbols, the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” are 15 round jackpot symbols, A special symbol indicating the number “1” is a two-round jackpot symbol. In the big hit gaming state (15 round big hit state) as the first specific gaming state controlled after the 15 round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the open / close plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is played by opening the large winning opening in a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) which is the first period or until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. A round is performed that changes to a first state that is advantageous to the user. In this way, the open / close plate that opened the grand prize opening during the round receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2, and then closed the grand prize opening to play the special variable prize ball device 7 as a game. Change to the second state, which is disadvantageous to the person, and finish one round. In the 15 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round, which is the open cycle of the big prize opening, is the first number (for example, “15”). A game in the 15 round big hit state in which the number of round executions is “15” is also referred to as a 15-time open game.

  In the big hit gaming state (two round big hit state) as the second specific gaming state controlled after the two round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is played in each round. The period for changing to the first state that is advantageous to the player (the period in which the big prize opening is opened by the opening / closing plate) is a second period (for example, 0.5 seconds) shorter than the first period in the 15 round big hit state. . In the 2 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round is a second number (for example, “2”) smaller than the first number in the 15 round big hit state. In addition, in the two round big hit state, at least one of the period in which the big winning opening is opened in each round is the second period and the number of executions of the round is the second number is performed. Control other than that may be performed, and other control may be performed in the same manner as in the 15 round big hit state. A game in the round two big hit state in which the number of round executions is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game. In the two-round big hit state, the predetermined winning ball apparatus provided separately from the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 in each round is changed from the second state which is disadvantageous for the player to the first state which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to return to the second state after a predetermined period (first period or second period) has elapsed.

  Further, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” which are the 15-round jackpot symbol, the special symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special game 15 After the round big hit state is over, as one of the special game states, time reduction control (time reduction control) is performed in which the special symbol change time (special figure change time) in the special figure game is shortened compared to the normal state. When controlled, it is controlled to a short state. Here, the normal state is a game state other than a special game state such as a big hit game state or a special game state such as a short-time state, and an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed) Thus, the same control as in the state in which the initialization process is executed after power-on is performed. If the time-short state is terminated when any of the conditions of the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the variable display result is “big hit” is satisfied first, Good. In addition, after the 15 round big hit state based on the fact that the special symbol indicating the number “3” out of the 15 round big hit symbols is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, it does not become the short-time state. You may make it be in a normal state. Like the special symbol indicating the number “3”, the 15 round jackpot symbol controlled to the short-time state or the normal state after the jackpot gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is This is called a non-probable big hit symbol (also referred to as “normal big hit symbol”). The variable display mode of special symbols and decorative symbols when the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game is a non-probable big hit symbol is "non-probable change" (also called "normal") when the variable display result is "big hit" This is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as “big hit type”).

  Out of the special symbols showing the numbers “3” and “7” that will be the 15-round jackpot symbol, the 15-round jackpot is based on the special symbol showing the number “7” being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special game. After the state is over, or after the two round jackpot state is over based on the fact that the special symbol indicating the number “1” that becomes the two-round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, As one of the special game states different from the normal game state, for example, the probability variation state (high probability game state) in which the probability variation control (probability variation control) is continuously performed together with the time shortening control in which the special figure variation time is shortened compared to the normal state. ) Is controlled. In this probability change state, the variable display result of each special figure game and the decorative symbol variable display is improved so that the probability that the variable display result becomes “big hit” and is further controlled to the big hit gaming state is higher than in the normal state. Such a probability change state may be continued until the next variable display result becomes “big hit” regardless of the number of executions of the special game. On the other hand, after the certainty change state is reached, any one of the conditions that the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the variable display result is “big hit” is first. You may make it complete | finish when it is materialized. In addition, even if the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times in the probability change state or before the variable display result is “big hit”, the probability change state ends at a predetermined rate when the special figure game is started. There may be. Similar to the time-short state, the time reduction control in the probability changing state may be terminated when a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of the special game is executed. Alternatively, the time reduction control in the probability variation state may be continued until the next variable display result becomes “big hit” regardless of the number of executions of the special game.

  Like the special symbol indicating the number “7”, the 15-round jackpot symbol controlled to the probable change state after the jackpot gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is a probabilistic big hit symbol. It is called. The variable display mode of special symbols and decorative symbols when the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes a probable big hit symbol is variable "probable change" (also called "probable big hit") when the variable display result is "big hit". It is referred to as a display mode (also referred to as “big hit type”). Like the special symbol indicating the number “1”, the two-round big hit symbol controlled to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game is a sudden big hit symbol. It is called. The variable display mode for special symbols and decorative symbols when the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game is a sudden big hit symbol is “surprise” (“surprise big hit” or “sudden probability big hit” when the variable display result is “big hit”. ")" As a variable display mode (also referred to as "big hit type").

  In this way, when the 15 round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display) as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, it is controlled to the 15 round big hit state and a predetermined number of times (specifically, 15 times) can be executed. Thus, a game value advantageous to the player that the player can easily acquire a large number of prize balls is given. In addition, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change”, after the round 15 big hit state is finished, the gaming state becomes the probable state, and the variable display result becomes “big hit” within a short time. The game value advantageous to the player is given. When the 2 round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display) as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, it is controlled to the 2 round big hit state, but a predetermined number of times (specifically, 2 rounds) can be executed. It is difficult for a player to win a prize ball because the number of rounds is relatively small and the opening period of the big prize opening is relatively short. On the other hand, after the two-round big hit state is completed, the gaming state becomes a probable change state, and a game value advantageous to the player is given that the variable display result becomes “big hit” within a short time.

  When the time shortening control is performed in the probability variation state or the short time state, the control for reducing the normal symbol variable display time (ordinary symbol variation time) in the ordinary symbol game by the ordinary symbol display device 20 is shorter than that in the normal state. Control to improve the probability that the normal symbol variable display result will be "per normal map" in the normal game, and the variable display result will be based on the fact that the variable display result is "per normal map" Second start-up, such as control for making the tilting time (opening time) of the movable blade piece (opening / closing blade) in the apparatus 6B longer than that in the normal state, and control for increasing the number of tilting (opening times) than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous for the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the game ball will enter the winning opening and making it easier to satisfy the second start condition. Note that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. As described above, the control that is advantageous for the player by making it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening as well as the time shortening control in the probability changing state or the short time state is also referred to as high opening control. By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second starting condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B can be easily established, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. In addition, the time until the variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened. Therefore, by performing the high opening control, it becomes easier to enter the big hit gaming state than in the normal state. The period during which the high opening control can be performed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and during this period, the time reduction control is performed when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is either the certain change state or the short time state. It may be the same as the period.

  It is also said that the gaming state is in the high base during the high opening control period. On the other hand, when it is not the high opening control period, it is said that the gaming state is in the low base. The time-short state in this embodiment is a gaming state that is also referred to as a low probability and high base state, and the normal state is a gaming state that is also referred to as a low probability and low base state. Further, when the high opening control period during which the high opening control is performed in the probability changing state, the gaming state is also referred to as a high probability high base state, and when it is not the high opening control period, it is also referred to as a high probability low base state. It is a gaming state to be played.

  After the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the small hit game state different from the big hit game state is controlled. In this small hit gaming state, a variable winning operation for changing the special variable winning device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is performed as in the two round big hit state. That is, in the small hit game state, for example, the operation of opening the large winning opening over the second period by the opening / closing plate provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is repeatedly executed until the second number of times is reached. In the small hit gaming state, similarly to the two round big hit state, the period in which the big prize opening is in the open state is the second period, and the number of executions of the operation in which the big prize opening is in the open state is the second number. It may be controlled so that at least one of them is performed. After the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state is not changed, and the game state before the variable display result becomes “small hit” is continuously controlled. However, if it is determined to end the short-time state corresponding to the variable display game in which the variable display result is “small hit”, the normal state is controlled after the end of the small hit gaming state. It will be. A game in the small hit gaming state in which the number of times that the big winning opening is opened by the variable winning operation is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game, similar to the game in the two round big hit state. When the winning ball device provided separately from the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round in the two round big hit state is changed to the first state, the same as the two round big hit state in the small hit gaming state. In the aspect, the winning ball apparatus may be changed to the first state.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, variable display of decorative symbols is performed in response to variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. That is, in the display area of the image display device 5, for example, the “left”, “middle”, or “right” decorative symbol display portion 5 </ b> L based on the fact that either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. In all of 5C and 5R, decorative symbols are displayed in an accelerated manner (all symbols accelerated display). When a predetermined speed is reached, the decorative symbols are displayed at a constant speed (all symbols are displayed at a constant speed). Such all symbols acceleration display and all symbols constant speed display are included in all symbol variations that variably display the ornament symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” ornament symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. . After all the symbols change, for example, display the symbols in a decelerating display (each symbol deceleration display) in a predetermined order such as “Left” → “Right” → “Medium”. While stopping and displaying, for example, temporary stop display that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction is performed. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern reaches the variable display time determined based on the variation pattern or the like, the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is displayed in a completely stopped state. Note that the procedure for stopping and displaying the confirmed decorative symbols is not limited to displaying the decorative symbols in a predetermined order in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. In each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, a decorative symbol that is a confirmed decorative symbol at the same time may be displayed in a decelerating display (all symbol decelerating display).

  After all symbols change is started, the decorative symbols are reach-displayed on all or some of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. It may be derived and displayed in the state. Here, the reach display state refers to a decorative symbol that has not yet been derived and displayed when the decorative symbol derived and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 forms a part of the jackpot combination (“reach variation symbol”). ")" Is a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R, etc.) The remaining decorative symbol display part (for example, “medium”) that has not yet been derived and displayed when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) constituting the determined jackpot combination is derived and displayed. In the symbol display portion 5C, etc., the decorative symbols are changing, or the decorative symbols are big hits in all or part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. This is a display state that changes in synchronization while constituting all or part of the combination. Further, in response to the reach display state, an effect image such as an animation image or a live-action image different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, the display mode of the background image is changed, There are times when the variation pattern of the decorative design is changed. Such a change in the effect image display, the background image display mode, and the decorative pattern change mode is referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). Some reach productions are set such that when they appear, a big hit is likely to occur (a high probability is a big win) compared to a normal reach production (normal reach). Such a special reach production is also called a super reach production (or simply “super reach”). As an example, for reach production that becomes super reach, after performing a reach production similar to normal reach until a predetermined time elapses, for example, a decorative pattern such as a background image display mode, a displayed character, a decorative pattern variation direction, etc. The change of the production mode (so-called “development”) by changing at least one of the fluctuation modes before the reach display state or at the time of the normal reach, and the reach production peculiar to the super reach It is sufficient if the introduction part in is started. In addition, in the reach production that becomes super reach, when the decorative design is derived and displayed in the reach display state, the introduction part in the reach production peculiar to super reach is started without performing the reach production similar to the normal reach. Things may be included.

  In addition, during the variable display of decorative symbols, unlike reach production, there is a possibility that the decorative symbols may be derived and displayed in the reach state, and that the variable display result may be a “hit”, There may be a case where a specific effect for informing the player is given in accordance with a variable display mode of the decorative design. In this embodiment, specific effects such as “slip” and “pseudo-run” are set to be executable. In addition, the specific effect in this embodiment should just change a special figure fluctuation time according to whether a corresponding effect operation is performed. For example, when a specific effect is executed, it is only necessary that the special figure change time becomes longer than when the specific effect is not executed.

  In the specific effect of “sliding”, after performing all symbol variations that change the ornament symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” ornament symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, two or more After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display portions (for example, the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5R, etc.), a predetermined number (for example, of the decorative symbol display portions that are temporarily stopped and displayed) “1” or “2”), the decorative symbol display unit (for example, one or both of the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5L and the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R) is changed again. The effect display which changes the decorative design to be stopped and displayed by performing the stop display later is performed. In addition, in the temporary stop display of the decorative design in the specific effect, while the decorative design is stopped and displayed, for example, by performing a fluctuation change display or immediately changing the decorative design only by a short stop, etc. What is necessary is just to alert | report that the decoration symbol stopped and displayed to the player is not decided. Alternatively, in the temporary stop display, the decorative design may be re-fluctuated after the decorative design is stopped to the extent that the player recognizes that the decorative design that has been stopped is confirmed.

  In the “pseudo-ream” specific production, all symbol fluctuations are started in response to the first start condition or the second start condition for starting the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols being established once. , “Left”, “Medium”, “Right” decorative symbols are displayed on all 5 L, 5 C, 5 R sequentially or simultaneously, and then “Left”, “Middle”, “Right” "Revariable display operation (revariation) for changing the decorative symbols again in all of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, 5R" is performed for a predetermined number of times (for example, up to three times). As an example, in the specific effect of “pseudo train”, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R have a plurality of types of decorative symbols that are predetermined as pseudo-success chances. One of the combinations is displayed as a temporary stop. Then, it is only necessary to set so that the rate at which the variable display result becomes “big hit” increases as the number of re-variations increases. As a result, the player can recognize that one of the pseudo-continuous chances is temporarily stopped and displayed, so that the specific effect of the “pseudo-continuous” is performed, and the variable display result becomes “ The expectation of becoming a “big hit” is enhanced. In this embodiment, in the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the re-variation is performed once to three times, so that the decorative design can be changed based on the fact that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once. The display can appear as if it has been started 2-4 times in a row.

  During the variable display of the decorative pattern in which the specific effect of “pseudo-continuation” is executed, an effect image showing a character prepared in advance at a predetermined position in the display area of the image display device 5 as the pseudo continuous variation progresses , Displaying a predetermined sound (special sound) from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting the game effect lamp 9 with a predetermined lighting pattern, for effects provided inside or outside the game area A predetermined effect operation such as operating a plurality of movable members included in the accessory may be executed. As an example, when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed on all the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then the decorative symbols are displayed again on all the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, Pseudo continuous variation is performed by performing any one or a combination of a plurality of operations among the display of the displayed effect image, the output of the special sound, the lighting of the lamp, and the operation of the movable member. May be notified in a recognizable manner.

  In addition to “pseudo-continuous” and “slip”, specific effects using such decorative display variable display operations include, for example, “Development opportunity eyes”, “Development opportunity eyes end”, and “Slip after chance eyes stop” Various production operations may be executed. Here, in the specific effect of “Development Opportunity”, “Left”, “Middle”, “Right” from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the display of the fixed decorative pattern resulting in the variable display result. In all of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols constituting the development chances included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the decorative symbol variable display state is set to the reach state. A predetermined reach production is started. As a result, when the decorative symbol constituting the development opportunity is temporarily stopped, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, and the variable display result becomes “big hit” after the reach state is reached. , The player's expectation is enhanced. Further, in the specific effect of “end of development opportunity”, after the decorative symbol variable display is started, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, 5R An effect display is performed for deriving and displaying a decorative pattern of a predetermined combination as a development opportunity. In the specific effect of “slip after the chance stop”, as with the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, until the fixed decorative pattern that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed, Temporarily stop display of decorative combinations (special combinations) that are one of a plurality of types of pseudo consecutive chances in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, unlike the specific effect of the “pseudo-ream”, an effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped is performed by changing the decorative symbol again in a part of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. Is called.

  Furthermore, during the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect or the specific effect, for example, by displaying the decorative pattern in a display mode other than the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, such as displaying a predetermined character image or message image. A notice effect may be executed to notify the player that the variable display state may become a reach state and that the variable display result may be a “hit”. For example, the notice effect such as “character display”, “step-up image”, and “background change” may be set to be executable. Note that the notice effect may be any one that does not change in the special figure fluctuation time depending on whether or not the corresponding effect operation is executed. In the “character display” notice effect, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then two or more decorative symbols are displayed. The character image prepared in advance in a predetermined position in the display area of the image display device 5 is displayed before the decorative symbols are derived and displayed on the display portion (for example, the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R). An effect display is performed. In the notice effect of “step-up image”, two or more decorative symbols are displayed after changing the decorative symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. Before the decorative part is derived and displayed on the display unit, there may be an effect display in which a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance are switched and displayed in a predetermined order in the display area of the image display device 5. In the notice effect of “step-up image”, after any one of a plurality of kinds of effect images prepared in advance (for example, an effect image that is displayed first in a predetermined order) is displayed, the effect image The effect display in the notice effect may be terminated without being switched. In the “background change” notice effect, an effect display that changes the display of the background image in the display area of the image display device 5 to one of a plurality of types is performed.

  In addition, there is a possibility that the variable display result may be “big hit” or “small hit” over the variable display of decorative symbols executed multiple times corresponding to multiple special drawing games, etc. A notice effect for informing the player that there is a possibility that variable display (for example, a variation pattern with super reach) may be executed may be executed continuously. Such a notice effect continuously executed over a plurality of variable displays is also referred to as a continuous notice effect. On the other hand, the notice effect performed in response to a single variable display is also referred to as a single notice effect. The last variable display among the multiple variable displays for which the continuous notice effect is executed is a variable display for which the possibility of the variable display result being a “big hit” is notified by the continuous notice effect. It is also referred to as a variable display that is subject to notice by a notice effect. When the continuous notice effect is executed, the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” based on the reserved memory information of the special figure game is notified before the variable display to be notified is started. The notice effect is started.

  After the continuous notice effect is started, for example, every time variable display of decorative symbols is executed, a plurality of effect modes are provided by effect display that selectively displays a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance in a predetermined order. An effect operation that changes (steps up) in stages may be performed. At this time, as the number of times of change (the number of steps) increases, the possibility (reliability) of the variable display result to be “big hit” or “small hit” may increase. Further, the object to be notified may change depending on the number of times of change (number of steps). For example, “reach determination” may be performed when going to the second step, “super reach confirmation” when going to the third step, and “big hit confirmation” going to the fourth step. As the change of the notice mode (step-up), different character images may be displayed in order, or the step-up may be performed by changing the shape or color of one character. May be. That is, it is only necessary to be able to recognize that the state of the notice means (display, sound, lamp, movable object, etc.) as viewed from the player changes stepwise.

  If a special symbol that will be a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol variable display state will not reach the reach state after the variable symbol variable display starts. There are cases where a fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination or a fixed decorative symbol that is one of a plurality of types of development chances is stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it corresponds to the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state after the decorative symbol variable display has started. Then, after the reach effect is executed, a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach-losing combination (also simply referred to as “reach combination”) may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When the special symbol indicating the number “3”, which is a non-probable variable jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game as a 15-round jackpot symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is changed. Corresponding to the reach state, after a predetermined reach effect is executed, a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-probable variation big hit combination (also referred to as “normal big hit combination”) is stopped and displayed. Here, the confirmed decorative symbols that are non-probable big hit combinations are, for example, symbol numbers that are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. Among the decorative symbols with "1" to "8", any one of the decorative symbols with even numbers "2", "4", "6", "8" is "left", "middle" The “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R may be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line. In this way, the decorative symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” constituting the non-probable variation big hit combination are referred to as non-probable variation symbols (also referred to as “normal symbols”). . Then, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game becoming the non-probable variable big hit symbol, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-probable variable big hit combination is stopped and displayed after the predetermined reach effect is executed. The mode is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as jackpot type) of “non-probable change” (also referred to as “normal”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “non-probability change”, it is controlled to the 15 round big hit gaming state, and when the 15 round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the short time state or the normal state. It will be.

  When the special symbol indicating the number “7”, which is the probability variable big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special figure game as a 15-round big hit symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is reached. Corresponding to the situation, after reaching the same reach effect as when the jackpot type is "non-probable change", or the reach effect different from when the jackpot type is "non-probable change" For example, after the process is executed, a fixed decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined probability variation jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed. Here, the confirmed decorative symbols that are the probable big hit combinations are, for example, symbol numbers that are variably displayed on the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the image display device 5. Among the decorative symbols “1” to “8”, any one of the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” are “left”, “middle”, What is necessary is just to be stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective line in each of the “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, the decorative symbols having odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” constituting the probability variation big hit combination are referred to as probability variation symbols. Then, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming a probable big hit symbol, after the reach effect is executed, the decorative display variable display mode in which the definite decorative combination of the probable big hit combination is stopped is displayed. This is referred to as a variable display mode of “probability change” (also referred to as a big hit type) when the variable display result is “big hit”.

  When the probability variable big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol that is a non-probable variable big hit combination may be stopped and displayed as a variable display result of the decorative symbol. In this way, even when the fixed decorative symbol that is a non-probable big hit combination is stopped and displayed, if the probable big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, it is included in the variable display mode of “probable change”. . Thus, after the variable display result becomes “big hit” by the variable display mode of “probability change”, it is controlled to the 15 round big hit state, and when the 15 round big hit state ends, it is controlled to the positive change state. The confirmed decorative symbol that is a non-probable big hit combination and the definite decorative symbol that is a probable big hit combination are also collectively referred to as a definitive decorative symbol of a big winning combination (specific combination).

  A re-lottery effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols in which the confirmed decorative symbol is a non-probable variable big hit combination or a probable variable big hit combination. In the re-lottery effect, after the decorative symbols that are the non-probable big hit combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5, for example, “ The left, middle, and right decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R are varied again with the same decorative symbol in a uniform state, and the decorative symbol (probable variable symbol) that is a probabilistic big hit combination is displayed. One of the decorative symbols (non-probable variable symbols) that is a probable big hit combination is stopped and displayed as a final decorative symbol (final stop display). Here, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “non-probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, the confirmed decoration that becomes the non-probable big hit combination after re-changing the temporarily stopped display decorative pattern A change promotion promotion effect that derives and displays a symbol is performed. On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, the confirmed decoration that becomes a probable big hit combination after re-changing the temporarily stopped display of the decorative symbols A changing promotion success effect during stop display of the symbol may be executed, or a changing promotion failure effect during change may be executed.

  After the definitive decorative symbol that is a non-probable jackpot combination is derived and displayed, at the start of the jackpot gaming state or during execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state, the next round will start after any round ends in the jackpot gaming state During the big hit that becomes a notification effect as to whether or not to control to the probable change state in the period until the start, the period from the end of the last round in the big hit gaming state to the start of the next variable display game, etc. A promotion effect may be executed. Note that a notification effect similar to the jackpot promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot promotion effect that is executed after the final round in the jackpot game state is particularly called “ending promotion effect”.

  In the jackpot promotion effect, there is no jackpot promotion success effect informing that there is a promotion in which the game state becomes a probabilistic state even though the confirmed decoration pattern is a non-probable big hit combination, and there is no promotion in a promiscuous state There is a promotion promotion failure during jackpot. For example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and either the non-probable variable symbol or the probable variable symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result, or the decorative symbol variable display What is necessary is just to alert | report so that a player can recognize the presence or absence of the promotion which will be in a probability change state by displaying the effect image different from.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, a special symbol indicating the number “1” which is a two-round big hit symbol is stopped or displayed, or a special symbol indicating the number “2” which is a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. In such a case, the variable display state of the decorative symbols may not reach the reach state, and any one of a combination of a plurality of types of fixed decorative symbols that are determined in advance as the second opening chance may be displayed. In addition, when the special symbol indicating the number “1”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach state. Then, after a predetermined reach effect is executed, a fixed decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes a special symbol indicating the number of “1” which is a two-round jackpot symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbols in which various fixed ornament symbols are stopped and displayed is variable. This is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a jackpot type) of “surprise accuracy” (also referred to as “surprising accuracy hit” or “sudden probability change big hit”) when the display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “surprise accuracy”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state, and when the two round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the probability changing state.

  When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “accuracy”, the accuracy mode start effect may be executed during variable display of the decorative symbols. In the surprise mode start effect, a predetermined effect operation is performed in response to the big hit type being “Accuracy”. After the surprise mode start effect is performed, an effect mode different from the normal effect mode called the accuracy mode may be started. In addition, the random mode start effect is not limited to the effect operation that is executed during the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols, and continues from the variable display even during part or all of the period of the two round big hit state. An effect operation may be performed. When the suddenness mode start effect is started, the decorative symbol that is variably displayed may be deleted, and after the suddenness mode start effect is executed, the confirmed decorative symbol may not be derived and displayed. In the sudden accuracy mode, for example, until the variable display result is “big hit” and the probability variation state ends, the effect in the sudden accuracy mode is performed. In the effect in the sudden accuracy mode, the display mode of the background image in the display area of the image display device 5 is different from the display mode in the normal rendering mode, and is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the variable display of the decorative pattern. The sound to be different from the sound in the normal effect mode, the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED to be different from the lighting pattern in the normal effect mode, or a part of these Alternatively, it is only necessary to notify all the players so that the player can recognize that the mode is a surprise mode.

  In the probability variation state, for example, an effect image for notifying that the probability variation state is “being probability variation” is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, or the background image or the decorative pattern display mode in the display region of the image display device 5 is displayed. May be different from the display mode in the normal effect mode, for example, so that the player can recognize that the player is in the probability change state. Alternatively, in the probability variation state, for example, the player may be unable to recognize or difficult to recognize that it is in the probability variation state by becoming the same production mode as in the normal state or the short time state (so-called latent probability variation). . It can be said that during the period in which such a latent probability change is performed, the gaming state is in the latent probability change.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes various power supply boards 10, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a payout control board 15, and a launch control board 17 as shown in FIG. A control board is mounted. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 18 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. Note that the audio control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 may be configured as independent boards that are separate from the effect control board 12, or may be integrated into the effect control board 12 and configured as one board. In addition, various control boards such as an information terminal board and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The interface board is a control board interposed between the payout control board 15 and the card unit when the card unit is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The power supply board 10 is installed independently of the control boards such as the main board 11, the effect control board 12, and the payout control board 15, and generates voltages used by the control boards and the mechanical components in the pachinko gaming machine 1. . For example, the power supply board 10 generates AC 24 V, VLP (DC +24 V), VSL (DC +30 V), VDD (DC +12 V), VCC (DC +5 V), and VBB (DC +5 V) as shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 3, the power supply board 10 includes a transformer circuit 301, a DC voltage generation circuit 302, a power supply monitoring circuit 303, and a clear switch 304. Further, the power supply substrate 10 may be provided with a capacitor serving as a backup power supply. For example, this capacitor may be charged from a power supply line of VBB (DC + 5V). In addition, the power supply board 10 may be provided with a power switch for executing or cutting off power supply to each control board and the mechanical components in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, the power switch may be provided outside the power supply board 10 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, the transformer circuit 301 may be configured to include a transformer to which commercial power is applied to the input side (primary side), a varistor as an overvoltage protection circuit provided on the input side of the transformer, and the like. Here, the transformer included in the transformer circuit 301 may be any one that electrically insulates the commercial power supply from the power supply substrate 10. The transformer circuit 301 generates AC 24V as its output voltage. The DC voltage generation circuit 302 includes, for example, a rectifying / smoothing circuit that generates VSL by rectifying and boosting AC 24V with a rectifying element. VSL is used as a power supply voltage for driving the solenoid. Further, the DC voltage generation circuit 302 includes a rectifier circuit that generates VLP by rectifying AC24V with a rectifier, for example. The VLP is used as a power supply voltage for lighting a light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9. In addition, the DC voltage generation circuit 302 includes a DC-DC converter that generates VDD and VCC based on, for example, VSL. This DC-DC converter includes, for example, one or more switching regulators and a relatively large capacity capacitor connected to the input side of the switching regulator, and power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the outside is stopped. Sometimes, it may be configured so that the direct current voltage such as VSL, VDD, VBB, etc. decreases relatively slowly. The VDD is supplied to various switches for detecting game media such as the gate switch 21, the first and second start port switches 22A and 22B, and the count switch 23 shown in FIG. 2, and is used to operate these switches. .

  As shown in FIG. 3, AC24V output from the transformer circuit 301 is transmitted to the payout control board 15 via a predetermined connector or a power supply line, for example. The VLP is transmitted to the lamp control board 14 via, for example, a predetermined connector or a power supply line. VSL, VDD, and VCC are transmitted to the main board 11, the lamp control board 14, and the payout control board 15 through, for example, predetermined connectors and power supply lines. The VBB is transmitted to the main board 11 and the payout control board 15 through, for example, a predetermined connector and a power supply line. Note that each voltage may be supplied to the effect control board 12 and the sound control board 13 via the lamp control board 14. Alternatively, each voltage may be directly supplied to the effect control board 12 and the sound control board 13 from the power supply board 10 without going through the lamp control board 14.

  The power monitoring circuit 303 is configured by using, for example, a power failure monitoring reset module IC, and is a circuit that realizes a power monitoring unit that outputs a power interruption signal. For example, when a predetermined power supply voltage (VSL as an example) used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value (+22 V as an example), the power supply monitoring circuit 303 outputs a power-off signal in an off state (high level). On the other hand, when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or lower than the predetermined value continues for a predetermined time (for example, 56 ms), an on-state (low level) power-off signal is output. Alternatively, the power supply monitoring circuit 303 may output an on-state power-off signal immediately when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes a predetermined value or less. For example, the power-off signal may be a negative logic electric signal that is turned on when it is low and turned off when it is high. The power-off signal output from the power supply monitoring circuit 303 is amplified by, for example, an output driver circuit mounted on the power supply board 10 and then transmitted to the main board 11 or the payout control board 15 via a predetermined connector or signal line. Is done. The power-off signal may be transmitted to the main board 11 via the payout control board 15.

  The predetermined power supply voltage to be monitored for outputting the power-off signal is preferably a voltage higher than a specified value (for example, +12 V) in the power supply voltage VDD for operating the switch, such as the power supply voltage VSL. Thereby, before the power supply voltage VDD for operating the switch decreases and the operation state of various switches (for example, the gate switch 21, the first and second start port switches 22A and 22B, the count switch 23, etc.) becomes unstable, By outputting the power-off signal (turning on), it is possible to prevent the progress of game control based on erroneous detection by various switches. That is, when the power supply voltage VDD for operating the switch is lowered, the switch output of the negative logic (turned on at a low level) is turned on, but the power supply voltage VSL that drops earlier than the power supply voltage VDD is monitored to supply power By recognizing the stop, it becomes possible to enter a state of waiting for power supply recovery and not detecting the switch output before the switch output is turned on.

  A large capacity capacitor may be connected to the power supply line for transmitting the power supply voltage VSL and the like to the main board 11, the lamp control board 14 and the payout control board 15. On the other hand, such a capacitor may not be connected to the input line that transmits to the power supply monitoring circuit 303 in order to monitor the power supply voltage VSL. In this case, the power supply voltage VSL in the input line to the power supply monitoring circuit 303 to be monitored drops earlier than the power supply voltage VSL in the power supply line to which the capacitor is connected. That is, even after the monitored power supply voltage VSL starts to decrease, the supply state of the power supply voltage VSL in the power supply line supplied to the solenoid, the motor, or the like is maintained for a predetermined period. Therefore, even when the power supply voltage VSL to be monitored starts to decrease, the solenoid, the motor, and the like can be driven for a predetermined period. Further, it is possible to recognize the stop of the power supply before the power supply voltage VSL in the power supply line starts to decrease.

  In place of the solenoid drive power supply voltage VSL, for example, a power cut-off signal is generated by monitoring an arbitrary power supply voltage higher than a specified value in the switch operation power supply voltage VDD, for example, the power supply voltage VLP for lighting the light emitter. You may make it output. In addition, the condition for detecting the stop of the supply of power supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the outside is not limited to the fact that the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has become a predetermined value or less. Any condition can be used as long as it is possible to detect that the power has been cut off. For example, the AC wave such as AC 24V may be monitored to detect that the AC wave has stopped, or the signal obtained by digitizing the AC wave may be monitored and the AC signal may be generated when the digital signal becomes flat. It may be a detection condition for the interruption.

  For example, the power supply monitoring circuit 303 may output a reset signal when a predetermined power supply voltage (VCC as an example) becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined value (+4.5 V as an example). The reset signal may be an electric signal that is turned on when the reset signal becomes low level, for example. The reset signal output from the power supply monitoring circuit 303 is amplified by, for example, an output driver circuit mounted on the power supply board 10, and then, via a predetermined connector or signal line, the main board 11, the lamp control board 14, and the payout control board. 15 is transmitted. A reset signal may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 via the lamp control board 14. Alternatively, the reset signal may be transmitted directly to the effect control board 12 without going through the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, the circuit that outputs the reset signal may be configured by using a watchdog timer built-in IC provided separately from the power supply monitoring circuit 303, a system reset IC, or the like.

  When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, the power monitoring circuit 303 outputs a reset signal (sets to a low level) when a predetermined period elapses after the power-off circuit 303 outputs a power-off signal (sets to a low level). ) In the predetermined period, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 and the payout control microcomputer 150 mounted on the payout control board 15 shown in FIG. It is sufficient if the time is sufficient for execution. That is, the power monitoring circuit 303 outputs a power-off signal as a power feeding signal, and after the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 150 complete execution of predetermined power-off processing, the operation stop signal The reset signal is output (set to low level). The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 150 that have received the reset signal output from the power supply monitoring circuit 303 are in an operation stop state, and execution of various control processes is stopped. In addition, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, when a predetermined power supply voltage (VCC as an example) exceeds a predetermined value (+4.5 V as an example), the power monitoring circuit 303 stops outputting the reset signal (Set to high level).

  FIG. 4 is a timing diagram schematically showing the states of AC 24 V, VSL, VCC, reset signal, and power-off signal when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started and when power supply is stopped. is there. As shown in FIG. 4, when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, VSL and VCC gradually reach specified values (DC +30 V and DC +5 V). At this time, when VCC exceeds the first predetermined value, the power supply monitoring circuit 303 stops outputting the reset signal (sets it to a high level) and turns it off. When VSL exceeds the second predetermined value, the power supply monitoring circuit 303 stops outputting the power-off signal (sets it to a high level) and turns it off. On the other hand, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, VSL and VCC gradually decrease. At this time, when VSL falls to the second predetermined value, the power supply monitoring circuit 303 outputs the power-off signal as an ON state (sets it to a low level). When VCC decreases to the first predetermined value, the power supply monitoring circuit 303 outputs a reset signal as an ON state (sets to a low level).

  The clear switch 304 included in the power supply substrate 10 illustrated in FIG. 3 has a push button structure, for example, and outputs a clear signal in response to an operation such as pressing. The clear signal may be an electrical signal that is turned on when it becomes low level in response to an operation such as pressing. Alternatively, the clear signal may be an electrical signal that is turned on when it becomes high level in response to an operation such as pressing. The clear signal output from the clear switch 304 is transmitted to the main board 11 via a predetermined connector or signal line, for example, and is transmitted from the main board 11 to the payout control board 15. When the clear switch 304 is not operated, the output of the clear signal is stopped (set to high level or low level). Note that the clear switch 304 may have a configuration other than a push button structure (for example, a slide switch structure, a toggle switch structure, a dial switch structure, or the like).

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is a sub-side mainly composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch arranged at a predetermined position, an effect control board 12, a payout control board 15, and the like. It has a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information to the control board as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to the hall management computer, and the like. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control. As shown in FIG. 2, for example, the main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a control clock generation circuit 111, a random number clock generation circuit 112, a switch circuit 114, and a solenoid circuit 115. . A game start switch 31 may be installed on the main board 11.

  Here, the control clock generation circuit 111 generates a control clock CCLK that becomes an oscillation signal having a predetermined frequency outside the game control microcomputer 100. The control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 111 is supplied to the clock circuit 502 via, for example, a control external clock terminal EXC of the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. The random number clock generation circuit 112 generates a random number clock RCLK that is an oscillation signal having a predetermined frequency different from the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK, outside the game control microcomputer 100. The random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 112 is supplied to the random number circuit 509 via the random number external clock terminal ERC of the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 6, for example. As an example, the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 112 may be equal to or lower than the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 111. Alternatively, the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 112 may be higher than the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 111.

  The switch circuit 114 takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The solenoid circuit 115 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoids 81 and 82. The game start switch 31 has, for example, a push button structure, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 closes the gaming machine frame 3 so that the player can not normally touch the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state in which the player plays a normal game. What is necessary is just to be arrange | positioned. Then, for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on or when the system is reset, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operated to instruct the game start after the initial setting. Note that the game start switch 31 may have a configuration other than the push button structure (for example, a slide switch structure, a toggle switch structure, a dial switch structure, etc.).

  As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main board 11. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. What is necessary is just to have. The main board 11 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold display device 25A, a second hold display device 25B, and a general drawing hold display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected. Further, the main board 11 is connected to wiring for transmitting command signals for performing drive control, such as a solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory and a solenoid 82 for a prize winning door.

  Various control commands are transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12, for example, by performing serial communication only in a single direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 18. Is done. The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives a control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 18, and receives the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling electric parts (production device) for production such as a light emitter such as a game effect lamp 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 has a function of controlling the display operation in the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation and the extinguishing operation in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and the like. . The effect control board 12 is connected to wiring for transmitting a control signal to the sound control board 13 and the lamp control board 14, wiring for transmitting an image data signal to the image display device 5, and the like.

  The main board 11 may be provided with a main board side connector corresponding to the relay board 18, for example, and an output buffer circuit may be connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 100. . This output buffer circuit can pass a control signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 18, for example, and prevents the signal input from the relay board 18 to the main board 11. . Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 or the relay board 18 side to the main board 11 side. Note that the relay board 18 may not be provided between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. Thereby, the freedom degree of wiring routing between the main board | substrate 11 and the production | presentation control board 12 can be raised.

  For example, the relay board 18 may be provided with a transmission direction regulating circuit in a wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The transmission direction regulating circuit includes a diode having an anode connected to the main board connector corresponding to the main board 11 and a cathode connected to the presentation control board connector corresponding to the presentation control board 12, and one end connected to the cathode of the diode. And the other end of which is connected to the ground (GND). With this configuration, the transmission direction regulating circuit can prevent the signal from being input from the effect control board 12 to the relay board 18 and pass the signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 side to the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulating circuit is provided in the wiring for transmitting a control signal in the relay board 18, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the game control microcomputer 100 and the main board side connector on the main board 11. By providing, illegal signal input to the main board 11 from the outside can be prevented.

  Various control commands and notification signals are transmitted between the main board 11 and the payout control board 15 by, for example, bidirectional serial communication. The payout control board 15 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives a control command and a notification signal transmitted from the main board 11, and controls the payout operation of the game ball by the payout motor 51. Various circuits are installed. That is, the payout control board 15 has a function of controlling the award ball payout operation by the payout motor 51. The payout control board 15 may have a function of controlling the ball lending operation by controlling the driving of the payout motor 51 in accordance with the communication result with the card unit via the interface board, for example. The payout control board 15 receives wiring for receiving detection signals from the full tank switch 26 and the ball break switch 27, and detection signals from the payout motor position sensor 71, the payout count switch 72, and the error release switch 73. Wiring for is connected. In addition, a wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing payout control of the game ball in the payout motor 51 and a command signal for performing display control in the error display LED 74 are transmitted to the payout control board 15. Wiring for communication with the card unit is connected via the interface board.

  Here, the full tank switch 26 is installed on the side wall of the surplus ball passage that communicates between the striking ball supply tray and the surplus ball receiving tray, for example, below the back of the game board 2, and detects the full tank of the surplus ball receiving tray. Is. A lot of game balls based on award balls or ball lending requests are paid out, the batting supply tray becomes full, and after the game balls reach the contact port, when game balls are paid out, the game balls pass through the surplus ball passage. It is led to the extra ball tray. When the game ball is further paid out, for example, a predetermined sensing lever presses the full switch 26 to turn on.

  In addition, the ball break switch 27 is installed downstream of the guide rail that guides the game ball to the payout device in which the payout motor 51 is installed, for example, on the back of the game board 2, and via a curve rod downstream of the guide rail. The presence or absence of game balls in the two rows of ball passages communicated with each other is detected. As an example, the ball break switch 27 is locked by a locking piece at a position where it can be detected that 27 to 28 game balls are present in the ball path, and the maximum payout number (for example, 100) It is possible to confirm that at least 25 pieces corresponding to a circle are secured. The guide rail guides a game ball from a storage tank that stores a game ball as a supply ball above the back of the game board 2 to a payout device, and a payout motor 51 is provided below the ball passage. The payout device in which is installed is fixed.

  The error release switch 73 is a switch for releasing the error state by software reset when the payout control microcomputer 150 is controlled to a predetermined error state. The error display LED 74 is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and is used to display error codes corresponding to various errors based on an error flag set by the payout control microcomputer 150.

  The launch control board 17 shown in FIG. 2 is for controlling the launch operation of the game ball by a predetermined launch device in accordance with the operation amount of the operation knob 30. For example, the firing control board 17 has wiring for transmitting a drive signal from the power supply board 10 or the main board 11, wiring for transmitting a connection signal from the card unit via the payout control board 15 and the interface board, and an operation knob 30. Are connected to the firing motor 61. Note that the connection signal from the card unit may be branched at the dispensing control board 15 and transmitted to the firing control board 17, or the launch control may be performed from the card unit via the interface board and not via the dispensing control board 15. It may be transmitted to the substrate 17. The firing control board 17 adjusts the driving force of the firing motor 61 in accordance with the operation amount of the operation knob 30. For example, the launch motor 61 elastically deforms the launch spring by a driving force adjusted by the launch control board 17, and transmits the biasing force of the launch spring to the hitting hammer to hit the game ball, thereby operating the game ball on the operation knob 30. It is fired toward the game area at a speed corresponding to the operation amount.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 18 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted as an electric signal. In this embodiment, the effect control command is set for transmission by the CPU 505 (see FIG. 6) included in the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, and the game control microcomputer 100 is based on the setting. Is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by the second channel transmission circuit of the serial communication circuit 511 (see FIG. 6). In the following description, the transmission operation of the effect control command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 includes a series of operations by the CPU 505 and the serial communication circuit 511 provided in the game control microcomputer 100. To do. In this case, on the side of the effect control board 12, for example, the CPU of the effect control microcomputer 120 performs an interrupt process based on a reception interrupt request generated when communication data in the serial signal format transmitted from the main board 11 is received. By executing, the effect control command may be captured and stored in a predetermined buffer (for example, a reception command buffer for effect). The effect control command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 18 by a plurality of signal lines (for example, eight effect control signal lines). In this case, in addition to the signal line for transmitting the effect control command, a signal line for transmitting the capture signal (effect control INT signal) for requesting the capture of the effect control command may be wired.

  The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. The lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the light emitter is included. FIG. 5A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a display control command used in this embodiment. The display control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit of the MODE data (bit number [7]) is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. The form of the display control command shown in FIG. 5A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the display control command has a 2-byte configuration, but the number of bytes constituting the display control command may be 1 or a plurality of 3 or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 5A, a command 8001H is a first change start command for designating the start of change of the first special figure in the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second change start command for designating the start of change of the second special figure in the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special graphic game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  In this embodiment, the first and second variation start commands and the variation pattern designation command are prepared as separate production control commands. On the other hand, the designation content indicating which of the first special figure and the second special figure is to be changed and the designated content of the fluctuation pattern are configured to be specified by one effect control command. Also good. As an example, an effect control command in which EXT data is set corresponding to a combination of a special symbol (first special figure or second special figure) that starts change and a change pattern is prepared. You may enable it to specify the special symbol and fluctuation pattern which become a fluctuation start. Here, when the special symbol and the variation pattern that start the variation can be specified by one effect control command, the special symbol (the first special feature that starts the variation) for one variation pattern. There are cases where it is necessary to prepare two types of effect control commands according to the figure or the second special figure). On the other hand, if an effect control command for designating a special symbol for starting variation and an effect control command for designating a variation pattern are prepared separately, two types of effect control commands corresponding to the special symbol for starting variation are prepared. And the number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types of variation patterns may be prepared, and the types of commands prepared in advance, the storage capacity of the command table, and the like can be reduced.

  Command 8CXXH is a display result designation command for designating variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 5B, the variable display result is determined in advance as to whether it is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit”, and the variable display result is “ Different EXT data is set in accordance with the big hit type determination result of whether the big hit type is “non-probable change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” in the case of “big hit”. More specifically, the command 8C00H is a first display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result is “lost”. The command 8C01H is a second display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the big hit type is “non-probable change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. The command 8C02H is a third display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result and a jackpot type determination result that the jackpot type is “probable change” when the variable display result is “big jackpot”. The command 8C03H is a fourth display result designation command that indicates a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the big hit type is “surprise” when the variable display result is “big hit”. The command 8C04H is a fifth display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern designation command and the display result designation command are prepared as separate presentation control commands. On the other hand, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result indicated by the display result designation command may be configured to be specified by one effect control command. As an example, an effect in which EXT data is set corresponding to a combination of a variation pattern and a variable display result (any one of “losing”, “big hit”, “small hit”, and a big hit type in the case of “big hit”). A control command may be prepared, and information that can specify the variation pattern and the variable display result may be transmitted by the effect control command. Alternatively, the variation pattern and the variable display result may be specified by three or more effect control commands. Here, when the variation pattern and the variable display result are configured to be specified by a single effect control command, a plurality of types of effects corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display results for one variation pattern. You may need to provide control commands. On the other hand, if the production control command for designating the variation pattern and the production control command for notifying the variable display result are prepared separately, the number of production control commands corresponding to the number of types of the variation pattern and the variable display result are provided. The number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types may be prepared, and the types of commands prepared in advance, the storage capacity of the command table, and the like can be reduced.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation designation command for designating the stop of variable display of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The symbol confirmation designation command may not be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In this case, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is specified on the side of the effect control board 12, and the elapsed time from the start of variable display of the decorative design is variable display time. Even if the production control command from the main board 11 is not received, the determined decorative design may be displayed in a completely stopped state to confirm the variable display result.

  The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set corresponding to whether the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the time-short state. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the normal state, and the command 9501H is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the probability change state, The command 9502H may be a third gaming state designation command corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the time saving state.

  A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. In the hit start designation command, for example, EXT data similar to the display result designation command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determined result. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command, the correspondence relationship between the predetermination result or the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the display result designation command.

  The command A1XXH is a command for specifying the opening of the big prize opening that designates the display of the effect image during the period in which the big prize opening is open in each round or variable winning action corresponding to the big winning game state or the small winning game state. It is. The command A2XXH is an effect image (for example, an effect in the interval between rounds) corresponding to the big win game state or the small win game state in the period when the big prize opening is changed from the open state to the closed state by the end of each round or variable winning operation. This is a designation command after opening the big prize opening that designates display of (image). In the command for opening the big prize opening and the designation command after opening the big prize opening, for example, the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “15”) in the 15 round big hit state, the round in the big round and the small hit game state Different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of executions of the variable winning operation at (for example, “1” or “2”). Depending on whether it is a 15-round big hit state, a two-round big hit state, or a small-hit gaming state, a special command during opening of the big prize opening or a designated command after opening the big prize opening may be prepared separately. On the other hand, the number of types of effect control commands is reduced by using the common command during opening of the big prize opening and the designation command after opening the big prize opening, which are common to the 15 round big hit state, the 2 round big hit state, and the small hit game state. can do. Also, in the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state, it is a period in which the big winning opening is open in each round or variable winning action, or the big winning opening is released from the open state by the end of each round or variable winning action. Regardless of whether the period has changed to the closed state, a continuous presentation operation may be executed from the start point to the end point of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. Further, in the small hit gaming state, the designation command during opening of the big prize opening and the designation command after opening the big prize opening may not be transmitted.

  The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. In the hit end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to the display result designation command or the hit start designation command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type decision result. Alternatively, in the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result or the big hit type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the display result designation command or the hit start designation command.

  The command B1XXH is a first special symbol display based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A and a start winning is generated. This is a first start slot winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the device 4A is established. The command B2XXH is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and a start winning has occurred, and the second special symbol is generated. This is a second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the display device 4B is established.

  In this embodiment, the first start opening winning designation command notifies a determination result using predetermined numerical data at the time of the first start winning that is the time of detecting the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening. It is also used as an effect control command. The second start opening prize designation command is an effect control command for notifying a determination result using predetermined numerical data at the time of the second start winning place, which is a time of detecting a game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening. Also used as

  For example, as shown in FIG. 5C, in the first start opening prize designation command and the second start opening prize designation command, a predetermined pattern used to determine a variation pattern when the special figure display result is “lost”. The variable display determining numerical value (for example, numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type) is associated with a specific variation pattern (for example, super reach) regardless of the reserved memory number of the special figure game (special figure reserved memory number). Different EXT data is set depending on whether the variation pattern is within or outside the specific pattern common range. More specifically, the command B100H and the command B200H notify that they are outside the specific pattern common range, while the command B101H and the command B201H notify that they are within the specific pattern common range.

  In addition, in the first start opening winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command, a predetermined specific display result determining numerical value (for example, special figure display) used for determining whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” is determined. Different EXT data is set according to the determination result of whether or not the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” based on the numerical value data (random number MR1 for determining the result). More specifically, the command B102H and the command B202H notify the winning time determination that is determined that the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small win”. On the other hand, the command B100H, the command B101H, the command B200H, and the command B201H are notified that it is determined that the special figure display result is not determined to be “big hit” or “small hit”. In addition, the winning time winning determination is not limited to the case where it is determined that the special figure display result is determined to be “small hit”, but only when it is determined that the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit”. May be included. Alternatively, the winning time winning judgment includes only when it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change” and is controlled to the 15 round big hit state. May be. Alternatively, it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is determined to be “surprise” and controlled to the two round big hit gaming state, or the special figure display result is determined to be “small hit” and small A command for notifying that it is determined that the game state is controlled by winning may be separately prepared.

  Furthermore, in the first start opening winning designation command, the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening during the big hit when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, EXT data that can specify that a game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening is detected during the time-shortening control in the time-shortening state. More specifically, the command B103H notifies of a big hit / short / medium winning that a game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening is detected during the big hit or during the short-time control.

  The command C0XXH displays the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in the start winning memory display area 5H provided in the display area of the image display device 5 in an identifiable manner. This is a special figure reserved memory number notification command for notifying the total reserved memory number which is the total value with the reserved memory number. The special figure hold memory number notification command is executed when, for example, either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, or the special start game is executed when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. Corresponding to the start or the like, following the transmission of either the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command, the main board 11 sends it to the effect control board 12. The In the special figure reservation storage number notification command, for example, the total storage number (for example, “0” to “8”) of the hold data in the first special figure hold storage unit 591A and the hold data in the second special figure hold storage unit 591B shown in FIG. ), Different EXT data is set. As a result, on the side of the production control board 12, when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, or when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the special game is executed. Is received, the special figure hold storage number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, and the total storage of the hold data in the first special figure hold storage unit 591A and the second special figure hold storage unit 591B is received. The number can be specified.

  In this embodiment, the first and second start opening winning designation commands and the reserved memory number designation command are prepared as separate presentation control commands. On the other hand, the notification content indicating which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied and the notification content of the total reserved storage number are configured to be specified by one effect control command. Also good. As an example, an effect control command in which EXT data is set corresponding to the combination of the established start condition (the first start condition or the second start condition) and the total reserved memory number is prepared. The established start condition and the total number of reserved memories may be specified. Here, when it is possible to specify which one of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied by one effect control command together with the total reserved memory number, for example, the upper limit value of the total reserved memory number is “8”. ”, It is necessary to prepare a total of 16 types of effect control commands of 8 types corresponding to the case where the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied. On the other hand, if an effect control command that can specify which of the first start condition and the second start condition is established and an effect control command that can specify the total number of reserved memories are prepared separately, the first If there are prepared a total of 10 types of effect control commands comprising two types of effect control commands that can specify each of the start condition and the second start condition and eight types of effect control commands that can specify the total number of reserved memories. It is often possible to reduce the types of commands prepared in advance and the storage capacity of the command table.

  In addition to the first start opening prize designation command and the second start opening prize designation command, an effect control command for notifying a determination result using predetermined numerical data at the first start winning prize or the second starting winning prize is prepared. May be. Alternatively, the notification content of the determination result using predetermined numerical data and the notification content of the total reserved storage number can be specified by one production control command at the time of the first start winning or the second starting winning. May be.

  The command D0XX is an abnormal winning notification command for designating notification of an abnormal winning or the like to the winning opening. In the abnormal winning notification command, different EXT data may be set corresponding to, for example, a matter in which an abnormality is detected. As an example of the abnormal winning notification command, a command D000H for designating the abnormal winning notification to the second start winning opening may be prepared in advance.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the payout control board 15 is, for example, a payout control command transmitted as an electrical signal. The payout control command is set to transmit the payout control command by the CPU 505 (see FIG. 6) included in the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, and based on the setting, the game control use is made. It is transmitted to the payout control board 15 by the first channel transmission / reception circuit of the serial communication circuit 511 (see FIG. 6) provided in the microcomputer 100. In the following description, the transmission operation of the payout control command from the main board 11 to the payout control board 15 includes a series of operations by the CPU 505 and the serial communication circuit 511 provided in the game control microcomputer 100. To do. Also, for example, a payout notification command as an electrical signal is transmitted from the payout control board 15 to the main board 11. The payout notification command is set so that the payout notification command is transmitted by the CPU of the payout control microcomputer 150 mounted on the payout control board 15, and the payout control microcomputer 150 is set based on the setting. It is transmitted to the main board 11 by a serial communication circuit provided. In the following description, it is assumed that the transmission operation of the payout notification command from the payout control board 15 to the main board 11 includes a series of operations by the CPU and serial communication circuit provided in the payout control microcomputer 150. . In addition, in the following description, not only a command for a predetermined operation from one of the main board 11 and the payout control board 15 to the other, but also a notification signal for notifying the other of the operation state of the other is a payout control command or a payout It shall be included in the notification command.

  The payout control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the payout control board 15 may include a payout number designation command and an ACK feedback command. The payout number designation command is a command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out. The ACK feedback command becomes a reception confirmation acceptance signal indicating that the prize ball ACK command transmitted from the payout control board 15 to the main board 11 is received on the main board 11 side.

  The payout notification command transmitted from the payout control board 15 to the main board 11 may include a prize ball ACK command, a payout error notification command, and a payout error cancel command. The winning ball ACK command is a reception confirmation signal indicating that the payout number specifying command transmitted from the main board 11 to the payout control board 15 is received on the payout control board 15 side. The payout error notification command is a command for notifying the main board 11 that an abnormality relating to the payout of the game ball has occurred on the payout control board 15 side. The payout error cancel command is a command for notifying the main substrate 11 side that the error that has occurred on the payout control board 15 side has been cancelled.

  In addition, between the main board | substrate 11 and the payout control board 15, it is not limited to what transmits / receives a command by serial communication, You may transmit / receive a command by parallel communication using a several signal wire | line. Further, instead of the payout error notification command and the payout error cancel command transmitted from the payout control board 15 to the main board 11, a payout error state signal indicating an error occurrence state in the payout control board 15 is sent to the main board 11. You may input into one of the provided input ports. For example, the payout error state signal is turned on when an error occurs in the payout control board 15, and is turned off when no error occurs or when the error is released. In this case, on the main board 11 side, a payout error state signal is fetched every time a timer interrupt occurs, and the fetch result is stored. The payout error state signal has changed from the off state to the on state by taking the exclusive OR of the signal state captured by the current timer interrupt and the signal state captured and stored by the previous timer interrupt. It may be possible to detect that the error has been changed from the on state to the off state (indicating the time when the error is released). When an error occurs in the payout control board 15 or when the error is released, an error has occurred in the payout operation by transmitting an effect control command prepared for each from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 It may be instructed to start or end the notification operation for notifying the user. The payout error state signal is not limited to one input to one of the input ports provided on the main board 11, and for example, a payout control board 15 such as a full signal, a ball out signal, a prize ball case error signal, or a door open signal. May be input to the main board 11 to detect when an error occurs or when an error is released as in the case of the payout error state signal. Then, by transmitting an effect control command corresponding to the type of the detected error from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the start or end of the notification operation corresponding to the detected error is instructed. It may be.

  FIG. 6 shows a configuration example of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. A game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 6 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes an external bus interface 501, a clock circuit 502, a specific information storage circuit 503, a reset / interrupt controller 504, a CPU (Central Processing Unit). ) 505, ROM (Read Only Memory) 506, RAM (Random Access Memory) 507, CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) 508, random number circuit 509, PIP (Parallel Input Port) 510, and serial communication circuit 511 And an address decoding circuit 512.

  FIG. 7 shows an example of an address map in the game control microcomputer 100. As shown in FIG. 7, the area from address 0000H to address 1FFFH is allocated to the ROM 506 and includes a user program area and a program management area. FIG. 8A shows an example of the usage and contents of the main part of the program management area in the ROM 506. The area from address 2000H to address 20FFH is a built-in register area assigned to the built-in register of the game control microcomputer 100. FIG. 8B shows an example of the usage and contents of the main part of the built-in register area. An area from address 7E00H to address 7FFFH is a work area assigned to the RAM 507, and can be assigned to an I / O map or a memory map. An area from address FDD0H to address FDFBH is an XCS decode area allocated to the address decode circuit 512.

  The program management area is a storage area for storing information necessary for the CPU 505 to execute the user program. As shown in FIG. 8A, the program management area includes a header KHDR, a function setting KFCS, a first random number initial setting KRS1, a second random number initial setting KRS2, an interrupt initial setting KIIS, a security time setting KSES, and the like. It is.

  The header KHDR stored in the program management area indicates the internal data read setting in the game control microcomputer 100. FIG. 9A illustrates the correspondence between setting data and operation in the header KHDR. Here, in the game control microcomputer 100, the ROM read prevention function and the bus output mask function can be set. The ROM read prevention function is a function for permitting or prohibiting the read operation for the data stored in the ROM 506 provided in the game control microcomputer 100, and the data stored in the ROM 506 cannot be read in a state where the read is prohibited. The bus output mask function is an address bus output, data bus output, and control signal in the external bus interface 501 when an external device connected to the external bus interface 501 makes a read request for internal data of the game control microcomputer 100. This function makes it impossible to read internal data from an external device by masking the output. As shown in FIG. 9A, the operation combination of the ROM read prevention function and the bus output mask function is set differently in accordance with the setting data of the header KHDR. Of the setting data shown in FIG. 9A, the setting data for which ROM reading is permitted and the bus output mask is valid is also referred to as bus output mask valid data. Further, the setting data (all “00H”) in which ROM reading is prohibited and the bus output mask is valid is also referred to as ROM reading prohibiting data. The setting data for which ROM reading is permitted and the bus output mask becomes invalid is also referred to as bus output mask invalid data.

  The function setting KFCS stored in the program management area indicates the operation setting of the watch dog timer (WDT) in the game control microcomputer 100 and the use setting of various function shared terminals. FIG. 9B shows an example of setting contents in the function setting KFCS.

  The bit number [7-5] of the function setting KFCS indicates, for example, the operation permission / prohibition of the watchdog timer that can be set as an interrupt factor in the reset / interrupt controller 504, and the cycle when it is permitted. The bit number [4] of the function setting KFCS indicates whether the predetermined function shared terminal (first shared terminal) in the game control microcomputer 100 is the second channel transmission terminal TXB used by the serial communication circuit 511 or the address decoding This is a TXB terminal setting that designates whether the circuit 512 uses the chip select output terminal XCS13. In the example shown in FIG. 9B, if the bit value in the bit number [4] of the function setting KFCS is “0”, the first shared terminal is used for the second channel transmission in the serial communication circuit 511. This is the setting for the 2-channel transmission terminal TXB. On the other hand, if the bit value is “1”, the first dual-purpose terminal is set to the chip select output terminal XCS13 used in the address decode circuit 512. In this embodiment, by setting the bit number [4] of the function setting KFCS to “0” and setting the first shared terminal to the second channel transmission terminal TXB, serial communication with the effect control board 12 is performed. enable.

  The bit number [3] of the function setting KFCS indicates whether the predetermined function shared terminal (second shared terminal) in the game control microcomputer 100 is the first channel transmission terminal TXA used by the serial communication circuit 511 or the address decoding This is a TXA terminal setting that indicates whether the circuit 512 uses the chip select output terminal XCS12. In the example shown in FIG. 9B, if the bit value in the bit number [3] of the function setting KFCS is “0”, the second shared terminal is used for the first channel transmission in the serial communication circuit 511. 1 channel transmission terminal TXA is set. On the other hand, if the bit value is “1”, the second dual-purpose terminal is set to the chip select output terminal XCS12 used in the address decode circuit 512. In this embodiment, by setting the bit number [3] of the function setting KFCS to “0” and setting the second shared terminal to the first channel transmission terminal TXA, serial communication with the payout control board 15 is performed. enable.

  The bit number [2] of the function setting KFCS indicates that the predetermined function shared terminal (third shared terminal) in the game control microcomputer 100 is the first channel reception terminal RXA used by the serial communication circuit 511, or the PIP 510 This is an RXA terminal setting indicating whether to use the input port P5. In the example shown in FIG. 9B, if the bit value in the bit number [2] of the function setting KFCS is “0”, the third shared terminal is used for the first channel reception in the serial communication circuit 511. 1 channel receiving terminal RXA is set. On the other hand, if the bit value is “1”, the third shared terminal is set to the input port P5 used in the PIP 510. In this embodiment, by setting the bit number [2] of the function setting KFCS to “0” and setting the third shared terminal to the first channel receiving terminal RXA, serial communication with the payout control board 15 is performed. enable.

  The bit number [1] of the function setting KFCS is used by the PIP 510 as the external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI connected to the CPU 505 or the like as a predetermined function shared terminal (fourth shared terminal) in the game control microcomputer 100 This is an NMI connection setting indicating whether to set the input port P4. In the example shown in FIG. 9B, if the bit value in the bit number [1] of the function setting KFCS is “0”, the external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI that connects the fourth shared terminal to the CPU 505 or the like is set. (CPU connection). On the other hand, if the bit value is “1”, the fourth shared terminal is set for the input port P4 used in the PIP 510 (CPU disconnected).

  The bit number [0] of the function setting KFCS is a predetermined function shared terminal (fifth shared terminal) in the game control microcomputer 100 is used as an external maskable interrupt terminal XINT connected to the CPU 505 or the like, or is used by the PIP 510 The XINT connection setting indicates whether the input port is P3. In the example shown in FIG. 9B, if the bit value at the bit number [0] of the function setting KFCS is “0”, the external maskable interrupt terminal XINT connected to the CPU 505 or the like is set to the fifth shared terminal. (CPU connection). On the other hand, if the bit value is “1”, the fifth shared terminal is set for the input port P3 used in the PIP 510 (CPU disconnected).

  The first random number initial setting KRS1 and the second random number initial setting KRS2 stored in the program management area indicate the initial setting of the random number circuit 509. FIG. 10A shows an example of setting contents in the first random number initial setting KRS1. FIG. 10B shows an example of setting contents in the second random number initial setting KRS2.

  The bit number [3] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is a random number circuit use setting indicating whether to use the random number circuit 509 or not. In the example shown in FIG. 10A, if the bit value in the bit number [3] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is “0”, the random number circuit 509 is not used (unused), but “1”. "Is set to use the random number circuit 509 (use). In this embodiment, the bit number [3] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is set to “1”, and the random number circuit 509 is set to be usable.

  The bit number [2] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 uses the random number update clock RGK (see FIG. 15) used for updating the numerical data that becomes the random number value in the random number circuit 509 as the internal system clock SCLK or for the random number. This is a random number update clock setting indicating whether the clock RCLK is divided by two. In the example shown in FIG. 10A, if the bit value in the bit number [2] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is “0”, the internal system clock SCLK is set to be used as the random number update clock RGK. If it is 1 ″, the random number clock RCLK is divided by two and used as the random number update clock RGK. In this embodiment, the bit number [2] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is set to “1”, and the random number clock RCLK is divided by two to be used as the random number update clock RGK.

  The bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is a random number update rule setting indicating whether or not to change the random number update rule in the random number circuit 509 and the change method in the case of the change. In the example shown in FIG. 10A, if the bit value in the bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is “00”, the random number update rule is not changed, and if it is “01”. The setting for changing the random number update rule by software is made after the second round, and if it is “10”, the random number update rule is automatically changed after the second round.

  The bit number [3-2] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is set to a fixed bit value “00”. Note that “B” of “00B” in FIG. 10B indicates binary display. The bit number [1-0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 indicates a setting relating to the start value in the numerical data serving as a random value in the random number circuit 509. In the example shown in FIG. 10B, if the bit value in the bit number [1] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is “0”, the start value is set to a predetermined default value 0000H, while “1”. In this case, a value based on the ID number, which is unique identification information assigned to each game control microcomputer 100, is set as the start value. In the example shown in FIG. 10B, if the bit value in the bit number [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is “0”, the start value is not changed every time the system is reset. When it is 1 ″, the start value is changed every time the system is reset. In addition, when setting the start value to a value based on the ID number, a part or all of the calculation for performing a predetermined scramble process on the ID number and the calculation such as addition / subtraction / multiplication / division using the ID number are performed. It is only necessary to execute and use the calculated value as the start value. When the bit value [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is “1”, the count value in a predetermined free-run counter (for example, the free-run counter 554A shown in FIG. 14) every system reset. A value set based on the above may be used as the start value. Further, when both the bit values [1] and [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 are “1”, a value set based on the ID number and the count value in the free run counter is set. It may be used as a start value.

  In the case where two systems (corresponding to the first and second channels) for generating numerical data to be random values in the random number circuit 509 are provided, the first shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B. The bit number [3-0] of the random number initial setting KRS1 and the bit number [3-0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 are used to indicate the initial setting in the first channel. On the other hand, the bit number [7-4] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 and the bit number [7-4] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 (omitted in FIGS. 10A and 10B), the second It may be used as an indication of the initial setting in the channel.

  Interrupt initial settings KIIS stored in the program management area indicate initial settings related to handling of maskable interrupts generated in the game control microcomputer 100. FIG. 10C shows an example of setting contents in the interrupt initial setting KIIS.

  In the bit number [7-4] of the interrupt initial setting KIIS, the upper 4 bits of the interrupt vector are set. In the bit number [3-0] of the interrupt initial setting KIIS, a combination of maskable interrupt factor priorities is set. In the example shown in FIG. 10C, if any of “00H” to “02H” and “06H” is specified by the bit number [3-0] of the interrupt initial setting KIIS, the maskable interrupt factor from the CTC 508 is determined. A combination of priorities that is the highest priority is set. On the other hand, if any one of “03H” and “07H” is designated, a combination of priorities with the highest priority given to the maskable interrupt factor from the random number circuit 509 is set. If either “04H” or “05H” is specified, a combination of priorities that sets the maskable interrupt factor from the serial communication circuit 511 as the highest priority is set. Note that even if the priority combination has the highest priority for maskable interrupt factors from the same circuit, if the specified value is different, the type of maskable interrupt factor that has the highest priority, the priority combination in the second or lower order, etc. will differ. ing.

  The security time setting KSES stored in the program management area is the frequency at which an abnormality is detected when the frequency of the random number clock RCLK is monitored, the time of the security mode that is shifted to when the operation of the game control microcomputer 100 starts ( Indicates settings related to (security time). Here, when the operation mode of the game control microcomputer 100 is the security mode, a predetermined security check process is executed to check whether or not the content stored in the ROM 506 has been changed. FIG. 11A shows an example of setting contents in the security time setting KSES.

  Bit number [7-6] of security time setting KSES is a random number clock abnormality detection setting indicating a frequency at which an abnormality is detected when the frequency of random number clock RCLK is monitored. FIG. 11B shows an example of setting contents in the bit number [7-6] of the security time setting KSES. The bit number [7-6] of the security time setting KSES specifies a reference value (determination value) at which the frequency of the random number clock RCLK is detected as abnormal based on the frequency of the internal system clock SCLK. Whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the input state of the random number clock RCLK by comparing the input state of the random number clock RCLK with the internal system clock SCLK based on the setting in the bit number [7-6] of the security time setting KSES. It is possible to determine whether. The bit number “5” of the security time setting KSES is set to a fixed bit value “0”.

  The bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES indicates a time setting when the security time is extended by a random time every system reset. FIG. 11C shows an example of setting contents in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES. In the example shown in FIG. 11C, if the bit value in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES is “00”, the random time extension is not performed. On the other hand, if the bit value is “01”, the short mode is set, and if the bit value is “10”, the long mode is set. Here, when the short mode or the long mode is designated, for example, the count value of the free-run counter incorporated in the game control microcomputer 100 is set to a predetermined value provided in the game control microcomputer 100 when a system reset occurs. Store in the built-in register (variable security time register). Then, the security time can be reduced by using the stored value of the variable security time register as it is at the time of initial setting, or by using the value obtained by substituting the stored value into a predetermined arithmetic function (for example, a hash function). What is necessary is just to determine the extension time at the time of extending at random. As an example, when the frequency of the internal system clock SCLK is 6.0 MHz, the extension time is randomly determined in the range of 0 to 680 μs (microseconds) in the short mode, and in the range of 0 to 348, 160 μs in the long mode. The extension time is determined at random. As another example, when the frequency of the internal system clock SCLK is 10.0 MHz, the extension time is randomly determined in the range of 0 to 408 μs in the short mode, and in the range of 0 to 208,896 μs in the long mode. The extension time is determined at random. The variable security time register only needs to be backed up using a backup power source common to the backup location on the main board 11, such as a backup area in the RAM 507 of the game control microcomputer 100. Alternatively, the variable security time register may be backed up by a power source provided separately from a backup power source used for a backup area in the RAM 507 or the like. In this way, the variable security time register is backed up by the backup power supply, so that the stored value of the variable security time register is saved for a predetermined period even when the power supply is stopped. Note that the timing at which the count value in the free-run counter is read and stored in the variable security time register is not limited to when a system reset occurs, and may be any predetermined timing. Alternatively, the free run counter may be backed up by a backup power source, and the extension time for extending the security time using the stored value read from the free run counter at the initial setting may be determined at random.

  Further, the short mode or the long mode is set by the bit value [4-3] of the security time setting KSES, and the bit value in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES is set to other than “000”. Thus, it is possible to set an extension time to be added to the fixed time. In this case, both the extension time corresponding to the bit value in the bit number [2-0] and the extension time randomly determined based on the bit value in the bit number [4-3] are fixed times. By adding, the security time during which the game control microcomputer 100 is in the security mode is determined.

  The external bus interface 501 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 6 is an interface function between the external bus and the internal bus of the chip constituting the game control microcomputer 100, an address bus, a data bus, and each control signal. A bus interface having a direction control function and the like. For example, the external bus interface 501 is connected to an external memory, an external input / output device or the like externally attached to the game control microcomputer 100, and address signals, data signals, various control signals, etc. with these external devices As long as it transmits and receives. In this embodiment, the external bus interface 501 includes an internal resource access control circuit 501A.

  The internal resource access control circuit 501A controls access to the internal data of the game control microcomputer 100 from an external device via the external bus interface 501, and for example, a game control program (game control processing program) stored in the ROM 506 And a circuit for limiting inappropriate external reading of internal data such as fixed data. Here, a circuit analysis device such as an in-circuit emulator (ICE; InCircuit Emulator) may be connected to the external bus interface 501 as an external device.

  As an example, according to the contents of the header KHDR stored in the program management area of the ROM 506, it is possible to switch between prohibiting or permitting reading of stored data in the ROM 506. For example, when the header KHDR is bus output mask invalid data, the ROM 506 can be read by an external device, and external reading of internal data is permitted. On the other hand, if the header KHDR is the bus output mask valid data, the ROM 506 can be read from the external device by masking the address bus output, data bus output and control signal output in the external bus interface 501, for example. Is disabled, and external reading of internal data is prohibited. In this case, when reading of internal data is requested from an external device connected to the external bus interface 501, a predetermined fixed value is output so that internal data cannot be read from the external device. . Further, when the header KHDR is ROM read prohibition data, the ROM 506 itself may not be read, and reading of stored data in the ROM 506 may be prevented. For example, in the ROM at the manufacturing stage, by making the header KHDR ROM read prohibition data, the ROM itself is made unreadable, and if it is a development ROM, the bus output mask invalid data is written in the header KHDR, Allows verification of internal data by an external device. On the other hand, if the ROM for mass production is used, the bus output mask valid data is written in the header KHDR so that the ROM 506 can be read by the CPU 505 or the like inside the game control microcomputer 100, while the external device It is only necessary to prevent the ROM 506 from being read.

  As another example, the internal resource access control circuit 501A is requested by an external device connected to the external bus interface 501 to read out internal data of the game control microcomputer 100 such as all or part of data stored in the ROM 506. Detect that. When this read request is detected, the internal resource access control circuit 501A determines whether or not reading of internal data of the game control microcomputer 100 is permitted. For example, it is assumed that all or part of the stored data in the ROM 506 has been encrypted. In this case, if the read request from the external device is a read request for the encryption processing program or key data stored in the ROM 506, the internal resource access control circuit 501A rejects the read request, and the game control micro Reading of the internal data of the computer 100 is prohibited. In the external bus interface 501, a switch element is provided between the output port from which data stored in the ROM 506 is output and the internal bus. When the internal resource access control circuit 501 A prohibits reading of the internal data, the switch element May be controlled to be turned off. As described above, the internal resource access control circuit 501A reads the internal data depending on whether or not the read request from the external device requests reading of predetermined internal data (for example, a predetermined area of the ROM 506). You may make it determine whether it prohibits or permits.

  Alternatively, the internal resource access control circuit 501A may determine whether or not a predetermined authentication code has been input from an external device when detecting a read request for internal data. In this case, for example, a predetermined code pattern serving as an authentication code may be stored in advance in the internal resource access control circuit 501A or in a predetermined area of the ROM 506. When an authentication code is input from the external device, the authentication code is compared with the authentication code stored in the internal device. If they match, a read request is accepted and the internal data of the game control microcomputer 100 is read. to approve. On the other hand, if the authentication code input from the external device does not match the authentication code stored internally, the read request is rejected and reading of the internal data of the game control microcomputer 100 is prohibited. As described above, the internal resource access control circuit 501A determines whether to prohibit or permit reading of the internal data depending on whether or not the authentication code input from the external device matches the authentication code stored internally. You may make it do. Thereby, it is possible to read out the internal data of the game control microcomputer 100 using a correct authentication code known in advance by an inspection organization or the like, and to properly inspect the validity of the internal data. become.

  As yet another example, a read prohibition flag is provided in the internal resource access control circuit 501A, and reading of the ROM 506 by an external device is prohibited if the read prohibition flag is on. On the other hand, when the reading prohibition flag is in the off state, reading of the ROM 506 by the external device is permitted. Here, the read prohibition flag is off in the initial state, but once the read prohibition flag is turned on, the read prohibition flag cannot be cleared and returned to the off state. That's fine. That is, the read prohibition flag can be irreversibly changed from the off state to the on state. For example, the internal resource access control circuit 501A does not have a function of clearing the read prohibition flag to turn it off, and is set so that the read prohibition flag cannot be cleared by any instruction. Just do it. Then, the internal resource access control circuit 501A determines whether or not the read prohibition flag is on when the external device requests to read internal data of the game control microcomputer 100 such as data stored in the ROM 506. At this time, if the reading prohibition flag is on, the reading request from the external device is rejected, and reading of the internal data of the gaming control microcomputer 100 is prohibited. On the other hand, if the read prohibition flag is OFF, a read request from an external device is accepted and reading of the internal data of the game control microcomputer 100 is permitted. With such a configuration, a provider who creates a game control processing program for game control and stores it in the ROM 506 can load a program that has been debugged from the ROM 506 with the read prohibition flag off. Can be read. Then, when shipping after the debugging work is completed, by setting the read prohibition flag to the on state, external reading of the ROM 506 can be restricted thereafter, and by the user of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like Reading of the ROM 506 can be prevented. As described above, the internal resource access control circuit 501A may determine whether to prohibit or permit reading of internal data depending on whether an internal flag such as a read prohibition flag is off or on. .

  Note that the read prohibition flag is not set irreversibly but can be changed from the on state to the off state, while the read prohibition flag is changed from the on state to the off state to permit reading of internal data. In this case, external reading of the ROM 506 may be restricted by erasing the data stored in the ROM 506 (for example, flash erasure).

  The clock circuit 502 included in the game control microcomputer 100 is a circuit that generates the internal system clock SCLK by, for example, dividing the oscillation signal input to the control external clock terminal EXC by two. In this embodiment, the control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 111 is input to the control external clock terminal EXC. The internal system clock SCLK generated by the clock circuit 502 is supplied to various circuits such as the CPU 505 that control the progress of the game in the game control microcomputer 100. The internal system clock SCLK is also supplied to the random number circuit 509 and used to monitor the frequency of the random number clock RCLK supplied from the random number clock generation circuit 112. Further, the internal system clock SCLK may be output from the system clock output terminal CLKO connected to the clock circuit 502 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. It is desirable that the internal system clock SCLK is not output to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. As described above, by limiting the external output of the internal system clock SCLK, it becomes difficult to specify the operation cycle of the internal circuit (such as the CPU 505) of the game control microcomputer 100 from the outside, and numerical data that becomes a random value Can be prevented from being externally specified when the software is updated by software.

  The unique information storage circuit 503 included in the game control microcomputer 100 is a circuit that stores a plurality of types of unique information that is internal information of the game control microcomputer 100, for example. As an example, the unique information storage circuit 503 stores three types of unique information such as a ROM code, a chip individual number, and an ID number. The ROM 506 code is a 4-byte numerical value generated from stored data in a predetermined area of the ROM 506, and four numerical values with different generation methods may be prepared. The chip individual number is a 4-byte number assigned when the game control microcomputer 100 is manufactured, and represents a different numerical value for each chip constituting the game control microcomputer 100. The ID number is an 8-byte number assigned when the game control microcomputer 100 is manufactured, and indicates a different numerical value for each chip constituting the game control microcomputer 100. Here, the chip individual number may be read from the user program, while the ID number may be set so as not to be read from the user program. The unique information storage circuit 503 may be included in the ROM 506 by using a predetermined area of the ROM 506, for example. Alternatively, the unique information storage circuit 503 may be included in the CPU 505 by using a built-in register of the CPU 505, for example.

  A reset / interrupt controller 504 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 is for controlling various reset and interrupt requests generated inside and outside the game control microcomputer 100. Resets controlled by the reset / interrupt controller 504 include system resets and user resets. The system reset is a reset that occurs when a low level signal is input to the external system reset terminal XSRST for a certain period. The user reset is a reset that occurs due to a predetermined factor, such as a watchdog timer (WDT) time-out signal or a non-designated area travel prohibition (IAT).

  Interrupts controlled by the reset / interrupt controller 504 include a non-maskable interrupt NMI and a maskable interrupt INT. The non-maskable interrupt NMI is an interrupt that is unconditionally accepted even when the CPU 505 is in an interrupt-disabled state, and is an interrupt that is generated when a low-level signal is input to the external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI (also used as the input port P4) for a certain period. is there. The maskable interrupt INT is an interrupt that can permit / prohibit acceptance of an interrupt request by a setting instruction of the CPU 505, and multiple interrupts can be executed by setting priority. The cause of the maskable interrupt INT is that a low level signal has been input to the external maskable interrupt terminal XINT (also used as the input port P3) for a certain period of time, a time-out has occurred in the timer circuit included in the CTC 508, A plurality of types of interrupt factors are determined in advance, such as the occurrence of an interrupt factor due to data reception or data transmission in the serial communication circuit 511 and the occurrence of an interrupt factor due to the acquisition of numerical data as a random value in the random number circuit 509. It only has to be done.

  The reset / interrupt controller 504 includes an interrupt mask register IMR (address 2028H), an interrupt wait monitor register IRR (address 2029H), and interrupts among the built-in registers included in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. The monitor register ISR (address 202AH), the internal information register CIF (address 208CH), etc. are used to control interrupts and manage resets. The interrupt mask register IMR is a register that sets what is used and what is not used among maskable interrupts INT caused by a plurality of different factors. The interrupt wait monitor register IRR is a register for confirming the generation state of a maskable interrupt request signal for each maskable interrupt factor set by the interrupt initial setting KIIS. The in-interrupt monitor register ISR is a register for confirming the processing state of the maskable interrupt request signal for each maskable interrupt factor set by the interrupt initial setting KIIS. The internal information register CIF is a register for managing the reset factor generated immediately before and recording the frequency abnormality of the random number clock RCLK.

  FIG. 12A shows a configuration example of the internal information register CIF. FIG. 12B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of the internal information data stored in the internal information register CIF. The internal information data CIF4 stored in the bit number [4] of the internal information register CIF is a random number clock abnormality instruction indicating the presence or absence of a frequency abnormality in the random number clock RCLK. In the example shown in FIG. 12B, when the frequency abnormality of the random number clock RCLK is not detected, the bit value of the internal information data CIF4 becomes “0”, whereas when the frequency abnormality is detected, the bit value is “1”. The internal information data CIF2 stored in the bit number [2] of the internal information register CIF is a system reset instruction indicating whether or not the reset factor generated immediately before is a system reset. In the example shown in FIG. 12B, when the immediately preceding reset factor is not a system reset (system reset has not occurred), the bit value of the internal information data CIF2 is “0”, whereas when the system reset is a system reset (system reset) When the reset occurs), the bit value becomes “1”. As a first example of the operation using the internal information data CIF2, the CPU 505 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the bit value of the internal information data CIF2 when the power is turned on, and the bit value is “1” (set). If not, it is determined that the power is not turned on normally. At this time, for example, by transmitting a predetermined effect control command toward the effect control board 12, an illegal signal input action is performed aiming at a big hit gaming state immediately after the power is turned on in the pachinko gaming machine 1. You may notify that there exists possibility with a production | presentation apparatus etc. Further, as a second example of the operation using the internal information data CIF2, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 notifies the probability variation state only when the power is turned on and does not inform the probability variation state normally, the game control microcomputer 100 when the power is turned on. The CPU 505 or the like may check the bit value of the internal information data CIF2, and if the bit value is not “1” (set), the gaming state may not be notified.

  The internal information data CIF1 stored in the bit number [1] of the internal information register CIF is a WDT timeout instruction indicating whether or not the reset factor generated immediately before is a user reset due to a watchdog timer (WDT) timeout. . In the example shown in FIG. 12B, when the previous reset factor is not a user reset due to a watchdog timer timeout (timeout has not occurred), the bit value of the internal information data CIF1 becomes “0”, while the watchdog When a user reset is caused by a timer timeout (timeout occurs), the bit value becomes “1”. The internal information data CIF0 stored in the bit number [0] of the internal information register CIF is an IAT generation instruction indicating whether or not the reset factor generated immediately before is a user reset due to prohibition of travel outside the designated area (IAT). . In the example shown in FIG. 12B, when the reset factor immediately before is not a user reset due to the occurrence of travel outside the designated area (no IAT occurrence), the bit value of the internal information data CIF0 is “0”, while When the user reset is caused by the occurrence of out-of-area travel (the occurrence of IAT), the bit value becomes “1”.

  The CPU 505 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 executes a user program (game control processing program for game control) based on a control code read from the ROM 506, thereby executing a game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1. CPU. When such game control is executed, a fixed data reading operation in which the CPU 505 reads fixed data from the ROM 506, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 505 writes various variable data to the RAM 507 and temporarily stores the data, and the CPU 505 is temporarily stored in the RAM 507. The CPU 505 receives the various data from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the external bus interface 501, the PIP 510, the serial communication circuit 511, and the like. A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the external bus interface 501 and the serial communication circuit 511 is also performed.

  As described above, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 505 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 506. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 100 (or CPU 505) is hereinafter referred to as executing (or performing processing). Specifically, the CPU 505 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 11.

  The ROM 506 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores a control code indicating a user program (game control processing program for game control), fixed data, and the like. The ROM 506 stores a security check program 506A. The CPU 505 reads the security check program 506A stored in the ROM 506 when the game control microcomputer 100 shifts to the security mode in response to the power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the occurrence of a system reset. A security check process is executed to check whether or not the change has been made. The security check program 506A may be stored in a built-in memory different from the ROM 506. Further, the security check program 506A may correspond to a security check process for inspecting the storage contents of an external memory externally attached to the game control microcomputer 100 via the external bus interface 501, for example.

  A RAM 507 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 provides a work area for game control. Here, at least a part of the RAM 507 may be a backup RAM that is backed up by a backup power source created in the power supply substrate 10. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, at least a part of the contents of the RAM 507 is stored for a predetermined period.

  The CTC 508 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 is configured, for example, by incorporating three channels (PTC0-PTC2) of 8-bit programmable timers, and includes a timer circuit that enables real-time interrupt generation and time measurement. Each programmable timer PTC0-PTC2 has a timer value that is updated in response to a change in the count clock signal generated based on the internal system clock SCLK (for example, a falling timing that changes from a high level to a low level). If it is. The CTC 508 may incorporate, for example, an 8-bit programmable counter with 4 channels (PCC0 to PCC3). Each of the programmable counters PCC0 to PCC3 only needs to have its count value updated in response to a signal change of the internal system clock SCLK or occurrence of a timeout in any of the programmable counters PCC0 to PCC3. The CTC 508 may include a free-run counter used to randomly determine an extension time (variable setting time) for extending the security time for each system reset. Alternatively, such a free-run counter may be included in an internal circuit of the game control microcomputer 100 different from the CTC 508, such as a backup area of the RAM 507, for example.

  The random number circuit 509 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 is a circuit that generates numerical data that is a random value having a predetermined update range, such as a 16-bit random number. In this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, for example, a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern type, as shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern and the random value MR5 for determining the normal display result are controlled so that they can be counted (updated). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers. Based on the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 509, the CPU 505 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 509, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 594 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating all or part of the random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by processing or updating the data. Alternatively, the CPU 505 counts (updates) a part of numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR5 by software using only the random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 594, for example, without using the random number circuit 509. You may make it do. As an example, numerical data extracted by the CPU 505 from the random number circuit 509 serving as hardware is processed by software to update the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, and other random values The numerical data indicating MR2 to MR5 may be updated by software by the CPU 505 using a random counter or the like.

  The random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is determined whether the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game is controlled as a big hit game state, whether the variable display result is "small hit" or not. This is a random value used to determine whether or not to control the gaming state. For example, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result takes a value in the range of “0” to “65535”. The random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is a random value used for determining the big hit type as one of a plurality of types when the variable display result is “big hit”. For example, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type takes a value in the range of “0” to “99”.

  The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is a random value used to determine the variation pattern type in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, for example, “0”. A value in the range of “251” is taken. The random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine one of a plurality of types of variation patterns in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol, for example, “0” to “ It takes a value in the range of “997”. The random value MR5 for determining the general-purpose display result is used for determining whether the variable display result in the general-purpose game by the normal symbol display 20 is “per-normal” or “unusual for general-purpose”. For example, it takes a value in the range of “3” to “13”. That is, the random value MR5 for determining the normal display result is a state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) through the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the variable display result in the normal game (normally This is used to determine whether or not to change the game ball from a state where it is open (such as an open state) to a state where the game ball can pass (enter) (such as an enlarged open state).

  FIG. 14 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the random number circuit 509. As shown in FIG. 14, the random number circuit 509 includes a frequency monitoring circuit 551, a clock flip-flop 552, a random number generation circuit 553, a start value setting circuit 554, a free-run counter 554A, a random number sequence change circuit 555, and a random number sequence change setting circuit. 556, latch flip-flops 557A and 557B, random number latch selectors 558A and 558B, and random number value registers 559A and 559B. The random value register 559A and the random value register 559B are respectively a random value register R1D (address 2038H-2039H) and a random value register R2D included in the built-in registers of the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8B. (Addresses 203AH-203BH).

  The frequency monitoring circuit 551 is a circuit for monitoring the input state of the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 112 to the random number circuit 509 and detecting the occurrence of an abnormality. The frequency monitoring circuit 551 monitors, for example, an oscillation signal input to the random number external clock terminal ERC, and compares it with the internal system clock SCLK to set contents in the bit number [7-6] of the security time setting KSES (see FIG. 11 (B)), the bit number [4] of the internal information register CIF is set to “1”. In this embodiment, the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 112 is input to the random number external clock terminal ERC.

  The clock flip-flop 552 is configured using, for example, a D-type flip-flop, and the random number clock RCLK from the random number external clock terminal ERC is input to the clock terminal CK. Further, in the clock flip-flop 552, the negative phase output terminal (inverted output terminal) Q bar is connected to the D input terminal. The random number update clock RGK is output from the positive phase output terminal (non-inverted output terminal) Q, while the latch clock RC0 is output from the negative phase output terminal (inverted output terminal) Q bar. In this case, when the signal state of the random number clock RCLK input to the clock terminal CK changes a predetermined state, the clock flip-flop 552 has a positive phase output terminal (non-inverted output terminal) Q and a negative phase output terminal ( Inverted output terminal) Changes the signal state in the output signal from the Q bar. For example, the clock flip-flop 552 rises when the signal state of the random number clock RCLK changes from a low level to a high level, or rises when the signal state of the random number clock RCLK changes from a high level to a low level. The input signal at the D input terminal is captured at any one of the falling timings. At this time, from the positive phase output terminal (non-inverted output terminal) Q, the input signal captured at the D input terminal is output without being inverted, while the negative phase output terminal (inverted output terminal) Q bar is output. From the input signal captured by the D input terminal is inverted and output. Thus, the random number update clock RGK having an oscillation frequency (for example, 10 MHz) that is ½ of the oscillation frequency (for example, 20 MHz) of the random number clock RCLK from the positive phase output terminal (non-inverted output terminal) Q of the clock flip-flop 552. Is output from the negative phase output terminal (inverted output terminal) Q bar, that is, the reverse phase signal (inverted signal) of the random number update clock RGK, that is, the same frequency as the random number update clock RGK and the phase of the random number update clock RGK is π. A different latch clock RC0 is output by (= 180 °).

  The random number update clock RGK output from the clock flip-flop 552 is input to the clock terminal of the random number generation circuit 553 and used for incrementing the count value in the random number generation circuit 553. The latch clock RC0 output from the clock flip-flop 552 is branched into the latch clock RC1 and the latch clock RC2 at the branch point BR1. Therefore, the latch clock RC1 and the latch clock RC2 have the same oscillation frequency, and the signal state changes with a common cycle. Here, examples of changes in the signal state in the latch clock RC1 and the latch clock RC2 include a rising edge that changes from a low level to a high level and a falling edge that changes from a high level to a low level. The latch clock RC1 is input to the clock terminal CK of the latch flip-flop 557A, and becomes a random number acquisition clock used to generate the start winning latch signal SL1. The latch clock RC2 is input to the clock terminal CK of the latch flip-flop 557B and becomes a random number acquisition clock used to generate the start winning latch signal SL2.

  Here, the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK and the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 111 are different from each other, and one of the oscillation frequencies is the other. It is never an integral multiple of the oscillation frequency. As an example, while the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK is 11.0 MHz, the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK may be 9.7 MHz. Therefore, both the random number update clock RGK and the latch clocks RC1 and RC2 are oscillation signals whose signal states change at a different period from the control clock CCLK supplied to the CPU 505. In other words, the clock flip-flop 552 is based on the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 112, and the random number update clock RGK for updating the count value and the latch clock that is used as a plurality of random number acquisition clocks. As RC1 and RC2, oscillation signals whose signal states change with a period different from the control clock CCLK and the internal system clock SCLK (the control clock CCLK divided by two) are generated.

  The random number generation circuit 553 is composed of, for example, a 16-bit counter and the like, and based on an input such as a random number update clock RGK output from the clock flip-flop 552, a predetermined initial value within a predetermined range in which numerical data can be updated. It is a circuit that cyclically updates to a predetermined final value. For example, the random number generation circuit 553 responds to the falling edge of the random number update clock RGK, which is an input signal to a predetermined clock terminal, from the initial value set within the range from “0” to “65535” to “65535”. The numerical data is counted up so that “1” is added to “1”. Then, after counting up to “65535”, the numerical data is updated cyclically by counting up from “0” to a numerical value that becomes a final value that is 1 smaller than the initial value.

  The start value setting circuit 554 sets the start value in the count value generated by the random number generation circuit 553 according to the bit value (see FIG. 10B) in the bit number [1-0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2. Set. For example, the start value setting circuit 554 sets the start value to the default value “0000H” if the bit number [1-0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is “00”, and if it is “10”. The value is set based on the ID number. If “01”, the value is set based on the count value in the free-run counter 554A that is changed every time the system is reset. If “11”, the ID number and the free-run counter 554A are set. Set to a value based on the count value. In the configuration example illustrated in FIG. 14, the random number circuit 509 includes a free-run counter 554A. When the start value is changed at every system reset, the count value of the free-run counter 554A is used as it is at the initial setting, or the count value is substituted into a predetermined arithmetic function (for example, a hash function). The start value may be determined at random by using the obtained value. The free-run counter 554A only needs to be backed up using a backup power source common to the backup location on the main board 11, such as a backup area in the RAM 507 of the game control microcomputer 100. Alternatively, the free-run counter 554A may be backed up by a power source provided separately from a backup power source used for a backup area or the like in the RAM 507. In this way, the free-run counter 554A is backed up by the backup power source, so that the count value in the free-run counter 554A is stored for a predetermined period even when the power supply is stopped.

  The free-run counter 554A is not limited to the one backed up by the backup power supply. For example, when a system reset occurs, the count value of the free-run counter 554A is stored in a predetermined built-in register (for example, a random number start value register). May be backed up by a backup power source. Then, the initial value is randomly determined by using the stored value of the random number start value register as it is or by using the value obtained by substituting the stored value into a predetermined arithmetic function. Also good. In this case, the timing at which the count value in the free-run counter 554A is read and stored in the random number start value register is not limited to when a system reset occurs, but may be any predetermined timing. The free-run counter 554A may be a dedicated free-run counter built in the random number circuit 509 and used to randomly determine the start value of numerical data. That is, the free-run counter 554A may be provided as a separate configuration from the free-run counter used for random determination of the extension time when extending the security time. Alternatively, as a free-run counter 554A, a free-run counter incorporated in the game control microcomputer 100 but provided outside the random number circuit 509 and used for random determination of the extension time when extending the security time. A common one may be used. In this case, in the process of determining the start value of the numerical data and the process of randomly determining the extension time in the security time, for example, the calculation function for substituting the count value is different from each other, or one of the determinations is made In the process, the count value is used as it is, while in the other determination process, the value obtained by substituting the count value into a predetermined arithmetic function is used. It may be different.

  Thus, the free-run counter 554A is not limited to the one built in the random number circuit 509, and may be included in the CTC 508, for example. Alternatively, it may be included in an internal circuit of the game control microcomputer 100 different from the CTC 508, for example, a backup area of the RAM 507. The free-run counter 554A may be the same counter as the free-run counter used for randomly determining the extension time for extending the security time for each system reset, or provided separately. It may be a counter.

  The random number sequence change circuit 555 is a circuit that allows the permutation of numerical data generated by the random number generation circuit 553 to be changed to a permutation according to a predetermined random number update rule. For example, the random number sequence change circuit 555 executes bit scramble processing such as bit replacement or transposition in numerical data output from the random number generation circuit 553. Further, the random number sequence change circuit 555 can change the permutation of numerical data, for example, by changing a bit scramble key or a bit scramble table used for bit scramble processing.

  The random number sequence change setting circuit 556 changes the random number update rule in the random number sequence change circuit 555 according to the bit value (see FIG. 10A) in the bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1. It is a circuit for setting. For example, if the bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is “00”, the random number sequence change setting circuit 556 sets the random number update rule not to change after the second round, while “01” If so, the random number update rule is changed in response to a change request by software after the second round, and if it is “10”, the random number update rule is automatically changed.

  When the random number update circuit 556 changes the random number update rule by software in response to the bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 being “01”, FIG. Among the built-in registers included in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown, the random number update rule RDSC (address 2034H) is used to control the change of the random number update rule. FIG. 15A shows a configuration example of the random number sequence change register RDSC. FIG. 15B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of random number sequence change request data stored in the random number sequence change register RDSC. The random number sequence change request data RDSC0 stored in the bit number [0] of the random number sequence change register RDSC indicates the presence / absence of a random number sequence change request when the random number update rule is changed by software. In the example shown in FIG. 15B, when there is no random number sequence change request by software, the bit value of the random number sequence change request data RDSC0 is “0”, but when there is a random number sequence change request, The bit value is “1”.

  FIG. 16 shows an operation example when the random number update rule is changed by software. In this case, when the count value permutation RCN output from the random number generation circuit 553 is cyclically updated from a predetermined initial value to a predetermined final value, the response is that the random number sequence change request data RDSC0 is “1”. Then, change the random number update rule. In the operation example shown in FIG. 16, the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 first is “0 → 1 →... → 65535”. Thereafter, it is assumed that “1” is written to the bit number [0] of the random number sequence change register RDSC at a predetermined timing by the CPU 505 executing the user program stored in the ROM 506.

  In response to the bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 being “01”, the random number sequence change setting circuit 556 reads the random number sequence change request data RDSC0 and the bit value is “1”. In response to "," a setting for changing the random number update rule is made. At this time, the random number sequence change setting circuit 556, according to the count value permutation RCN output from the random number generation circuit 553 reaching a predetermined final value, for example, any one of a plurality of types of random number update rules prepared in advance. The random number update rule is changed, for example, by selecting. In the operation example shown in FIG. 16, the random number sequence change circuit 555 outputs numerical data “65535” corresponding to the final value in the count value permutation RCN output from the random number generation circuit 553, and then responds to the random number sequence change request data RDSC0. Change the random number update rule. Thereafter, the random number sequence change circuit 555 outputs “65535 → 65534 →... → 0” as the random number sequence RSN according to the changed random number update rule. The random number sequence change register RDSC is initialized when the random number sequence change setting circuit 556 reads the random number sequence change request data RDSC0. Therefore, until the bit value “1” is written to the bit number [0] of the random number sequence change register RDSC again, the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 is “65535 → 65534 →... → 0”. Become.

  When the CPU 505 executes the user program stored in the ROM 506 and the bit value “1” is written again to the bit number [0] of the random number sequence change register RDSC, the random number update rule is changed again. In the operation example shown in FIG. 16, when the random number sequence change circuit 555 outputs numerical data “0” corresponding to the final value in the random number sequence RSN, the bit value “1” is written as the random number sequence change request data RDSC0. Change the random number update rule accordingly. Thereafter, the random number sequence changing circuit 555 outputs “0 → 2 →... → 65534 → 1 →... → 65535” as the random number sequence RSN according to the changed random number update rule.

  FIG. 17 shows an operation example when the random number update rule is automatically changed. In this case, in response to the count value permutation RCN output from the random number generation circuit 553 being cyclically updated from a predetermined initial value to a predetermined final value, the random number sequence change setting circuit 556 automatically changes the random number update rule. To change. In the operation example shown in FIG. 17, the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 first is “0 → 1 →... → 65535”.

  When the random number sequence RSN output from the random number change circuit 555 reaches a predetermined final value, the random number sequence change setting circuit 556 follows a predetermined order from among a plurality of types of update rules prepared in advance. The update rule may be changed by selecting the update rule. Alternatively, the random number sequence change setting circuit 556 may change the update rule by selecting an arbitrary update rule from among a plurality of types of update rules. In the operation example shown in FIG. 17, the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 becomes “65535 → 65534 →... → 0” due to the first change of the random number update rule. Thereafter, due to the second change in the random number update rule, the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 becomes “0 → 2 →... → 65534 → 1 →. In the operation example illustrated in FIG. 17, the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 is “65534 → 0 →... → 32768” due to the third change in the random number update rule. When the fourth random number update rule change is performed, the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 becomes “16383 → 49151 →... → 49150”. When the fifth random number update rule change is performed, the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 becomes “4 → 3 →... → 465553”.

  Thus, the random number sequence change circuit 555 changes the count value permutation RCN output from the random number generation circuit 553 based on a random number update rule predetermined by the setting of the random number sequence change setting circuit 556, thereby A random number sequence RSN in which data is updated by a predetermined procedure can be output.

  Each of the latch flip-flops 557A and 557B is configured using, for example, a D-type flip-flop. In the latch flip-flop 557A, a wiring from the input port P0 included in the PIP 510 is connected to the D input terminal, and a wiring for transmitting the latch clock RC1 is connected to the clock terminal CK. In this embodiment, the first start winning signal SS1 from the first start port switch 22A is input to the input port P0. The latch flip-flop 557A takes in the first start winning signal SS1 in response to the falling edge of the latch clock RC1, and outputs it as the start winning latch signal SL1. Accordingly, in the latch flip-flop 557A, the first start winning signal SS1 is output as the start winning latch signal SL1 in synchronization with the falling edge of the latch clock RC1. In the latch flip-flop 557B, a wiring from the input port P1 included in the PIP 510 is connected to the D input terminal, and a wiring for transmitting the latch clock RC2 is connected to the clock terminal CK. In this embodiment, the second start winning signal SS2 from the second start port switch 22B is input to the input port P1. The latch flip-flop 557B takes in the second start winning signal SS2 in response to the falling edge of the latch clock RC2, and outputs it as the start winning latch signal SL2. As a result, the latch flip-flop 557B outputs the second start winning signal SS2 as the start winning latch signal SL2 in synchronization with the falling edge of the latch clock RC2.

  The first start winning signal SS1 and the second start winning signal SS2 are not limited to those directly transmitted from the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B. As an example, the time during which the output signal from the first start port switch 22A and the output signal from the second start port switch 22B are in the ON state is measured, and the measured time becomes a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms). Sometimes, a timer circuit for outputting the first start winning signal SS1 and the second starting winning signal SS2 may be provided.

  The random number latch selector 558A is a circuit that takes in the start winning latch signal SL1 transmitted from the latch flip-flop 557A and the random number latch request signal by software, and selectively outputs one as the random number latch signal LL1. The random number latch selector 558B is a circuit that takes in the start winning latch signal SL2 transmitted from the latch flip-flop 557B and the random number latch request signal by software, and selectively outputs one as the random number latch signal LL1. The random number latch selector 558A and the random number latch selector 558B are a random value fetch register RDLT (address 2032H) and a random number latch selection register RDLS among the built-in registers included in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. (Address 2030H) is used to control the output of the random number latch signal LL1 and the random number latch signal LL2. The random value acquisition register RDLT is a register used for acquiring numerical data in the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 into the random value register 559A or the random value register 559B by software. The random number latch selection register RDLS receives the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 into the random number value register 559A or the random number value register 559B by software, or by signal input to the input ports P0 and P1. It is a register which shows the taking-in method of taking-in.

  FIG. 18A shows a configuration example of the random value fetch register RDLT. FIG. 18B shows an example of the setting contents in each bit of the random number acquisition specification data stored in the random value acquisition register RDLT. The random value acquisition specification data RDLT1 stored in the bit number [1] of the random value acquisition register RDLT indicates whether or not the random value acquisition specification for the random value register 559B serving as the random value register R2D is present. In the example shown in FIG. 18B, when there is no specification of random number acquisition to the random value register R2D by software, the bit value of the random value acquisition specification data RDLT1 is “0”, while the random value acquisition is not performed. The bit value is “1” when an instruction is included. The random value acquisition specification data RDLT0 stored in the bit number [0] of the random value acquisition register RDLT indicates whether or not the random value acquisition specification is specified for the random value register 559A serving as the random value register R1D. In the example shown in FIG. 18B, when the software does not specify the acquisition of the random number value to the random number register R1D, the bit value of the random value acquisition specification data RDLT0 is “0”, while the random value acquisition is not performed. The bit value is “1” when an instruction is included.

  FIG. 19A shows a configuration example of the random number latch selection register RDLS. FIG. 19B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of random number latch selection data stored in the random number latch selection register RDLS. The random number latch selection data RDLS1 stored in the bit number [1] of the random number latch selection register RDLS indicates a method of taking in the random number value register 559B serving as the random number value register R2D. In the example shown in FIG. 19B, when the numerical value data that becomes the random number value is loaded into the random value register R2D in response to the writing of the random value fetch designation data RDLT1 by software, the bit value of the random number latch selection data RDLS1 is set to “ 0 ”. On the other hand, when the numerical value data to be a random number value is taken into the random value register R2D in response to the signal input to the input port P1, the bit value of the random number latch selection data RDLS1 is set to “1”. The random number latch selection data RDLS0 stored in the bit number [0] of the random number latch selection register RDLS indicates a method of taking in the random number value register 559A serving as the random number value register R1D. In the example shown in FIG. 19B, the bit value of the random number latch selection data RDLS0 is “ 0 ”. On the other hand, when the numerical value data to be a random number value is taken into the random value register R1D in response to the signal input to the input port P0, the bit value of the random number latch selection data RDLS0 is set to “1”.

  The random value registers 559A and 559B are registers for storing numerical data in the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence changing circuit 555 as random number values. FIGS. 20A and 20B show a configuration example of a random value register 559A serving as the random value register R1D. 20A shows the lower byte R1D (L) of the random value register R1D, and FIG. 20B shows the upper byte R1D (H) of the random value register R1D. 20C and 20D show a configuration example of a random value register 559B serving as the random value register R2D. 20C shows the lower byte R2D (L) of the random value register R2D, and FIG. 20D shows the upper byte R2D (H) of the random value register R2D. Each of the random value registers 559A and 559B is a 16-bit (2-byte) register and can store a 16-bit random value.

  The random value register 559A takes in the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 as a random value in response to the random number latch signal LL1 supplied from the random number latch selector 558A being turned on. Store with. When the register read signal RRS1 supplied from the CPU 505 is turned on, the random value register 559A is in a readable (enable) state and outputs stored numerical data to an internal bus or the like. On the other hand, when the register read signal RRS1 is in the off state, the same value (for example, “65535H” or the like) is always output, and the reading is disabled (disabled). Further, the random value register 559A may be in a state in which the register read signal RRS1 cannot be received when the random number latch signal LL1 is in the ON state. Further, the random value register 559A may be in a state in which the random number latch signal LL1 cannot be received when the register read signal RRS1 is in the on state before the random number latch signal LL1 is in the on state. Good.

  The random value register 559B takes in the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 as a random value in response to the random number latch signal LL2 supplied from the random number latch selector 558B being turned on. Store with. When the register read signal RRS2 supplied from the CPU 505 is turned on, the random value register 559B enters a readable (enable) state and outputs stored numerical data to an internal bus or the like. On the other hand, when the register read signal RRS2 is in the OFF state, the same value (for example, “65535H” or the like) is always output, and the reading is disabled (disabled). Further, the random value register 559B may be in a state in which the register read signal RRS2 cannot be received when the random number latch signal LL2 is in the ON state. Further, the random value register 559B may be configured to be in a state in which the random number latch signal LL2 cannot be received when the register read signal RRS2 is in the on state before the random number latch signal LL2 is in the on state. Good.

  The random value register 559A and the random value register 559B are a random number latch flag register RDFM (address 2033H) and a random number interrupt control register RDIC (of the built-in registers included in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8B). Address 2031H) and enable operation management and interrupt control at the time of random number latching. The random number latch flag register RDFM is a register for storing a random number latch flag indicating whether or not numerical data to be a random number value is latched corresponding to each of the random number value register 559A and the random number value register 559B. For example, in the random number latch flag register RDFM, data indicating the state (ON or OFF) of the random number latch flag corresponding to each of the random number value register 559A and the random number value register 559B is stored. The corresponding random number latch flag (bit value data) is turned on (first value) when data is captured and stored, and storage of new numerical data is restricted, while the random value register 559A and the random value register When the numerical data stored in 559B is read, the corresponding random number latch flag (bit value data) is turned off (second value), and storage of new numerical data is permitted. The random number interrupt control register RDIC is a register that sets permission / prohibition of an interrupt that occurs when numerical data that becomes a random value is latched in the random value register 559A or the random value register 559B.

  FIG. 21A shows a configuration example of the random number latch flag register RDFM. FIG. 21B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of the random number latch flag data stored in the random number latch flag register RDFM. The random number latch flag data RDFM1 stored in the bit number [1] of the random number latch flag register RDFM becomes a random number latch flag indicating whether or not numerical data has been taken into the random number value register 559B serving as the random number value register R2D. In the example shown in FIG. 21B, when the numerical value data is not taken into the random value register R2D (no random value is taken), the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM1 is “0” (second value). While the random number latch flag is cleared to OFF state, when numeric data is fetched (random number fetched), the bit value is "1" (first value) and the random number latch flag is on Set to The random number latch flag data RDFM0 stored in the bit number [0] of the random number latch flag register RDFM is a random number latch flag indicating whether or not numerical data has been taken into the random number value register 559A serving as the random number value register R1D. In the example shown in FIG. 21B, when the numerical value data is not taken into the random value register R1D (no random value is taken), the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 is “0” (second value). While the random number latch flag is cleared to OFF state, when numeric data is fetched (random number fetched), the bit value is "1" (first value) and the random number latch flag is on Set to

  When each random number latch flag is on, storage of new numerical data in the random number value register R1D or the random number value register R2D associated with each random number latch flag is restricted (prohibited). That is, when the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 indicating whether or not the numerical value data has been taken into the random number value register R1D is “1” and the random number latch flag is in the ON state, the numerical value stored in the random number value register R1D Data cannot be changed, and storage (import) of new numerical data is restricted (prohibited). Further, when the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM1 indicating whether or not the random number value data is taken into the random number value register R2D is “1” and the random number latch flag is in the ON state, the random number value register R2D is stored in the random number value register R2D. Numerical data cannot be changed, and storage (import) of new numerical data is restricted (prohibited). On the other hand, when each random number latch flag is off, storage of new numerical data in the random number value register R1D or the random number value register R2D associated with each random number latch flag is permitted. That is, when the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 is “0” and the random number latch flag is in the OFF state, the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D can be changed, and new numerical data is stored ( Import) is allowed. Further, when the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM1 is “0” and the random number latch flag is in the OFF state, the numerical data stored in the random value register R2D can be changed, and new numerical data can be stored ( Import) is allowed.

  Note that the bit values of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 and the random number latch flag data RDFM1 are set to "0" to clear the corresponding random number latch flag to the off state, while being set to "1" to the on state. It is not limited to a positive logic type, and it may be a negative logic type that turns on when a corresponding random number latch flag is turned off when it is “1”. That is, each random number latch flag is turned on when numerical data is stored in the corresponding random value register R1D or random value register R2D, and the storage of new numerical data is restricted (prohibited), while the corresponding random value Any register that is turned off when reading of the register R1D or the random value register R2D is performed and storage of new numerical data is permitted.

  FIG. 22A shows a configuration example of the random number interrupt control register RDIC. FIG. 22B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of random number interrupt control data stored in the random number interrupt control register RDIC. The random number interrupt control data RDIC1 stored in the bit number [1] of the random number interrupt control register RDIC permits or prohibits an interrupt that occurs when numerical data is taken into the random number value register 559B serving as the random number value register R2D. Indicates the interrupt control setting for In the example shown in FIG. 22 (B), when interrupting at the time of fetching into the random value register R2D is prohibited (interrupt disabled), the bit value of the random number interrupt control data RDIC1 is set to “0”, while this interrupt is When enabling (interrupt enabled), the bit value is set to “1”. The random number interrupt control data RDIC0 stored in the bit number [0] of the random number interrupt control register RDIC allows or prohibits an interrupt that occurs when numerical data is taken into the random number value register 559A serving as the random number value register R1D. Indicates the interrupt control setting for In the example shown in FIG. 22 (B), when interrupting at the time of fetching into the random value register R1D is prohibited (interrupt disabled), the bit value of the random number interrupt control data RDIC0 is set to “0”, while this interrupt is When enabling (interrupt enabled), the bit value is set to “1”.

  In the configuration example shown in FIG. 6, a random number circuit 509 is built in the game control microcomputer 100. On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 23, the random number circuit 509 may be externally attached to the game control microcomputer 100 as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. In this case, the first start winning signal SS1 from the first start port switch 22A is branched inside the switch circuit 114, and one is input to the input port P0 of the PIP 510 provided in the game control microcomputer 100, and the other May be input to the D input terminal of the latch flip-flop 557A included in the random number circuit 509. Further, the second start winning signal SS2 from the second start port switch 22B is branched inside the switch circuit 114, and one is input to the input port P1 of the PIP 510 provided in the game control microcomputer 100, and the other is input. What is necessary is just to make it input into D input terminal of the flip-flop 557B for latch with which the random number circuit 509 is provided. Between the game control microcomputer 100, for example, the frequency monitor circuit 551 provided in the random number circuit 509 includes the internal system clock SCLK output from the clock circuit 502 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 via the system clock output terminal CLKO. The random value register R1D and the random value register R2D are input to the clock flip-flop 552 or via an address bus, a data bus, a control signal line, etc. connected to the external bus interface 501 provided in the game control microcomputer 100. The numerical data stored in the data may be read out.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 23, when the random number circuit 509 is externally attached to the game control microcomputer 100, the random number value register R1D or the random number value register R2D depends on the state (ON / OFF) of each random number latch flag. It is only necessary to limit (prohibit) or permit storage of new numerical data in the. Among the built-in registers shown in FIG. 8B, for example, the random number latch selection register RDLS, the random number interrupt control register RDIC, the random number value fetch register RDLT, the random number latch flag register RDFM, the random number sequence change register RDSC, the random number value register R1D, random Various registers used by the random number circuit 509, such as the numerical register R2D, may not be built in the game control microcomputer 100, but may be built in the random number circuit 509 externally attached to the game control microcomputer 100. . In this case, the CPU 505 of the game control microcomputer 100 may write and read various registers built in the random number circuit 509 via, for example, the external bus interface 501 or the like.

  A PIP 510 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 6 is, for example, a 6-bit input dedicated port, and an input port P0 to input port P2 serving as a dedicated terminal, and an input port P3 to input port serving as a function shared terminal. P5 is included. The input port P3 is also used as an external maskable interrupt terminal XINT connected to the CPU 505 or the like. The input port P4 is also used as an external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI connected to the CPU 505 or the like. The input port P5 is also used as the first channel reception terminal RXA used by the serial communication circuit 511. The use setting of the input port P3 to the input port P5 is instructed by the function setting KFCS stored in the program management area.

  The PIP 510 uses the input port register PI (address 2090H) among the built-in registers included in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. Do. The input port register PI is a register that stores a bit value indicating the input state of the external signal corresponding to each of the input port P0 to the input port P5.

  FIG. 24A shows a configuration example of the input port register PI. FIG. 24B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of the input port data stored in the input port register PI. The input port data PI5 stored in the bit number [5] of the input port register PI indicates the terminal state (ON / OFF) at the input port P5 that is also used as the first channel receiving terminal RXA. The input port data PI4 stored in the bit number [4] of the input port register PI indicates the terminal state (ON / OFF) at the input port P4 that is also used as the external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI. The input port data PI3 stored in the bit number [3] of the input port register PI indicates the terminal state (ON / OFF) at the input port P3 that is also used as the external maskable interrupt terminal XINT. The input port data PI2 stored in the bit number [2] of the input port register PI indicates the terminal state (ON / OFF) at the input port P2. The input port data PI1 stored in the bit number [1] of the input port register PI indicates the terminal state (ON / OFF) at the input port P1. The input port data PI0 stored in the bit number [0] of the input port register PI indicates the terminal state (ON / OFF) at the input port P0.

  The serial communication circuit 511 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 is a circuit that handles communication data in, for example, full duplex, asynchronous, standard NRZ (Non Return to Zero) format. As an example, the serial communication circuit 511 can only transmit serial data in a single direction between the external communication circuit and the first channel transmission / reception circuit capable of transmitting and receiving serial data bidirectionally with the external circuit. And a second channel transmission circuit. The first channel transmission / reception circuit included in the serial communication circuit 511 may be used for bidirectional serial communication with the payout control microcomputer 150 mounted on the payout control board 15. The second channel transmission circuit included in the serial communication circuit 511 may be used for unidirectional (only transmission) serial communication with the effect control microcomputer 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. Thereby, the signal input with respect to the main board | substrate 11 from the production control board | substrate 12 side can be prohibited, and an improper act can be prevented.

  In the serial communication circuit 511, for example, four types of errors, such as an overrun error, break code error, framing error, and parity error, may occur when communication data is received. As long as it can be generated. The overrun error is an error that occurs when the next communication data is received before the received communication data is read by the user program. A break code error is an error that occurs when a predetermined break code is detected during reception of communication data. The framing error is an error that occurs when the stop bit in the received communication data is “0”. The parity error is an error that occurs when the parity of the received communication data does not match a predetermined parity when the parity function is set to be used.

  The serial communication circuit 511 may include a first interrupt control circuit and a second interrupt control circuit. The first interrupt control circuit is a circuit for managing an interrupt generation factor in the first channel transmission / reception circuit included in the serial communication circuit 511 and controlling a communication interrupt request. Interrupts controlled by the first interrupt control circuit include a first channel transmission interrupt and a first channel reception interrupt. The first channel transmission interrupt includes an interruption due to transmission completion and an interruption due to transmission data empty. The first channel reception interrupt includes an interruption due to reception data full and an interruption due to the occurrence of a reception error such as a break code error, an overrun error, a framing error, and a parity error. The second interrupt control circuit is a circuit for managing an interrupt generation factor in the second channel receiving circuit included in the serial communication circuit 511 and controlling a communication interrupt request. The interrupt controlled by the second interrupt control circuit is a second channel transmission interrupt. The second channel transmission interrupt includes an interruption due to transmission completion and an interruption due to transmission data empty.

  The address decoding circuit 512 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 is a circuit for decoding each functional block in the game control microcomputer 100 and decoding a chip select signal that is a decode signal for an external device. . By the chip select signal, an internal circuit of the game control microcomputer 100 or an external device as a peripheral device is selectively operated effectively and can be accessed from the CPU 505.

  In the ROM 506 provided in the game control microcomputer 100, in addition to the game control user program and the control code to be the security check program 506A, various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game, etc. Is stored. For example, the ROM 506 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the CPU 505 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. The ROM 506 also has a variation pattern in which the CPU 505 stores a plurality of types of table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for transmitting control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11 and a plurality of types of decorative pattern variation patterns. Table data constituting the table is stored.

  FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a variation pattern of a decorative design. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “losing”, the variable display mode of the decorative design is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively. When the display result is “big hit”, when the big hit type is “non-probability change” or “probability change” or “surprise change”, or when the variable display result is “small hit” Correspondingly, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”) and is variable. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach loss variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost”. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” is referred to as a hit variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 25, in this embodiment, variation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4 are prepared in advance as non-reach variation patterns. Further, as the reach variation pattern, variation pattern PA2-1, variation pattern PA2-2, variation pattern PB2-1, variation pattern PB2-2, variation pattern PA3-1, variation pattern PA3-2, variation pattern PB3-1, variation A pattern PB3-2 is prepared in advance. The hit fluctuation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change” include the change pattern PA4-1, change pattern PA4-2, change pattern PB4-1, change A pattern PB4-2, a fluctuation pattern PA5-1, a fluctuation pattern PA5-2, a fluctuation pattern PB5-1, and a fluctuation pattern PB5-2 are prepared in advance. As variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, or the variable display result is “small hit”, the variation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3 are the variation patterns. Are prepared in advance. Further, a fluctuation pattern PC1-4 and a fluctuation pattern PC1-5 are prepared in advance as hit fluctuation patterns corresponding only to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”.

  FIG. 26 shows the decorative pattern variation pattern type in this embodiment. Each variation pattern shown in FIG. 25 is included in at least one variation pattern type among the plurality of variation pattern types shown in FIG. That is, each variation pattern type may be configured to include one or a plurality of variation patterns classified (grouped) based on, for example, an effect operation performed during variable display of decorative symbols. As an example, a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern in which a variable display state of a decorative design does not become a reach state by classifying (grouping) a plurality of variation patterns according to the type of reach effect (effect mode), and a variation with normal reach What is necessary is just to divide into the fluctuation pattern classification in which the pattern is included, and the fluctuation pattern classification in which the fluctuation pattern with a super reach (super reach α or super reach β) is included. As another example, categorizing (grouping) multiple variation patterns according to the presence or absence of “pseudo-continuous” variable display effects and the number of executions of pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) to execute “pseudo-continuous” variable display effects A variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern that is not included, a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern in which the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is 1 in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, and “pseudo-continuous” What is necessary is just to divide into the variation pattern classification in which the variation pattern which makes the frequency | count of execution of a pseudo | simulation continuous variation (revariation) 2 or more is included in the variable display effect of this. As another example, a plurality of variation patterns may be classified (grouped) according to the presence / absence of a specific effect such as “pseudo ream” or “slip”, or the variable display time of a decorative design. Among the plurality of variation pattern types, there may be one configured to include a common variation pattern.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 26, the variation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-3 are prepared in advance in response to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. Yes. Corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and “variable” variable display mode, variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-4 are prepared in advance. Corresponding to the variable display result (big hit type) of “big hit” when the variable display result is “big hit”, the variable pattern type CA 3-1 to the variable pattern type CA 3-3 are prepared in advance. Corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the variable display mode (big hit type) of “surprise” or the variable display result is “small hit”, the variation pattern type CA4-1 is prepared in advance. ing. Furthermore, the variation pattern type CA4-2 is prepared in advance only in the case where the variable display result is the “big hit” and “variable display type” (big hit type).

  The variation pattern type CA1-1 is a variation pattern type of “no shortening” in which the variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is not shortened and variable display effects such as “pseudo-ream” and “slip” are not executed. , A variation pattern previously associated with “no shortening” is included. The variation pattern type CA1-2 corresponds to, for example, that the total number of reserved memories is “3” or more in the normal state, or that the total number of reserved memories is “2” or more in the probability change state or the short time state. This is a variation pattern type of “with shortening” in which the special display such as “pseudo-ream” and “slip” is not executed because the variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is shortened, and is associated with “with shortening” in advance. Variation patterns are included. The variation pattern type corresponding to the case where the variable display time is shortened in the normal state and the variation pattern type corresponding to the case where the variable display time is shortened in the probability variation state or the short time state, It may be provided separately. In the normal state, the variable display type corresponding to the case where the total display memory number is “3” and the variable display time is shortened, and the variable display time is shortened when the total memory number is “4”. A variation pattern type corresponding to the case may be provided separately. The variation pattern type CA1-3 is a variation pattern type of “slide, pseudo-continuity” in which a specific effect of “pseudo-run” or “slip” is executed when the variable display mode is “non-reach”. , A pseudo-ream ”is included in advance.

  The variation pattern type CA2-1 includes a normal reach that is a normal reach effect after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state without executing the “pseudo-ream” specific effect, and the reach effect ends. A variation pattern type of “no normal reach (losing) pseudo-ream” that derives and displays a definite decorative symbol of a reach combination, and includes a variation pattern that is previously associated with “no normal reach (losing) pseudo-ream”. In the variation pattern type CA2-2, the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the specific effect of “pseudo ream” is one, and the reach display is performed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach state. Is the variation pattern type of “normal reach (losing) pseudo-continuous variation once” that derives and displays a definite decorative symbol of the reach combination, and is associated with “normal reach (losing) pseudo-continuous variation once” in advance. Includes variation patterns.

  In the variation pattern type CA2-3, the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) in the “pseudo-ream” specific rendering is two times, and the reach display is performed with the normal reach after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state. Is a variation pattern type of “normal reach (losing) quasi-continuous variation 2 times” for deriving and displaying a definite decorative symbol of the reach combination, and is associated with “normal reach (losing) quasi-continuous variation 2 times” in advance. Includes variation patterns. Fluctuation pattern types CA2-4 are accompanied by super reach (super reach α or super reach β) after the decorative symbol variable display state is set to the reach state, and when the reach production ends, the definite decorative symbols of the reach combination are derived and displayed. The variation pattern type of “Super Reach (Lose)” is included, and includes a variation pattern associated with “Super Reach (Lose)” in advance.

  In the variation pattern type CA3-1, the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is not executed, but the normal display is performed after the variable symbol display state of the decorative pattern is set to the reach state, and when the reach effect ends, the definite decoration of the jackpot combination is determined. It is a variation pattern type of “no normal reach (big hit) quasi-continuous” for deriving and displaying a symbol, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “no normal reach (big hit) quasi-continuous”. In the variation pattern type CA3-2, the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state, and then the normal reach is involved. Is a variation pattern type of “normal reach (big hit) pseudo-relation” and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “normal reach (big hit) pseudo-ream”. Fluctuation pattern type CA3-3 is a “super reach (big hit)” that displays a definite decorative symbol of a big hit combination when super reach is included after the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state, and the reach effect is finished. It is a variation pattern type, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “super reach (big hit)”.

  The variation pattern type CA4-1 is a variation pattern type of “2nd release chance stop” that derives and displays a confirmed decorative pattern that becomes the 2nd release chance, and is associated with “2nd release chance stop” in advance. Variation patterns are included. In the example of the variation pattern shown in FIG. 25, the variation pattern PC1-1 to variation pattern PC1-3 is a variation pattern in which the determined decorative design is one of a plurality of types of second chances of opening, and the variation pattern type CA4. −1. The variation pattern type CA4-2 is a method of deriving and displaying a definite decorative pattern of reach combination after setting the variable display state of the decorative symbol to the reach state when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. It is a variation pattern type of “open reach reach loss”, and includes a variation pattern that is associated in advance with “2 times open reach loss”. In the example of the variation pattern shown in FIG. 25, the variation pattern PC1-4 and the variation pattern PC1-5 are variation patterns having a fixed decorative design as a reach combination, and are included in the variation pattern type CA4-2. .

  FIG. 27 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 506. In this embodiment, as the special figure display result decision table, a first special figure display result decision table 130A shown in FIG. 27A and a second special figure display result decision table 130B shown in FIG. Are prepared in advance. The first special figure display result determination table 130A has a variable display result before a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. Whether or not to control the big hit gaming state as "big hit" and whether to control the small hit game state as "small hit" based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result It is a table that is referenced to determine. The second special figure display result determination table 130B shows the variable display result before the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Whether or not to control the big hit gaming state as "big hit" and whether to control the small hit game state as "small hit" based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result It is a table that is referenced to determine.

  In the first special figure display result determination table 130A, the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is determined depending on whether the probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 592 shown in FIG. 34 is OFF or ON. A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with is assigned to the special figure display results of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing”. In the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is “big hit” depending on whether the probability variation flag is off or on. And “Lose” special map display results. In the first special figure display result decision table 130A and the second special figure display result decision table 130B, the table data indicating the decision value to be compared with the random value MR1 for special figure display result decision indicates the special figure display result as “big hit”. ”Is data for determination assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state. In each of the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B, when the probability variation flag is on, a larger number of determination values are obtained than when the probability variation flag is off. It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Big hit". Here, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability variation state, the probability variation flag is turned on. On the other hand, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a short time state, the probability variation flag is turned off. As a result, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state, the probability that it will be determined to control the big hit gaming state with the special figure display result as “big hit” is higher than in the normal state or the short time state. Become. That is, in each of the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probabilistic state, compared to when it is in a normal state or a short time state. Therefore, the determination data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability of being determined to control the jackpot gaming state increases.

  Further, in the setting example of the first special figure display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 27A, a special figure display in which the determined value of the predetermined range (value in the range of “30000” to “30099”) is “small hit”. Assigned to the result. On the other hand, in the setting example of the second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in FIG. 27B, the determination value is not assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit”. With such a setting, the variable display result is determined based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied, The case where the variable display result is determined based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is established. The ratio determined to be controlled in the small hit gaming state as “small hit” can be varied. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the special figure display result is “small hit” and the game is controlled to the small hit game state. In the game state where the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening formed by the device 6B, the frequent play of the small hit game state in which it is difficult to obtain the prize ball is avoided, and the deterioration of the game interest due to the extended game is prevented. it can.

  In the second special figure display result determination table 130B, a predetermined range of determination values different from the settings in the first special figure display result determination table 130A are assigned to the special chart display result of “small hit”. Also good. Alternatively, regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, the special figure display result may be determined with reference to the common special figure display result determination table.

  In the setting example of the second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in FIG. 27B, among the determination values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the value indicating “0” is “big hit”. Assigned to the special map display result. On the other hand, the determination value indicating “0” may not be assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit”, but may be assigned to the special figure display result of “losing”. Thus, for example, the second start winning signal SS1 is intentionally set at the setting timing of the default value “0000H” that becomes the start value when the bit value in the bit number [1] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is set to “0”. Numeric data indicating “0”, which is input and becomes the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, is stored in the random value register R2D and read, or the special figure is displayed by utilizing the destruction or failure of the random value register R2D. It is possible to prevent the special figure display result from being “big hit” by extracting numerical data indicating “0” which is the random number MR1 for determining the result. In the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the same determination value as that of the first special figure display result determination table 130A may be assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit”.

  FIG. 28 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 506. The jackpot type determination table 131 determines the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” and the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. This is a table to be referred to. In the jackpot type determination table 131, whether the value of the variation special figure designation buffer (variation special figure designation buffer value) provided in the game control buffer setting unit 595 shown in FIG. 34 is “1” or “2”. Accordingly, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is assigned to a plurality of types of big hit types such as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, and “surprise change”. Here, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “1” when the special figure game using the first special figure is started on the first special symbol display device 4A when the first start condition is satisfied. Thus, “2” is set when the second special symbol display device 4B starts the special figure game using the second special figure when the second start condition is satisfied. The jackpot type determination table 131 corresponds to the jackpot type determined based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, with the value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 595 (the jackpot type buffer value). Thus, table data (setting data) for setting to any one of “0” to “2” is included.

  In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 28, the allocation of the determination value to the jackpot type of “surprise” differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”. ing. That is, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the determined value of the predetermined range (value in the range of “82” to “99”) is assigned to the jackpot type of “surprise”, while the fluctuation When the special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the decision value is not assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. And determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. Thus, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be “surprising” can be varied. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the big hit type is “surprise” and controlled to the two round big hit state. In a gaming state in which a game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening to be formed, frequent occurrence of a two-round big hit state in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball can be avoided, and a decrease in game entertainment due to a prolonged game can be prevented. Even when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, a predetermined range of determination values different from those when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1” are assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type. You may do it.

  29 and 30 show a configuration example of a variation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 506. In this embodiment, as the variation pattern type determination table, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 133A shown in FIG. 29A, the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133B shown in FIG. 29B, and FIG. ), A loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133C and a loss variation pattern type determination table (short time) 133D shown in FIG. 30B are prepared in advance.

  The jackpot variation pattern type determination table 133A, when it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “big hit”, the variation pattern type is changed according to the determination result of the jackpot type. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the numerical value MR3. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 133A, a numerical value to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type according to whether the determination result of the jackpot type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”. (Determined value) is assigned to any one of the variation pattern type CA3-1 to the variation pattern type CA3-3, the variation pattern type CA4-1, and the variation pattern type CA4-2. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 133A, the determined value is assigned to each variation pattern type so that the ratio determined for each variation pattern type differs depending on which of the plurality of types of jackpot types is determined. There is a part. For example, depending on whether the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”, the assignment of the decision value to the variation pattern type CA3-1 to variation pattern type CA3-3 differs. Thereby, the ratio determined to the same variation pattern type can be varied according to the determination result as to which of the multiple types of jackpot types.

  Further, in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 133A, there is a portion in which determined values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on which of the plurality of types of jackpot types is determined. For example, when the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”, the decision value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA3-1 to the variation pattern type CA3-3, while the variation pattern type CA4- No decision value is assigned to 1 and the variation pattern type CA4-2. On the other hand, when the big hit type is “surprise”, the decision value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1 and the variation pattern type CA4-2, while the variation pattern type CA3-1 to CA4-2. No determined value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA3-3. As a result, when the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is controlled to the 2 round big hit state according to “surprise”, the variation pattern type different from the case of being controlled to the 15 round big hit state is determined. can do.

  When the big hit type is determined as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probability change state, or a short-time state Thus, the assignment of the decision value to each variation pattern type may be made different. Thereby, the ratio determined to the same fluctuation | variation pattern classification can be varied according to which of a plurality of types of gaming states. Also, when the big hit type is determined as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probability change state, or a short-time state Thus, the determined values may be assigned to different variation pattern types. Thereby, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on which of the plurality of types of gaming states.

  Depending on whether the big hit type is determined to be “non-probable change” or “probability change”, the determination value may be assigned to each variation pattern type. Thereby, the degree of expectation that the variable display result is “15R probability variation big hit” can be varied depending on which variable pattern type includes variable pattern execution. For example, when the jackpot type is “probable change”, a large number of decision values are assigned, while when the jackpot type is “non-probable change”, variable display is performed using a variation pattern included in the variation pattern type to which a small decision value is assigned. In such a case, the degree of expectation that the variable display result is “15R probability variation big hit” is increased.

  The small hit variation pattern type determination table 133B is a table that is referred to for determining the variation pattern type when it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “small hit”. In the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133B, all numerical values (determination values) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1. Here, a part of the determined value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1 in accordance with the case where the jackpot type is “surprise” in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 133A shown in FIG. . As described above, the variation pattern type CA4-1 is a common variation pattern type in the case where the big hit type is “surprise” and in the case where the special figure display result is “small hit”. That is, the table data corresponding to the big hit type “surprise” in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 133A and the table data constituting the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133B include a common variation pattern type. Is set to Note that the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133B may be set so that a determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type different from the variation pattern type that can be determined when the big hit type is “surprising”. Good. In other words, the table data corresponding to the big hit type “surprise” in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 133A and the table data constituting the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133B include a common variation pattern type. , Each may be set to include a unique variation pattern type.

  The loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133B and the loss variation pattern type determination table (short time) 133C indicate that the change pattern type is determined (predetermined) when the special figure display result is determined to be “lost”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. Here, the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133B is selected as a use table when the gaming state is the normal state, for example. On the other hand, the loss variation pattern type determination table (medium time reduction) 133C is selected as a use table when time reduction control (time reduction control) is performed in a time reduction state or a probability change state, for example. When the time-shortening control is not performed in the probability variation state, the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133B may be selected as the usage table.

  In the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133B and the loss variation pattern type determination table (short time) 133C, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type according to the total number of reserved storages. ) Is assigned to any one of the variation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-3 and the variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-4. In the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133B and the loss variation pattern type determination table (short time) 133C, the determined values are assigned to the respective variation pattern types so that the ratios determined for the respective variation pattern types are different from each other. There is a part that. This makes it possible to vary the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state, the time-short state or the probability variation state, and whether the time reduction control is performed. it can. In the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133B and the loss variation pattern type determination table (short time) 133C, there may be portions where determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types. As a result, different variation pattern types can be determined depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state, the time-short state or the probability variation state, and whether or not the time reduction control is performed.

  In this embodiment, by referring to either the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133B or the loss variation pattern type determination table (mid-time) 133C, the variation pattern type CA1-1 to the variation pattern type CA1- 3 or variation pattern type CA2-1 to variation pattern type CA2-4. Here, as shown in FIG. 26, the variation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-3 are the variation pattern types corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. It is. The variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-4 are variation pattern types corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “reach”. Therefore, by determining the variation pattern type based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type with reference to the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133B and the loss variation pattern type determination table (short time medium) 133C, It is possible to determine whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state.

  In the setting example of the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (short time) 133D shown in FIGS. Is any one of “230” to “251”, a variation pattern type CA2 in which at least a variation pattern with super reach (super reach α or super reach β) is classified regardless of the gaming state or the total number of reserved memories. -4. That is, when the variable display result is determined to be “losing”, at least a part of the determined values corresponding to the variation pattern types CA2-4 into which the variation pattern with super reach is classified is at the start of variable display. The same decision value is set regardless of the total number of pending storages.

  In the setting example of the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133C shown in FIG. 30A, when the total number of reserved memories is “0” to “2”, When the determined value is also assigned to the variation pattern type CA2-4, and the total number of reserved memories is “3” to “5”, the determined values “225” to “229” are also assigned to the variation pattern type CA2-4. Assigned. Also, in the setting example of the loss variation pattern type determination table (short time) 133D shown in FIG. It is assigned to pattern type CA2-4. As described above, the decision values corresponding to the variation pattern types CA2-4 in which the specific variation pattern with super reach is classified may include a decision value different from the same decision value. It suffices that at least some of the determined values are the same determined value. On the other hand, only the same decision value may be assigned to the variation pattern types CA2-4 in which specific variation patterns with super reach are classified, and decision values other than the same decision value may not be assigned.

  In the setting example of the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133C shown in FIG. 30A, when the total number of reserved storage is any of “0” to “2”, the variation pattern type CA1-2 is set. On the other hand, when the determined value is not assigned to the variable pattern type CA1-2 when the total reserved storage number is any of “3” to “5” and “6” to “8” A value has been assigned. In addition, when the total number of reserved memories is any one of “6” to “8”, a larger number of determination values is obtained than when the total number of reserved memories is any one of “3” to “5”. It is assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-2.

  In the setting example of the loss variation pattern type determination table (short time) 133D shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the total number of reserved memories is “1” or “2” to “8”, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-2. In addition, when the total number of reserved memories is any one of “2” to “8”, a larger number of determination values are assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-2 than when the total number of reserved memories is “1”. Assigned.

  Here, in the variation pattern type CA1-2, a variation pattern with a shortened special pattern variation time of 3000 ms (milliseconds) corresponding to the variable display result “losing” and the variable display mode “non-reach”. PA1-2 is included (see FIG. 31B). In other words, the variation pattern PA1-2 included in the variation pattern type CA1-2 is a variation pattern in which the decorative display variable display state does not become the reach state. It is a fluctuation pattern for shortening in which the figure fluctuation time is shortened. In the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133C that is referred to in the normal state such as when the game state is a normal state, the total number of reserved memories at the start of variable display is any of “0” to “2”. If the determination value corresponding to the variation pattern PA1-2 is not set and the total reserved memory number is any of “3” to “5”, the total reserved memory number is “ In the case of any of “6” to “8”, a large number of determination values corresponding to the variation pattern PA1-2 are set. Further, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (short time) 133D that is referred to when shortening, such as when the time shortening control is performed in the probability variation state or the time shortening state, the total number of reserved memories at the start of variable display is “0”. If the determined value corresponding to the variation pattern PA1-2 is not set and the total reserved memory number is “1”, the total reserved memory number is any of “2” to “8”. In this case, a large number of determination values corresponding to the variation pattern PA1-2 are set.

  FIG. 31 shows a configuration example of a variation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 506. In this embodiment, as the variation pattern determination table, a hit variation pattern determination table 134A shown in FIG. 31A and a loss variation pattern determination table 134B shown in FIG. 31B are prepared in advance. Each variation pattern determination table is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random number MR4 for determining a variation pattern. In each variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination is assigned to a single type or a plurality of types of variation patterns according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. .

  FIG. 32 shows an example of the configuration of the universal map display result determination table 135 stored in the ROM 506. The general figure display result determination table 135 sets the normal figure display result to “per common figure” before the fixed normal symbol that becomes the normal figure display result is derived and displayed in the general figure game by the normal symbol display device 20. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to set “general map loss” based on the random number value MR5 for determining the general map display result.

  In the general map display result determination table 135, the numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number MR5 for determining the general map display result is “per normal map” depending on whether the time reduction flag is off or on. Or, it is assigned to the general map display result of “general map loss”. Here, the time reduction flag is set to the on state in response to the time reduction control being performed when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a special gaming state such as a probability change state or a time reduction state, while the time reduction is performed. It is cleared and turned off in response to the end of control. In the common figure display result determination table 135, the normal figure change time from the start of the normal pattern change display to the derivation and display of the fixed normal symbol corresponding to the general figure display result or the like is displayed in any of a plurality of types. Setting data for setting and an open state in which a game ball can pass through the normally variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole) corresponding to the case where the result of the normal map display becomes “per normal map”. For example, setting data for setting the time (opening time) and the number of times (opening times) for performing the control may be included.

  In the setting example of the general map display result determination table 135 shown in FIG. 32, the determined value is assigned to the general map display result of “per common map” or “normal map loss” depending on whether or not the time flag is on. Is different. In other words, the decision value for each ordinary map display result is such that the ratio determined for the ordinary map display result of “per common map” is higher during the time when the time reduction control is performed than when it is not during the time reduction. Is assigned. With such a setting, the normal figure display result becomes “per normal figure” when the time reduction control is performed, and when the time reduction control is other than during the time reduction, the normally variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning opening) ) Is opened more frequently. Also, when the time shortening control is performed, the normally variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning opening) is set when the normal map display result is "per normal map" when the time shortening control is not performed other than during the time shortening. The time for opening (opening time) and the number of times (opening times) increase. Further, when the time shortening control is performed, the normal time from when the normal symbol display on the normal symbol display 20 is started to the time when the fixed normal symbol is derived and displayed is greater than when the time reduction control is not performed. The fluctuation time may be set to be short. By such setting, the second start condition is more easily established by increasing the possibility that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening when the time reduction control is performed than when it is not during the time reduction. To do.

  FIG. 33 shows an example of the structure of the start opening prize table stored in the ROM 506. In this embodiment, a first start opening winning table 136A shown in FIG. 33 (A) and a second starting opening winning table 136B shown in FIG. 33 (B) are prepared in advance as start opening winning tables. . In each start opening winning table, the game ball passes (enters) through the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, and the start winning is generated. This table is sometimes referred to for performing various settings.

  The first start opening winning table 136A shown in FIG. 33 (A) is selected as a use table when a game ball passes (enters) through the first starting winning opening and a start winning is generated. The first start slot winning table 136A is composed of table data for designating a first reserved memory counter address, a random value register R1D address, a first special figure reserved memory section address, and the like. The first reserved memory counter address is an address assigned to the first reserved memory counter. The first reserved memory counter is provided in the game control counter setting unit 594 shown in FIG. 34 and counts the first special figure reserved memory number. The random value register R1D address is an address (for example, the start address 2038H) assigned to the random value register R1D in the built-in register area shown in FIG. 8B. The first special figure reservation storage unit address is an address (for example, a head address) assigned to the first special figure reservation storage unit 591A shown in FIG.

  The second start opening winning table 136B shown in FIG. 33B is selected as a use table when a game ball passes (enters) through the second starting winning opening and a start winning occurs. The second start opening winning table 136B is composed of table data for designating a second reserved memory counter address, a random number value register R2D address, a second special figure reserved memory section address, and the like. The second reserved memory counter address is an address assigned to the second reserved memory counter. The second reserved memory counter is provided in the game control counter setting unit 594 shown in FIG. 34 and counts the second special figure reserved memory number. The random value register R2D address is an address (for example, the head address 203AH) assigned to the random value register R2D in the built-in register area shown in FIG. The second special figure reservation storage unit address is an address (for example, a head address) assigned to the second special figure reservation storage unit 591B shown in FIG.

  In the RAM 507 provided in the game control microcomputer 100, for example, a game control data holding area as shown in FIG. 34 is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. 590 is provided. The game control data holding area 590 shown in FIG. 34 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 591A, a second special figure hold storage unit 591B, a general figure hold storage unit 591C, a game control flag setting unit 592, and a game. A control timer setting unit 593, a game control counter setting unit 594, and a game control buffer setting unit 595 are provided.

  The first special figure storage unit 591A satisfies the first start condition in response to the occurrence of the start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. The holding data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A) in which the first start condition is not established is stored. As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit 591A determines the special figure display result obtained by the CPU 505 based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the winning in association with the holding number in the order of winning in the first starting winning opening. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for use, the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are reserved data, and the stored number is a predetermined upper limit value. Store until it reaches (for example, “4”).

  The second special figure holding storage unit 591B satisfies the second start condition in response to the occurrence of the start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. However, the hold data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B) in which the second start condition is not established is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 591B determines the special figure display result obtained by the CPU 505 based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the winning in association with the holding number in the order of winning in the second starting winning opening. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for use, the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are reserved data, and the stored number is a predetermined upper limit value. Store until it reaches (eg, “4”).

  The usual figure hold storage unit 591C stores hold data of a usual figure game that has passed the passage gate 41 and has established the usual figure start condition but does not satisfy the usual figure start condition. As an example, the universal map storage unit 591C is used for determining the general map display result obtained by the CPU 505 based on the establishment of the general chart start condition by passing each game ball in association with the reservation numbers in the passing order of the passing gate 41. Numerical data indicating the random number MR5 is stored as pending data until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”).

  The first special figure reservation storage unit 591A and the second special figure reservation storage unit 591B may be provided separately, or a storage area combining these may be provided. As an example, a storage area including eight areas obtained by combining the start data storage area and the random value storage area may be provided. In such a configuration, continuous addresses in the RAM 507 may be allocated to the start data storage area and the random value storage area. In this case, for example, by updating the value of the pointer for designating the address of the data storage destination based on the total number of reserved storage, the start data (first start winning a prize opening and first (2) Data that can specify whether or not the start winning is generated due to the game ball passing (entering) through which start winning opening is set. At this time, in order to specify the head of the free space, for example, a value obtained by adding 1 to the value obtained by multiplying the total number of reserved memories by the number of data in one piece of reserved data (numerical data indicating start data and random number values) (start data storage) A value obtained by adding one area) is specified as an address offset value. The pointer value may be updated in accordance with the offset value thus specified. In this configuration, a total of two data storage areas, one start data storage area and one random value storage area, are provided corresponding to one hold data. Therefore, a value obtained by adding 1 to a value obtained by doubling the total number of reserved memories is specified as an address offset value. As an example, when the total number of reserved memories is “3”, “+7” (a value obtained by doubling the total number of reserved memories “3” and adding 1) is specified and corresponds to this offset value. The start data is set in the start data storage area. If a total of three data storage areas including one start-up data storage area and two random number value storage areas are provided corresponding to one reserved data, the total number of reserved memories is tripled. A value obtained by adding 1 (a value obtained by adding one start data storage area) may be specified as the offset value of the address.

  Further, when the initial position of the pointer for designating the data storage destination address is set as the start data storage area corresponding to the hold number “1”, the value obtained by multiplying the total hold storage number by the number of data in one hold data is The address offset value may be specified. For example, when two data storage areas, one start data storage area and one random value storage area, are provided corresponding to one hold data, the value obtained by doubling the total hold storage number is The address offset value may be specified. When a total of three data storage areas including one start-up data storage area and two random number value storage areas are provided corresponding to one hold data, a value obtained by multiplying the total hold storage number by three is obtained. The address offset value may be specified. After the start data is set in the start data storage area in this way, 1 is added to the value of the pointer specifying the address, and numerical data indicating the random number value is stored in the random value storage area of the address pointed to by the pointer after the addition. That's fine.

  The game control flag setting unit 592 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 592 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags. As an example, the game control flag setting unit 592 only needs to be provided with a special figure process flag, a common figure process flag, a big hit flag, a small hit flag, a probability change flag, a time reduction flag, and the like.

  The special figure process flag indicates the progress of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A, the progress of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, and the like. In step S96 of FIG. 41 executed for control and the special symbol process shown in FIG. 46, which process is to be selected and executed is instructed. The ordinary symbol process flag indicates which processing in step S97 of FIG. 41 or ordinary symbol process shown in FIG. 55 executed for controlling the progress of the ordinary symbol game using the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol indicator 20. Indicates whether to select and execute.

  The big hit flag is set to an on state corresponding to a determination result that the special figure display result is “big hit” when the special figure game is started. On the other hand, it is cleared and turned off in response to, for example, that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game. The small hit flag is set to an on state corresponding to the determination result that the special figure display result is “small hit” when the special figure game is started. On the other hand, it is cleared and turned off in response to, for example, the small hit symbol being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game. The probability change flag is set to the on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to the probability change state, and is cleared to the off state in response to the end of the probability change state. . The time reduction flag is set to the on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to the time reduction state, and is cleared to the off state in response to the completion of the time reduction state. .

  The game control timer setting unit 593 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 593 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers. As an example, the game control timer setting unit 593 may be provided with a game control process timer, a special figure variation timer, a common figure variation timer, a backup monitoring timer, and the like.

  The game control process timer is for measuring, for example, a time for controlling the progress of the big hit game state or the small hit game state on the main board 11 side. As a specific example, the game control process timer stores, as a game control process timer value, data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. It is used as a down counter that counts down automatically. Alternatively, the game control process timer is used as an up-counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from a predetermined time point, such as a big hit game state or a small hit game state start point, and periodically counts up. May be.

  The special figure variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 11 side, a time for controlling the progress of the special figure game such as a special figure variation time which is the execution time of the special figure game. As a specific example, the special figure variation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured in order to control the progress of the special figure game as a special figure fluctuation timer value and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the special figure variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the special figure game and periodically counts up.

  The normal map change timer is for measuring the time for controlling the progress of the normal game, such as the normal map change time, which is the execution time of the normal game, on the main board 11 side. As a specific example, the normal fluctuation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the normal figure game as a normal fluctuation timer value and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the normal time variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the normal time game and periodically counts up.

  The backup monitoring timer is for measuring an elapsed time after the power-off signal transmitted from the power monitoring circuit 303 mounted on the power board 10 is turned on. As an example, when the main board 11 detects a power-off signal output based on a decrease in the power supply voltage VSL supplied from the power supply monitoring circuit 303, measurement of the elapsed time by the backup monitoring timer is started. . The measurement by the backup monitoring timer is continued until the output of the power-off signal is stopped. When the elapsed time measured by the backup monitoring timer reaches a predetermined time, a predetermined preparation process corresponding to the stop of power supply, such as a process for protecting data in the backup area in the RAM 507, is executed.

  The game control counter setting unit 594 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 594 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. As an example, the game control counter setting unit 594 may be provided with a random counter, a first reserved memory counter, a second reserved memory counter, a round number counter, and the like.

  The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 594 counts a part of numerical data indicating a random value used for controlling the progress of the game separately from the random number circuit 509 so that the CPU 505 can be updated by software. belongs to. For example, the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 594 stores numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR5 as random count values. As for the random number values MR2 to MR5, numerical data indicating each random number value is updated regularly or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 505.

  The first reserved memory counter is for counting the first special figure reserved memory number that is the number of stored reserved data in the first special figure reserved memory unit 591A. For example, in the first reserved memory counter, data indicating the count value corresponding to the first special figure reserved memory number is stored as the first reserved memory count value, and corresponding to the increase or decrease of the first special figure reserved memory number Updated (for example, 1 addition or 1 subtraction). The second reserved memory counter is for counting the second special figure reserved memory number, which is the number of stored reserved data in the second special figure reserved memory unit 591B. For example, in the second reserved memory counter, data indicating a count value corresponding to the second special figure reserved memory number is stored as a special figure reserved memory count value, and updated in accordance with an increase or decrease in the special figure reserved memory number ( For example, 1 addition or 1 subtraction). A total reserved memory counter for counting the total number of reserved memories may be provided separately from the first and second reserved memory counters. Alternatively, the total number of reserved memories may be specified by adding the first reserved memory count value and the second reserved memory count value.

  The round number counter is for counting the number of rounds executed in the big hit gaming state. For example, in the round number counter, data indicating a count initial value “1” at the start of the big hit gaming state is set as the round number count value. When one round is completed and the next round is started, the round count value is incremented by 1 and updated. The round number counter may also count the number of executions of the variable winning operation in the small hit gaming state.

  The game control buffer setting unit 595 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 595 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers. As an example, the game control buffer setting unit 595 only needs to be provided with a transmission command buffer, a variable special figure designation buffer, a big hit type buffer, a previous port buffer, a previous port buffer, a switch-on buffer, a previous data buffer, and the like.

  The transmission command buffer is used to temporarily store setting data for transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board. For example, the transmission command buffer is configured to include a plurality of (for example, “12”) buffer areas, and setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 506 of the command table corresponding to the control command to be transmitted is stored in each buffer area. The In addition, a buffer area where setting data is written and read in the transmission command buffer may be specified by a transmission command pointer or the like, and a plurality of buffer areas may be used as a ring buffer.

  The variable special symbol designation buffer includes a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. A buffer value indicating whether the special figure game is executed is stored. As an example, the value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer (fluctuation special figure designation buffer value) is “1” in response to the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. Set to Further, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” in response to the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “0” corresponding to the completion of the special figure game.

  In the big hit type buffer, the variable display form of the decorative pattern when the variable display result is “big hit” is set to one of a plurality of types of big hit types such as “non-probable change”, “probable change”, and “surprise change”. The corresponding value is stored as a jackpot type buffer value. As an example, based on the setting in the jackpot type determination table 131 as shown in FIG. 28, when the jackpot type is “non-probable change”, the jackpot type buffer value is set to “0” and the jackpot type is “probable change”. In this case, the big hit type buffer value is set to “1”, and when the big hit type is “surprise”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “2”.

  The port buffer before two times is a 1-byte buffer in which the switch on / off determination result at the time of the previous timer interrupt occurrence (for example, 4 ms before) is stored. The previous port buffer is a 1-byte buffer that stores a switch on / off determination result when the previous timer interrupt occurs (for example, 2 ms before). In the switch-on buffer, “1” is set in the corresponding bit of the switch when the switch is detected to be on, and “0” is set in the corresponding bit of the switch when the switch is detected to be off. A byte buffer. The previous data buffer is a 1-byte buffer area that is temporarily used when step S92 in FIG. 41 or the switch process shown in FIG. 43 is executed.

  FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram showing a 1-byte buffer. The bit arrangement of the port buffer, the previous port buffer, and the switch-on buffer only needs to correspond to the bit arrangement of the input port register PI. That is, information corresponding to each of the detection signals of the switches assigned to the bit numbers [0] to [7] shown in FIGS. 24A and 24B includes the port buffer, the previous port buffer, and the switch. On-buffer bit numbers [0] to [7] are set.

  As an example, the bit number [0] of the switch-on buffer corresponds to the bit number [0] of the input port P0 shown in FIG. 23 and the input port register PI shown in FIGS. 24 (A) and 24 (B). A bit value indicating the state of the first start winning signal SS1 transmitted from the first start port switch 22A is set. Further, the bit number [1] of the switch-on buffer corresponds to the input port P1 shown in FIG. 23 and the like and the bit number [1] of the input port register PI shown in FIGS. 24 (A) and (B). A bit value indicating the state of the second start winning signal SS2 transmitted from the second start port switch 22B is set. The CPU 505 of the game control microcomputer 100 detects whether or not the game ball has passed through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A based on the bit value in the bit number [0] of the switch-on buffer. Identifying the result, establishing a first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A, and detecting the game ball that has passed the first start winning opening It is sufficient to instruct the payout of a prize ball corresponding to the above, or to perform a predetermined setting including one or both of them. Further, the CPU 505 of the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the bit value in the bit number [1] of the switch-on buffer. Is detected, and the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is established, or the second start winning opening is passed (entrance) It is sufficient to instruct the payout of the winning ball corresponding to the detection of the gaming ball, or to perform a predetermined setting including one or both of them.

  As shown in FIG. 2, an effect control microcomputer 120 is mounted on the effect control board 12. The effect control board 12 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) 121 that generates image data in response to a drawing command from the effect control microcomputer 120, the image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. An effect data memory 122 for storing various data used for controlling the effect operation by the effect device such as a light emitter is also mounted. The effect control microcomputer 120 is a one-chip microcomputer having the same configuration as the game control microcomputer 100, for example, and includes an external bus interface, a clock circuit, a unique information storage circuit, a reset / interrupt controller, a CPU, a ROM, and a RAM. , CTC, random number circuit, PIP, serial communication circuit, address decoding circuit, and the like. Further, all or part of the configuration of the effect control microcomputer 120 may be different from the configuration of the game control microcomputer 100. As an example, in the case where all the numerical data serving as random number values used on the side of the effect control board 12 are updated by software, the effect control microcomputer 120 may not include the random number circuit. Further, the serial communication circuit only needs to be provided with a receiving circuit capable of receiving at least an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and data and commands for the image display device 5, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14 are provided. Signal transmission may be performed using an external bus interface or an address decoding circuit.

  In the effect control microcomputer 120, the CPU executes the effect control program read from the ROM, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electrical component (effect device). At this time, a fixed data reading operation in which the CPU reads fixed data from the ROM, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU writes various fluctuation data in the RAM and temporarily stores the data, and various fluctuation data in which the CPU is temporarily stored in the RAM. Fluctuating data reading operation for reading out, receiving operation for receiving various signals input from the outside of the production control microcomputer 120 via the external bus interface, PIP, serial communication circuit, etc., CPU for external bus interface, serial communication circuit, etc. A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control microcomputer 120 is also performed. It should be noted that the one-chip microcomputer constituting the production control microcomputer 120 only needs to incorporate a RAM in addition to at least the CPU, and the ROM, random number circuit, PIP, and the like are incorporated even if they are externally attached. May be used. A control signal, which is an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 18, is supplied to a predetermined serial reception terminal provided in the effect control microcomputer 120, and the serial signal built in the effect control microcomputer 120. What is necessary is just to receive in a communication circuit. Or the control signal used as an effect control command may be transmitted / received in parallel in a direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via a plurality of signal lines (for example, eight effect control signal lines). .

  The ROM of the effect control microcomputer 120 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation in addition to the effect control program. For example, the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 120 includes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU of the effect control microcomputer 120 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting the determination table, various data The pattern data constituting the effect control pattern is stored.

  As an example, in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 120, the CPU of the effect control microcomputer 120 has various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED, the effect LED). An effect control pattern table storing a plurality of types of effect control patterns used for controlling the effect operation by an accessory etc. is stored. The effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect control pattern table only needs to store, for example, an effect control pattern at the time of special figure fluctuation and various effect control patterns.

  The special-control variation production control pattern corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns in the period from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special-sign game until the finalized special symbol that is the special-sign display result is derived and displayed. It is composed of data indicating control contents of various effect operations such as a variable display operation of decorative symbols, an effect display operation in a reach effect, or various effect display operations not accompanied by a variable display of decorative symbols. The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 36 (A) shows configuration examples of various effect control patterns. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 36A, the effect control pattern is derived from process data including, for example, an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and an end code. It is configured.

  The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with an effect control process timer value that is a stored value of an effect control process timer provided in the RAM of the effect control microcomputer 120, for example. A determination value corresponding to the execution time (production time) of the production operation is set in advance. In place of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11, or a predetermined process is performed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the CPU of the effect control microcomputer 120. Data indicating the switching timing of the effect control or the like may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content such as being executed.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The voice control data includes data indicating the voice output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data indicating the output mode of sound effects in conjunction with the variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol, for example. Yes. That is, the audio control data is data that designates an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data includes data indicating the lighting operation mode of the light emitter, such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED. That is, the lamp control data is data for designating the lighting operation of the light emitter. The operation detection control data is, for example, an operation valid period for effectively detecting a player's instruction operation (for example, a pressing operation) with respect to an operation button, or data for designating control contents of a rendering operation when effectively detected. Data indicating a presentation operation mode using a button (which may include a stick controller) is included.

  Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern configured to include a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be. Further, in the plural types of process data included in the effect control pattern, the types of control data constituting each process data may be different according to the contents of the effect operation executed at each timing. That is, there may be process data configured to include all of the display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and operation detection control data, or process data configured to include a part of these. Furthermore, other various control data such as, for example, effect model control data indicating an operation mode in the movable member provided in the effect accessory may be included.

  FIG. 36B shows various rendering operations that are executed according to the contents of the rendering control pattern. The CPU of the effect control microcomputer 120 determines the control content of the effect operation according to various control data included in the effect control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches one of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative design is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display effect images such as images and background images in the display area of the image display device 5. In addition, control is performed to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner specified by the sound control data, and control is performed to flash a light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp control data. Control for receiving the operation on the operation button or the like in the operation valid period specified by the detection control data and determining the content of the effect is performed. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to a production component that does not become a control target even though it corresponds to the production control process timer determination value.

  In the effect control microcomputer 120, for example, when starting variable display of decorative symbols, the CPU sets the effect control pattern based on the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command. Here, when setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 120 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM. It is also possible to temporarily store the storage address of the pattern data constituting the effect control pattern to be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM and designate the reading position of the storage data in the ROM. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer judgment values. If they match, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data Control. Thus, in the effect control microcomputer 120, according to the contents of process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern, the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game) The control of the light emitter such as the effect lamp 9 is advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n are provided. Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n indicate the control content of the rendering operation in the rendering device and specify the execution of the rendering control. Control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n are configured.

  The VDP 121 has an image data processing function such as a high-speed drawing function and a moving image decoding function for displaying various images in the display area of the image display device 5, and an image according to a display control command from the effect control microcomputer 120. An image processor that executes data processing. Note that the VDP 121 may be a graphics processing unit (GPU), a graphics controller LSI (GCL), or a microprocessor for image processing, more commonly referred to as a digital signal processor (DSP). The effect data memory 122 may be configured using a non-volatile recording medium such as a semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, a magnetic memory, or an optical memory.

  On the voice control board 13, for example, an input / output driver, a voice synthesis IC, a voice data ROM, an amplifier circuit, a volume, and the like are mounted. As an example, in the voice control board 13, the sound number data indicated in the sound effect signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input / output driver. The voice synthesis IC generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume to the speakers 8L and 8R. The voice data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data, and the voice synthesis IC reads out the control data corresponding to the sound number data to generate voice and sound effects. The data stored in the audio data ROM may be composed of data indicating the output mode of audio and sound effects in a predetermined period in time series.

  For example, an input / output driver and a lamp driver are mounted on the lamp control board 14. As an example, in the lamp control board 14, the electrical decoration signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the lamp driver via the input / output driver. The lamp driver amplifies the electric decoration signal and supplies it to the game effect lamp 9 and the like.

  On the payout control board 15, a payout control microcomputer 150, a switch circuit 151, and the like are mounted. The switch circuit 151 receives detection signals from various switches and sensors, such as the full tank switch 26, the ball-out switch 27, the payout motor position sensor 71, the payout count switch 72, and the error release switch 73. The switch circuit 151 takes these detection signals and transmits them to the payout control microcomputer 150. The payout control microcomputer 150 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer similar to the game control microcomputer 100, and includes an external bus interface, a clock circuit, a specific information storage circuit, a reset / interrupt controller, a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, a CTC, A random number circuit, PIP, serial communication circuit, address decoding circuit, and the like may be provided. Further, all or part of the configuration of the payout control microcomputer 150 may be different from the configuration of the game control microcomputer 100. As an example, when numerical data that is a random number value is not used on the payout control board 15 side, the payout control microcomputer 150 may not include a random number circuit. Further, in the serial communication circuit, it is only necessary to provide at least one transmission / reception circuit capable of bidirectional serial communication with the main board 11, and data for the payout motor 51, the error display LED 74, and the launch control board 17. The command signal may be transmitted using an external bus interface or an address decoding circuit.

  In the payout control microcomputer 150, the CPU executes a payout control program read from the ROM, thereby executing processing for controlling the payout operation by the payout device including the payout motor 51 and the like. At this time, a fixed data reading operation in which the CPU reads fixed data from the ROM, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU writes various fluctuation data in the RAM and temporarily stores the data, and various fluctuation data in which the CPU is temporarily stored in the RAM. Data reading operation for reading out, receiving operation for receiving various signals input from the outside of the payout control microcomputer 150 via the external bus interface, PIP, serial communication circuit, etc., CPU for external bus interface, serial communication circuit, etc. A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the payout control microcomputer 150 is also performed. It should be noted that the one-chip microcomputer constituting the payout control microcomputer 150 may include at least RAM in addition to the CPU, and ROM, PIP, and the like may be externally attached or incorporated. Good.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when the power supply from the power supply board 10 is started and the reset signal to the game control microcomputer 100 becomes high level (off state), the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, Based on the security check program 506A read from the ROM 506 by the CPU 505, a security check process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. At this time, the game control microcomputer 100 is in the security mode, and the game control user program stored in the ROM 506 is not yet executed.

  When the security check process shown in FIG. 37 is started, the CPU 505 first executes a process for determining a time (security time) in which the game control microcomputer 100 is in the security mode by executing the security check process. . At this time, the CPU 505 reads the bit value in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES stored in the program management area of the ROM 506 (step S1). Then, it is determined whether or not the read value is “000” (step S2).

  If it is determined in step S2 that the read value is “000” (step S2; Yes), the steady set time is set to a predetermined fixed time (step S3). Here, the regular setting time is constant regardless of the number of times of security check processing based on the occurrence of a system reset in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the number of times that the gaming control microcomputer 100 enters the security mode). Is a time component. The fixed time is an invariant time component that is predetermined based on the specifications of the game control microcomputer 100 in the security time, and may be any minimum value that can be set as the security time, for example.

  If it is determined in step S2 that the read value is other than “000” (step S2; No), it is selected according to the set value shown in FIG. 11D in addition to the fixed time corresponding to the read value. The extended time is set to the steady set time (step S4). In this way, when the bit value in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES is a value other than “000”, the security time as the execution time of the security check process can be selected in advance in addition to the fixed time. It can be set to any one of a plurality of extension times.

  After executing one of the processes of steps S3 and S4, the bit value in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES is read (step S5). Then, it is determined whether or not the read value is “00” (step S6).

  When it is determined in step S6 that the read value is “00” (step S6; Yes), the steady setting time is set as the security time (step S7). On the other hand, if it is determined that the read value is other than “00” (step S6; No), the variable setting time determined in accordance with the read value is added to the steady setting time to obtain the security time. (Step S8). Here, the variable setting time is a time component that changes every time the security check process is executed, and the bit value in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES is “01” (short). Mode) or “10” (long mode), and changes in different predetermined time ranges. For example, when a count value in a predetermined free-run counter is stored in a variable security time register built in the game control microcomputer 100 when a system reset occurs, in the process of step S8, for the variable security time By using the stored value of the register as it is or by using the value obtained by substituting the stored value for a predetermined arithmetic function (for example, hash function) It may be determined so as to change randomly. Thus, when the bit value in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES is a value other than “00”, the security time that is the execution time of the security check process is set as the security based on the occurrence of the system reset or the like. Each time the check process is executed, it can be changed within a predetermined time range.

  Here, the bit value in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES is a value other than “000”, and the bit value in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES is other than “00”. In this case, both the extension time set in step S4 and the variable setting time set in step S8 are added to the fixed time, and the security time is determined. .

  After executing one of the processes in steps S7 and S8, the security code stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 is read (step S9). Here, in a predetermined area of the ROM 506, a security code of a calculation result obtained by calculating the data of the stored content by a predetermined calculation formula is stored in advance. As a security code generation method, for example, a hash value is generated using a hash function, an error detection code (CRC code) is used, or an error correction code (ECC code) is used. A generation method may be used. In a predetermined area different from the security code storage area of the ROM 506, an arithmetic expression for specifying the security code by calculation is encrypted and stored in advance.

  Following the processing in step S9, the encrypted arithmetic expression is decrypted and restored (step S10). Thereafter, the storage code in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 is calculated by the arithmetic expression decrypted in step S10 to specify the security code (step S11). At this time, the storage data used for the calculation for specifying the security code is, for example, program data corresponding to all or part of the user program different from the security check program 506A among the storage data of the ROM 506, or predetermined table data May be all or a part of the fixed data constituting the. Then, the security code read in step S9 is compared with the security code specified in step S11 (step S12). At this time, it is determined whether or not the security codes match in the comparison result (step S13).

  If the security codes do not match in step S13 (step S13; No), it is determined that an unauthorized change has been made to the ROM 506, and the operation of the CPU 505 is shifted to a halt state (HALT). On the other hand, if the security codes match in step S13 (step S13; Yes), it is determined whether or not the security time set in the processing of step S7 or step S8 has elapsed (step S14). . If the security time has not elapsed (step S14; No), the process of step S14 is repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the security time has elapsed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S14 that the security time has elapsed (step S14; Yes), for example, the value of the program counter built in the CPU 505 is set to the start address (address 0000H) of the user program in the ROM 506. The execution of the game control main process is started by setting or the like. At this time, the execution of the game control is started from the beginning of the control code constituting the user program stored in the ROM 506, so that the operation state of the game control microcomputer 100 shifts from the security mode to the user mode, Execution of the control main process is started.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process executed by the CPU 505 of the game control microcomputer 100. Each process described below is executed by the CPU 505 provided in the game control microcomputer 100. An interrupt request based on various interrupt factors generated by the CTC 508, the random number circuit 509, the serial communication circuit 511, etc. provided in the game control microcomputer 100 is for causing the CPU 505 to execute predetermined interrupt processing. The concept including the CPU 505 and various circuits other than the CPU 505 is sometimes referred to as a game control microcomputer 100.

  When the game control main process shown in FIG. 38 is started, the CPU 505 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S21) and sets the interrupt mode (step S22). For example, in step S22, the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) of the game control microcomputer 100 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: the least significant bit is “0”) output from the built-in device are synthesized. As a result, the interrupt mode [2] of the maskable interrupt in which the interrupt address is generated is set. When an interrupt that can be masked occurs, the CPU 505 performs a setting for automatically disabling the interrupt, and the contents of the program counter may be saved in the stack.

  Subsequently, settings relating to the stack pointer, such as setting of a stack pointer designation address, are performed (step S23). Further, the internal register is set (initialized) as shown in FIG. 8B (step S24). As an example, in the process of step S24, the operation setting in the serial communication circuit 511 may be performed by setting the first channel communication setting register SAFM, the second channel communication setting register SBFM, and the like. Subsequent to step S24, the CTC 508 and PIP 510 are set (step S25). After the process of step S25 is executed, it may be determined whether or not the power-off signal is in an off state, for example, by checking a terminal state at a predetermined input port included in the PIP 510.

  Thereafter, the RAM 507 is set to be accessible (step S26). Subsequently, based on the signal state of the switch signal (clear signal) transmitted from the clear switch 304 installed on the power supply board 10, it is determined whether the clear switch 304 is turned on (step S27). In the process of step S27, the clear signal transmitted from the clear switch 304 may be checked a plurality of times, and it may be determined that the clear switch 304 has been turned on when the clear signal is continuously turned on. For example, once it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is off, the state of the clear signal is confirmed once again after a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed. At this time, if the clear signal is off, it is determined that the clear signal is off. On the other hand, if the state of the clear signal is on at this time, the state of the clear signal may be confirmed again after a predetermined time has elapsed. Note that the number of times of reconfirming the state of the clear signal may be one time or may be a plurality of times. Further, it is possible to check twice and check again when the check results do not match.

  When the clear switch 304 is OFF in step S27 (step S27; No), it is determined whether or not a backup flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 592 is ON (step S28). The state of the backup flag is set in the game control flag setting unit 592 or the like when power supply to the game control microcomputer 100 is stopped. The backup flag setting location is backed up by the backup power source, so that the state of the backup flag is saved even when the power supply is stopped. In step S28, for example, if “55H” is set in the game control flag setting unit 592 as the value of the backup flag, it is determined that there is a backup (ON state). On the other hand, if a value other than “55H” is set, it is determined that there is no backup (OFF state).

  If the backup flag is on in step S28 (step S28; Yes), data check of the RAM 507 is performed to determine whether the check result is normal (step S29). In the process of step S29, for example, a checksum is calculated using data stored in a specific area of the RAM 507, and the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum stored in the main checksum buffer. Here, the main checksum buffer stores a checksum calculated by the same processing when the power supply was stopped last time. If the comparison results do not match, the data in the specific area of the RAM 507 is different from the data at the time of stopping the power supply, and therefore it is determined that the check result is not normal.

  When the check result in step S29 is normal (step S29; Yes), for example, the control state of the main board 11 such as the internal state of the game control microcomputer 100 or the sub-side control board (for example, the effect control board 12). A setting at the time of restoration for returning the control state to the state when the power supply is stopped is performed, and the gaming state before the power interruption is restored (step S30). As a specific example, in the process of step S30, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 506 is set as a pointer, and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area in the RAM 507. Here, the work area of the RAM 507 is backed up by a backup power source, and initialization data for an area that may be initialized among the work areas may be set in the backup time setting table.

  When the clear switch 304 is on in step S27 (step S27; Yes), the backup flag is off in step S28 (step S28; No), or the check result is not normal in step S29. Sometimes (step S29; No), initialization processing corresponding to power-on or system reset that is not during a power failure recovery is executed. In this initialization process, the RAM 507 is cleared (initialized) (step S31), and a work area to be a work area is set (step S32). In the process of step S31, predetermined data (for example, stored data in a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 594) may be set to an arbitrary value or a predetermined initial value. Further, the entire area of the RAM 507 may be initialized, or a part of the area may be initialized while the predetermined data is left as it is. When the process of step S31 is executed, the operation state of the random number circuit 509 may be initialized. The initial value may be set in the game control flag setting unit 592, the game control timer setting unit 593, the game control counter setting unit 594, the game control buffer setting unit 595, and the like by the process of step S <b> 32. At this time, a control command (initialization designation command) for initializing each sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 may be transmitted. For example, the presentation control board 12 displays an image for notifying that the control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initialized in the display area of the image display device 5 in response to receiving the initialization designation command. It suffices if initialization notification is executed.

  After the game state before the power interruption is restored in step S30, or after the processing of step S32 is executed, various circuits built in the game control microcomputer 100 are stored based on the stored data in the program management area of the ROM 506. Operation setting is performed (step S33). As an example, in the process of step S33, the first random number initial setting KRS1 and the second random number initial setting KRS2 stored in the program management area are read, and the random number circuit setting process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 39 is executed. The Note that the process of step S33 may be executed when the process of step S24 or the process of step S25 is executed.

  In the random number circuit setting process shown in FIG. 39, the CPU 505 first makes settings for using the random number circuit 509 based on the bit value in the bit number [3] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 (step S51). In this embodiment, the bit value in the bit number [3] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is set to “1” in advance, and setting to use the random number circuit 509 is performed corresponding to this bit value. Subsequently, the random number update clock RGK in the random number circuit 509 is set based on the bit value in the bit number [2] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 (step S52). For example, in response to the bit value [2] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 being set to “1” in advance, the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 112 is divided by two. As a result, the random number update clock RGK is set.

  After the setting in step S52, the random number update rule is set in the random number circuit 509 based on the bit value in the bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 (step S53). For example, when the bit value in the bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is set to “00” in advance, the random number update designating the update order of the numerical data that becomes the random value in the random number sequence RSN The rule is set so as not to change after the second round. If the bit value in the bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is set to “01” in advance, the random number update rule in the random number sequence RSN is set to be changed by software after the second round. Is made. Further, when the bit value [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is set to “10” in advance, the random number update rule in the random number sequence RSN is automatically changed after the second round. Is made.

  Subsequently, based on the bit value in the bit number [1] of the second random number initial setting KRS2, the start value at the start of the numerical data that becomes the random value is determined (step S54). For example, when the bit value [1] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is set to “0” in advance, the random value start value is set to the default value “0000H”. Further, when the bit value [1] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is set to “1” in advance, the random number start value is set to a value based on the ID number.

  Further, based on the bit value in the bit number [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2, it is set whether or not to change the start value of the numerical data serving as the random value every time the system is reset (step S55). For example, when the bit value [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is set to “0” in advance, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated when the power is initially turned on (activation after backup is disabled). Regardless of whether the system is reset due to system reset, the start value set in step S54 may be used as it is as the start value in the random number circuit 509. In addition, when the bit value in the bit number [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is set to “1” in advance, a setting for changing the start value of the random number at every system reset is made. For example, when a count value in a predetermined free-run counter such as the free-run counter 554A is stored in a random number start value register built in the game control microcomputer 100 at a predetermined timing such as when a system reset occurs. In the process of step S55, a random number is used by using the stored value of the random number start value register as it is or by using a value obtained by substituting the stored value into a predetermined arithmetic function (for example, a hash function). Is determined so as to change randomly within a predetermined numerical range (for example, a range including all or part of the numerical data included in the count value permutation RCN generated by the random number generation circuit 553) at each system reset. Just do it.

  After executing the processing of step S55, the bit number [1] or bit number [0] of the random number latch flag register RDFM is read by reading the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D, for example. The bit values of the random number latch flag data RDFM1 and the random number latch flag data RDFM0 stored in are set to “0”, and each random number latch flag is cleared to an off state (step S56). As an example, for the random number latch flag data RDFM1 and the random number latch flag data RDFM0, it is determined whether each value is “1” or “0”, and if the value is “1”, the corresponding random value The random number latch flag may be turned off by reading the register. Alternatively, each random number latch flag may be turned off by reading the random number value register R1D and the random number value register R2D regardless of the values of the random number latch flag data RDFM1 and the random number latch flag data RDFM0. Note that the numerical data read from the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D in the process of step S56 is used for determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state with the special figure display result as “big hit”. It can be discarded (erased) as it is. When the setting by the processing in step S56 is completed, the random number circuit 509 may start the random value generation operation.

  Note that part or all of the setting by the random number circuit setting process may be autonomously performed by the random number circuit 509 based on the stored data in the program management area without the processing of the CPU 505 being involved. In this case, when the game control microcomputer 100 is in the security mode, the random number circuit 509 may not perform the initial setting and may not perform the random value generation operation. Then, when the CPU 505 reads out the user program stored in the ROM 506 in the game control microcomputer 100 and the execution of the game control main process is started, the CPU 505 instructs the random number circuit 509 to perform initial setting, for example. In response to the signal being transmitted, the random number circuit 509 may perform the initial setting and then start the random value generation operation. Alternatively, particularly when the random number circuit 509 is externally attached to the game control microcomputer 100, the random number circuit 509 is independent of the processing in the CPU 505 even when the game control microcomputer 100 is in the security mode. Thus, the random number generation operation may be started after the initial setting based on the stored data in the program management area. Further, the process of step S33 shown in FIG. 38 includes a process of reading the interrupt initial setting KIIS stored in the program management area and setting the priority control of the maskable interrupt factor in the reset / interrupt controller 504. May be. When setting the priority order of the maskable interrupt factor, the highest priority interrupt is set according to the bit value in the bit number [3-0] of the interrupt initial setting KIIS. For example, by setting the bit value [3-0] of the interrupt initial setting KIIS to “04H” or “05H” in advance, the interrupt processing due to the interrupt factor generated in the serial communication circuit 511 has the highest priority. Can be executed. Thus, by performing priority control of maskable interrupt factors according to the bit value in bit number [3-0] of interrupt initial setting KIIS, the priority order of interrupt processing can be arbitrarily set, and the degree of freedom of design is increased. be able to.

  After the setting in step S33, random number circuit abnormality inspection processing for inspecting the presence or absence of operation abnormality in the random number circuit 509 is executed (step S34). FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the random number circuit abnormality inspection process executed in step S34.

  In the random number circuit abnormality inspection process shown in FIG. 40, the CPU 505 first clears the random number clock abnormality determination counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 594, for example, and the random number clock abnormality determination count that is the count value. The value is initialized to “0” (step S61). Subsequently, the internal information data CIF4 stored in the bit number [4] of the internal information register CIF is read (step S62). Then, it is determined whether or not the read value in step S62 is “1” (step S63). The frequency monitoring circuit 551 provided in the random number circuit 509 compares the input state of the random number clock RCLK at the random number external clock terminal ERC with the internal system clock SCLK. When a frequency abnormality corresponding to the set content as shown in FIG. 11B is detected in the input state of the random number clock RCLK, the bit value “1” is written as the internal information data CIF4.

  Therefore, when it is determined in step S63 that the read value is “1” (step S63; Yes), the random number clock abnormality determination count value is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S64). At this time, it is determined whether or not the count value after the update in step S64 has reached a predetermined clock abnormality determination value (step S65). Here, the clock abnormality determination value may be a numerical value determined in advance in order to determine that the clock abnormality is detected when the frequency monitoring circuit 551 continuously detects the frequency abnormality of the random number clock RCLK. If the clock abnormality determination value has not been reached in step S65, the process returns to step S62, and determination based on the bit value of the internal information data CIF4 is performed again.

  When the clock abnormality determination value is reached in step S65 (step S65; Yes), a predetermined random number clock error process is executed (step S66), and the random circuit abnormality inspection process is terminated. In the random number clock error process, for example, a setting for transmitting a predetermined effect control command to the effect control board 12 is performed, and the effect device detects that a frequency abnormality of the random number clock RCLK has been detected. In addition, the processing may not be continued until a predetermined error canceling procedure (for example, system reset, error canceling switch operation, etc.) is taken, or at the end of random number clock error processing After the random number circuit abnormality inspection process is finished, the game control or the like that is almost the same as the normal time when the random number clock error process is not executed may be executed. Here, when the game control or the like is executed after executing the random number clock error process in step S66, the error occurrence state corresponding to the execution of the random number clock error process is stored, for example, An effect control command for notifying the frequency abnormality of the random number clock RCLK may be transmitted based on the processing in step S195 shown in FIG. Further, the operation of the CPU 505 may be shifted to the halt state (HALT) without executing the random number clock error process.

  When the read value is determined to be “0” in step S63 (step S63; No), for example, the random value abnormality determination counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 594 or the like is cleared, and the count value is used. A certain random value abnormality determination count value is initialized to “0” (step S67). In the process of step S63, the read value is “0” when the bit value of the internal information data CIF4 read in step S62 is continuously “0” a plurality of times (for example, twice). May be determined.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S67, the check value used for checking whether there is an abnormality in the random number value is set to an initial value “0000H” (step S68). Then, the stored numerical data as the random value is read from the random value register 559A as the random value register R1D and the random value register 559B as the random value register R2D provided in the random number circuit 509 (step S69). For example, in the process of step S69, the bit values of the random number latch selection data RDLS1 and the random number latch selection data RDLS0 stored in the bit number [1] and the bit number [0] of the random number latch selection register RDLS are set to “0”. Specifies fetching random values by. Subsequently, the bit values of the random number acquisition specification data RDLT1 and the random value acquisition specification data RDLT0 stored in the bit number [1] and the bit number [0] of the random value acquisition specification register RDLT are set to “1”. Specifying loading into the random value register R2D or the random value register R1D. Note that setting the bit value in the bit number [1] or bit number [0] of the random number fetch specification register RDLT to “1” instructs the CPU 505 to fetch (latch) numerical data to the random number circuit 509. This corresponds to outputting a latch signal. After that, by turning on the register read signal RRS2 supplied to the random value register R2D or turning on the register read signal RRS1 supplied to the random value register R1D, the numerical data that becomes the stored random value May be read out. Note that the numerical data stored in each of the random value register R2D and the random value register R1D may be read simultaneously to check whether there is an abnormality in the random number value, or after checking whether there is an abnormality in one of the registers. The other register may be checked for abnormality.

  After reading the numerical data in step S69, the read value is set as a random number inspection reference value (step S70). Subsequently, numerical data that becomes a random value is read from the random value register 559A and the random value register 559B (step S71). Note that the read operation in step S71 may be performed in the same procedure as the read operation in step S69. In addition, a sufficient delay time may be provided between the read operation in step S69 and the read operation in step S71 so that the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN generated by the random number circuit 509 changes. After reading the numerical data in step S71, an exclusive OR operation is performed on the random number inspection reference value and the read value in step S71 (step S72). Further, a logical sum operation between the calculation result in step S72 and the check value is executed, and the calculation result is updated to be a new check value (step S73). For example, the check value may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 507, and each time the process of step S73 is executed, the calculation result obtained by the process may be saved as a new check value. As a result, changes in all the bits in the numerical data read from the random value register 559A and the random value register 559B are recorded, and if the bit has changed at least once during a plurality of times of reading, it corresponds in the check value. The bit value is “1”.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the check value is “FFFFH” (step S74). If it is (step S74; Yes), since the change of the bit value is recognized for all bits, the random number value is normal. It is determined that the update has been made, and the random number circuit abnormality inspection process is terminated. When it is confirmed that the random number value has been updated normally, the random number latch selection data RDLS1 and the random number latch selection stored in the bit number [1] and the bit number [0] of the random number latch selection register RDLS are selected. The bit value of the data RDLS0 is set to “1”, the random value is taken into the random value register R2D according to the signal input to the input port P1, and the random value register R1D according to the signal input to the input port P0 You may make it instruct | indicate numerical value acquisition. In this embodiment, a wiring for transmitting the first start winning signal SS1 from the first start port switch 22A is connected to the input port P0, and the second start winning signal SS2 from the second start port switch 22B is connected to the input port P1. Are connected. Thereby, when the first start winning signal SS1 is turned on, the random number value is taken into the random value register R1D, while when the second starting winning signal SS2 is turned on, the random value register R2D is entered. It is possible to take in random values.

  When it is determined in step S74 that the check value is other than “FFFFH” (step S74; No), the random number abnormality determination count value is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S75). At this time, it is determined whether or not the count value after the update in step S75 has reached a predetermined random value abnormality determination value (step S76). Here, the random value abnormality determination value is determined so that all bits of the numerical data read from the random value register 559A and the random value register 559B change at least once if the random number circuit 509 is operating normally. It may be a predetermined numerical value so as to be the number of times. If the random number abnormality determination value has not been reached in step S76, the process returns to step S71, and determination for reading numerical data as a random value from the random number circuit 509 and checking for abnormality is performed.

  If the random number abnormality determination value is reached in step S76 (step S76; Yes), a predetermined random value error time process is executed (step S77), and the random number circuit abnormality inspection process is terminated. In the random value error process, for example, a setting for transmitting a predetermined effect control command to the effect control board 12 is performed to notify that an abnormality in the random value is detected by the effect device. Until the error release procedure (for example, system reset, error release switch operation, etc.) is taken, the subsequent processing may not proceed, or the random number circuit error check processing will be performed at the end of the random number error processing. After that, game control or the like that is almost the same as the normal time when the random number error process is not executed may be executed. Here, when the game control or the like is executed after executing the random value error process in step S77, an error occurrence state corresponding to the execution of the random value error process is stored, for example, as will be described later. When a customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted based on the processing of step S240 shown in FIG. 43, a customer waiting demo designation command for notifying the occurrence state of the error may be transmitted. Further, the operation of the CPU 505 may be shifted to the stopped state (HALT) without executing the random value error process.

  As described above, in the random number circuit abnormality inspection process, for example, the numerical data stored in the random number value register R1D (559A) or the random number value register R2D (559B) of the random number circuit 509 is obtained by repeatedly executing the process of step S71. Read multiple times. Then, all the bits of the numerical data read out by executing the processing of step S72 to step S74 are monitored, and an abnormality occurs in the operation state of the random number circuit 509 in step S76 based on the presence or absence of bit data that does not change. Determine whether or not. As a result, it is possible to reliably and easily detect that an abnormality has occurred in the operating state of the random number circuit 509 and prevent fraud.

  The random number circuit abnormality inspection process in step S34 is not limited to that executed by the CPU 505, and the random number circuit abnormality inspection process may be executed by a built-in circuit in the game control microcomputer 100 other than the CPU 505. As an example, the random number circuit 509 has a function of executing a random number circuit abnormality inspection process. When a frequency abnormality of the random number clock RCLK is detected or when an abnormality of the random number value is detected, the CPU 505 May be notified. The random number circuit abnormality inspection process is not limited to the process executed only in step S34. For example, every time a timer interrupt occurs in the game control microcomputer 100, a game control timer interrupt process (see FIG. 41), part or all of the random number circuit abnormality inspection process may be executed. That is, the random number circuit abnormality inspection process in step S34 may be executed after the process in step S35 shown in FIG. 38 is executed. As an example, when the random number circuit abnormality inspection process is executed in the game control timer interrupt process, for example, the process of step S61 to step S66 shown in FIG. 40 is executed, while the process of step S67 to step S77 is executed. It may not be executed. The processing of step S67 to step S77 may take a long processing time, for example, to repeatedly execute the processing of step S69 and repeatedly read numerical data from the random number circuit 509. May occur. Therefore, in this case, by executing only the processing of step S61 to step S66, the processing amount in the game control timer interrupt processing can be reduced, and the occurrence of processing failure can be prevented.

  After executing the random number circuit abnormality inspection process as described above in step S34 shown in FIG. 38, the interrupt permission state is set (step S35), and the generation of various interrupt requests is awaited. After executing the process of step S35, for example, based on the setting of the CTC 508 in step S25, a timer interrupt for game control may be generated every 2 ms (milliseconds). After executing the process of step S35, the game random number update process is repeatedly executed (step S36).

  Before executing the process of step S35, it is determined whether or not the game start switch 31 is turned on based on the signal state of the switch signal transmitted from the game start switch 31 installed on the main board 11. You may make it do. In this case, the switch signal transmitted from the game start switch 35 may be checked a plurality of times, and it may be determined that the game start switch 31 has been turned on when the switch signal is continuously turned on. In addition, the process of checking the on operation of the game start switch 31 is executed only when starting from an initial state without recovery (cold start), for example, when the processes of steps S31 and S32 are executed. For example, a game control timer interrupt process is performed regardless of the operation of the game start switch 31 at the time of starting to restore the gaming state before power interruption (at the time of hot start), for example, when the process of step S30 is executed. You may make it progress to the process which controls progress of a game. Here, in the RAM 507 provided in the game control microcomputer 100, when an area to be a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 594 is backed up by a backup power source, if it is a hot start, before power interruption Since the update of numerical data serving as a random value is started using the stored data in the random counter, it is difficult to specify the random value stored in the random counter from the operation start timing of the pachinko gaming machine 1. On the other hand, at the time of cold start, for example, the random counter is cleared (initialized) in the process of step S31, so that update of the random number value is started from a certain initial value (for example, “0”, etc.) There is a possibility that the random value stored in the random counter is specified from the operation start timing of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Therefore, at a cold start, the game start switch 31 is kept waiting until it is turned on, so that it is difficult to specify the random value stored in the random counter from the operation start timing of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a result, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by connecting a so-called “hanging board” particularly when the random number value for jackpot determination (for example, the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination) is updated only by software. Even if an illegal signal is input at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing, an illegal big hit gaming state can be prevented. Further, when it is determined that the game start switch 31 is not turned on, a game random number update process may be executed to update the random number value stored in the random counter by software. Accordingly, in addition to the elapsed time from the timing when the game start switch 31 is turned on, the elapsed time from the operation start timing of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to when the game start switch 31 is turned on cannot be specified. Even at cold start, it becomes difficult to specify the random value stored in the random counter, and it is possible to reliably prevent actions such as illegally generating a big hit gaming state by aiming or inputting illegal signals it can.

  After entering the interrupt enabled state by executing the processing of step S35 in this manner, for example, when a plurality of maskable interrupt factors occur simultaneously in part or all of the CTC 508, random number circuit 509, serial communication circuit 511, etc. Based on the designation by the bit value in the bit number [3-0] of the initial setting KIIS, the reset / interrupt controller 504 accepts an interrupt factor having a high priority. When the reset / interrupt controller 504 receives an interrupt factor, for example, an interrupt request signal in an on state is output to an I class interrupt (IRQ) terminal provided in the CPU 505. When an on-state interrupt request signal is input to the IRQ terminal by the CPU 505, the generated interrupt factor is identified based on, for example, the result of checking the data stored in the internal register, and the vector address corresponding to the identified interrupt factor By executing the program having the first address as the interrupt address, interrupt processing based on each interrupt factor can be started.

  If any of the four types of errors such as an overrun error, break code error, framing error, and parity error occurs during reception of communication data by the first channel transmission / reception circuit included in the serial communication circuit 511, the first A channel receive interrupt occurs. At this time, the CPU 505 may execute a predetermined serial communication error interrupt process. In this serial communication error interrupt processing, for example, the bit values corresponding to the predetermined bit number in the predetermined first channel communication setting register and the predetermined bit number in the second channel communication setting register are both set to “0”. For example, the transmission function and the reception function in the serial communication circuit 511 may be set not to be used. Here, the first channel communication setting register and the second channel communication setting register may be included in the built-in registers of the game control microcomputer 100. Further, when an error occurs during reception of communication data by the first channel transmission / reception circuit, control may be performed to prohibit the payout of game balls by the payout device including the payout motor 51. Thereby, when an abnormality such as a reception error of communication data occurs, it is possible to prevent an excessive payout of game balls that are prize balls.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, for example, the CPU 505 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. In the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 41, the CPU 505 first executes the predetermined power-off process after setting the interrupt disabled state (step S91). Further, by executing a predetermined switch process, the state of the detection signal (winning detection signal) input from each switch 21, 22A, 22B, 23, etc. for detecting the game ball via the switch circuit 114 is determined ( Step S92).

  Subsequent to the switch process in step S92, a predetermined main-side error process is executed to perform an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S93). . For example, in the main-side error processing, settings for notifying the occurrence of an abnormal operation may be performed in response to excessive prize balls, insufficient prize balls, or other operation errors. After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step) S94).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed (step S95). Thereafter, the CPU 505 executes special symbol process processing (step S96). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 592 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of the display operation in the display device 4B and setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S97). The CPU 505 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, thereby allowing the normal symbol variable display and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B to move. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade. After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 505 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls according to the input of the winning detection signal based on the execution result of the switch process in step S92, for example (step S98). ). Subsequent to the prize ball process, the main side communication control process is executed, so that a control command is transmitted from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 or the payout control board 15 or the payout control is performed. Communication control for receiving a control command transmitted from the board 15 is performed (step S99).

  As an example, in the main-side communication control process, serial communication corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the storage data of the payout transmission command buffer included in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 595 The payout control command can be transmitted by sending a transmission operation instruction to the first channel transmission / reception circuit included in the circuit 511. Further, the storage contents of the payout reception command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 595 and the like are checked to determine whether or not the reception command is stored. When the reception command is stored, the reception command is read out. The reception command is stored in the payout reception command buffer based on the first channel reception interrupt generated in response to reception of communication data as a payout notification command by the first channel transmission / reception circuit in the serial communication circuit 511. What is necessary is just to be performed by the interrupt process performed. As another example, in the main-side communication control process, the second channel transmission included in the serial communication circuit 511 corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the storage data of the effect transmission command buffer included in the transmission command buffer. The production control command can be transmitted, for example, by sending a transmission operation instruction to the circuit. After executing such a main-side communication control process, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated after the interrupt is permitted.

  In the game random number update processing executed in step S36 of FIG. 38 or step S95 of FIG. 41, the big hit type determination is performed by updating the stored data in a predetermined area of the random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 594, for example. The random value MR2 for use may be incremented by one. As a result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type is updated so as to be incremented by one every time the random number update process for gaming is executed. In the game random number update processing, among the numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR5 that are the game random numbers, the numerical data indicating the random values MR3 to MR5 are sequentially set as the random numbers to be updated. Here, for example, for the random values MR3 to MR5, an addition value, an addition determination value, or a maximum determination value may be determined. As an example, the range of the addition value is set to “0” to “7”, the addition determination value is “8”, and the maximum determination value is “252” corresponding to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. That's fine. Corresponding to the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern, the range of the addition value may be set to “0” to “7”, the addition determination value is “8”, and the maximum determination value is “998”. Corresponding to the random number MR5 for determining the normal display result, the range of the addition value is “0” to “2”, the addition determination value is “3”, the minimum determination value is “3”, and the maximum determination value is “14” As long as it is stipulated.

  The added value is a value to be added to each random number value in response to one timer interruption or the like, and the value only needs to be different every time the game random number update process is executed. For example, the addition value is obtained on the basis of numerical data that becomes a random value for determining the addition value, and an area for storing the addition value as a temporary variable may be provided in the RAM 507 or the like. The addition determination value is a value used to acquire an addition value corresponding to each random value by comparison with a random value for determining the addition value. More specifically, after the random value for determining the addition value is read as the initial value of the addition value corresponding to each random value, until it is determined that the current addition value is smaller than the addition determination value, A value obtained by subtracting the addition determination value from the current addition value is updated as a new addition value. The maximum determination value and the minimum determination value are values used for determining whether each updated random number value is within the range of possible values obtained by adding the finally obtained addition values. For example, when each updated random number value is equal to or greater than the corresponding maximum determination value, a value obtained by subtracting the maximum determination value from the updated random value can be set as a new random value. Further, when the value obtained by subtracting the maximum judgment value from the updated random number value MR5 for determining the normal map display result is less than the corresponding minimum judgment value “3”, the value obtained by adding the minimum judgment value to the updated random number value Can be set as a new random value. For example, the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 may be updated so as to be incremented by one each time a timer interrupt occurs in the game control microcomputer 100.

  In the game random number update process, numerical data indicating a random value for determining an addition value is read, and it is determined whether or not the read value is less than an addition determination value determined for each random value to be updated. If it is less than the addition determination value, the read value is set to the addition value. On the other hand, if it is equal to or greater than the addition determination value, a value obtained by subtracting the addition determination value from the read value is set as the addition value. Thereafter, the addition value is added to the random number value to be updated to obtain a random number value after addition. At this time, it is determined whether the random number value after addition is less than the maximum determination value determined for each random number value to be updated. If it is less than the maximum judgment value, the random number value after addition is set to the updated random number value. On the other hand, if it is equal to or greater than the maximum determination value, a value obtained by subtracting the maximum determination value from the added random number value is set as the updated random number value. Further, for the random value MR5 for determining the normal display result, it is determined whether or not the subtracted value is less than the minimum determination value. If it is equal to or greater than the minimum determination value, the subtracted random value is set as the updated random value. On the other hand, if it is less than the minimum determination value, a value obtained by adding the minimum determination value to the random number value after subtraction is set as the updated random number value. The updated random number value thus set is set in a predetermined area for storing the random number value to be updated by the random counter, thereby completing the update of the random number value.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the process executed in step S91 of FIG. 41 as the power-off process. In this power-off process, the CPU 505 first determines whether or not the power-off signal is in an on state, that is, whether or not the power-off signal is output from the power monitoring circuit 303 mounted on the power board 10. (Step S111). At this time, if the power-off signal is off and the power-off signal is not output (step S112; No), the backup monitoring timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 593 is cleared and the stored value is used. A backup monitoring timer value is set to “0” as an initial value (step S112). On the other hand, when the power-off signal is on and the power-off signal is output (step S111; Yes), the backup monitoring timer value is updated by 1 (step S113). Then, it is determined whether or not the updated backup monitoring timer value in step S113 has reached a predetermined backup determination value (for example, “2” or the like) (step S114). When the backup determination value is not reached in step S114 (step S114; No), the power-off process is terminated.

  When the backup determination value is reached in step S114 (step S114; Yes), the processing after step S115 is executed as a preparation process for responding to the stop of the power supply. When such a preparation process is executed, the state shifts from a state in which the progress of the game is controlled to a state in which a power supply stop process (a power-off control process) for saving the game state is executed. By executing the preparation process only when the backup judgment value is reached in the process of step S114, even if the power supply voltage drops momentarily due to noise or the like and the power-off signal is turned on, the power supply is erroneously stopped. It is possible to prevent the processing from starting.

  In the power supply stop process, a checksum is calculated and stored, for example, in a main checksum buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 595 (step S115). As an example, in the process of step S115, the start address of the predetermined area in the RAM 507 is set as the checksum calculation start address, and the checksum calculation count is set corresponding to the final address of the predetermined area. The predetermined area of the RAM 507 specified by the checksum calculation start address and the address used for setting the checksum calculation count may be a content storage area that is predetermined as a storage area in which the content should be stored even when power supply is stopped. That's fine. Then, the stored data in this content storage area is sequentially read and exclusive OR is calculated. For example, after setting the checksum calculation start address to the pointer, the storage data at the address pointed to by the pointer is read in the RAM 507, and the exclusive OR with the checksum data whose initial value is “00” is calculated. The calculation result is stored as new checksum data. At this time, the pointer value is incremented by 1 and the checksum calculation count is decremented by 1. Subsequently, if the checksum calculation count is a value other than “0”, the stored data at the address pointed to by the pointer is read, and an exclusive OR operation with the checksum data is performed, or the pointer value is set to 1. The process of adding and subtracting 1 from the number of checksum calculations may be repeated until the number of checksum calculations reaches “0”. When the checksum calculation count reaches “0”, each bit value of the checksum data is inverted, and the obtained value is stored in the main checksum buffer and stored. The data stored in the main checksum buffer in this way is used as parity data to be checked when the power is turned on.

  When the checksum data is stored by executing the process of step S115, the backup flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 592 may be set to the on state. Thereafter, access to the RAM 507 is prohibited thereafter, for example, by setting an access prohibition value in a predetermined RAM access register (step S116). When the power supply voltage decreases, the stored contents of the RAM 507 may be erroneously changed due to a runaway operation of the CPU 505 or the like, or signal levels (voltage levels) on various signal lines becoming unstable. There is sex. Therefore, by setting the state in which access to the RAM 507 is prohibited by the processing in step S116, it is possible to prevent erroneous change (damage) of the storage contents in the backup storage area provided in the RAM 507. Further, the CPU 505 performs a clear setting such as setting “00” as clear data to a predetermined output port provided in the game control microcomputer 100 (step S117). Further, the CPU 505 sets the timer interrupt disabled state by setting “00” in the control register of the CTC 508, for example (step S118). Here, the control registers of the CTC 508 may be those included in the built-in registers of the game control microcomputer 100. Note that the clear setting of the output port by the process of step S117 and the setting of the timer interrupt prohibited state by the process of step S118 may be executed before the checksum is calculated by the process of step S115. When the interrupt prohibition state is set when execution of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 41 is started, the setting of the timer interrupt prohibition state by the process of step S118 may not be executed.

  Following the setting in step S118, a loop process for monitoring whether the power-off signal is turned off is entered (step S119). Then, while the power-off signal is in the ON state (step S119; No), the process of step S119 is repeatedly executed and waits. On the other hand, when the power-off signal is turned off in step S119 (step S119; No), a process for clearing the random number latch flag is executed.

  That is, the random number latch flag corresponding to the random value register R1D is turned on according to whether or not the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 stored in the bit number [0] of the random number latch flag register RDFM is “1”. It is determined whether or not there is (step S120). If this random number latch flag is on (step S120; Yes), the random value register R1D is read to clear the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 to “0”, and the corresponding random number latch flag is set. An off state is set (step S121). In addition, when the random number latch flag specified by the random number latch flag data RDFM0 is OFF in step S120 (step S120; No), after executing the process of step S121, the bit number [1 of the random number latch flag register RDFM is set. ], It is determined whether or not the random number latch flag corresponding to the random number value register R2D is on (step S122). At this time, if the random number latch flag is on (step S122; Yes), the random value register R2D is read to clear the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM1 to “0”, and the corresponding random number latch flag is set. An off state is set (step S123). By such processing in step S121 and step S123, the random number latch flag is turned off, and the random number value register R1D and the random number value register R2D can be set to a state where storage of new numerical data is permitted. Note that the numerical data read from the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D by the processing of step S121 or step S123 determines whether or not to control the big hit gaming state with the special figure display result as “big hit”, etc. It can be discarded (erased) as it is without being used. Further, instead of the processing of step S120 to step S123, each random number latch flag is set by reading the random number value register R1D and the random number value register R2D regardless of the values of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 and the random number latch flag data RDFM1. Processing to turn off may be performed.

  When the random number latch flag specified by the random number latch flag data RDFM1 is OFF in Step S122 (Step S122; No), or after performing the process of Step S123, after setting for a predetermined power failure recovery is performed. (Step S124), the process returns to the head of the game control main process. As an example, in the process of step S124, the storage address of the power-off recovery vector table is stored in the stack pointer built in the CPU 505, and the game control timer interrupt process is returned (returned). Here, the power-off recovery vector table only needs to specify the head address of the control code (game control program) stored in the ROM 506. When returning from an interrupt process such as a game control timer interrupt process, the stored data at the address specified by the stack pointer is read as a return address. Thus, after executing the processing of step S124, the CPU 505 can start (restart) the execution of the game control from the top of the control code stored in the ROM 506.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an example of processing executed in step S92 shown in FIG. 41 as the switch processing. In this switch process, the CPU 505 first sets the contents of the previous port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 595 in the previous data buffer (step SA01). In addition, the exclusive OR of the contents of the port buffer and the contents of the previous data buffer is taken twice before (step SA02). Then, the result of the exclusive OR operation is set in the previous data buffer (step SA03). At this stage, in the previous data buffer, a bit having a different value among the 8 bits of the port buffer and the 8 bits of the previous port buffer is “1”. In addition, the contents of the previous port buffer are set in the port buffer two times before (step SA04).

  Then, the stored value of the input port register PI is fetched (step SA05), and the logical product of the fetched value and a predetermined judgment mask value is taken (step SA06). The determination mask value may be a mask value set in advance according to which of the bit values [0] to [7] in the input port register PI is taken as a valid input signal. . As an example, as shown in FIG. 23, the first start winning signal SS1 from the first start port switch 22A is input to the input port P0, and the second start winning signal SS2 from the second start port switch 22B is input to the input port P1. In addition, the detection signal from the count switch 23 is input to the input port P2, the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input to the input port P3, and the input port P4 is provided at the general winning opening. In the case where a detection signal is input from the general prize opening switch, a determination mask value of “1FH” may be set in advance.

  The result of the logical product operation in step SA06 is set in the previous port buffer (step SA07). Note that the processes of steps SA04 and SA07 correspond to a preparation process when the switch process is executed next time (after 2 ms). Then, the logical product of the content of the previous data buffer and the content of the previous port buffer is calculated (step SA08). At this stage, in the previous data buffer, a bit having a different value among the 8 bits of the port buffer and the 8 bits of the previous port buffer is “1”. That is, among the detection signals from the various switches, the bit corresponding to the detection signal changed from the state before 2 ms from the state before 4 ms (from “0” to “1” or from “1” to “0”). Is “1”. Therefore, by executing the processing of step SA08, the bit that is “1” (ON state) in the input signal stored in the input port register PI, and the state 2 ms before is 4 ms ago. The bit changed from the state of “1” becomes “1” (ON state). That is, as a result of the logical product operation, the bit corresponding to the detection signal in which the current state is the on state and has been detected to have changed from the off state to the on state during the previous switch processing (2 ms before) is “ 1 "(ON state).

  In this way, the bit corresponding to the detection signal that has changed from the off state to the on state and then turned on twice consecutively becomes “1”. “Two consecutive times” means “both switch processing executed at a certain point in time and switch processing executed 2 ms after the switch processing”.

  The result of the logical product operation in step SA08 is stored in the switch-on buffer (step SA09). In the switch-on buffer, after changing from the off state to the on state, the bit corresponding to the detection signal in which the on state is detected twice consecutively becomes “1”. Therefore, the CPU 505 can confirm that the switch detection signal corresponding to the bit that is “1” in the switch-on buffer is surely turned on. Note that “definitely” means that the ON state has been detected twice consecutively, that is, since it can be considered that the ON state has continued for 4 ms, it is determined that the ON state of the detection signal is not due to noise or the like. It can be done. Thereafter, after executing the second start port abnormal winning invalid process (step SA10), the switch process is terminated.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the second start-up port abnormal winnings invalidation process executed in step SA10. In the second start port abnormal prize invalidation process, the CPU 505 first determines whether or not the value of the normal process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 592 is “3” (step SA21). At this time, if the value of the normal process flag is “3” (step SA21; Yes), the second start-port abnormal winning invalidation process is ended as it is.

  If it is determined in step SA21 that the value of the general process flag is other than “3” (step SA21; No), the second starting port abnormal winning error invalid timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 593 Is determined (step SA22). At this time, if the second starting port abnormal winning error invalid timer value does not match “0” (step SA22; No), the second starting port abnormal winning error invalid timer value is updated by subtracting 1 ( Step SA23), the second starting port abnormal winning invalidation process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step SA22 that the second starting port abnormal winning error invalid timer value matches "0" (step SA22; Yes), the contents of the switch-on buffer are loaded into a register or the like (step SA24). . Then, the CPU 505 checks whether the bit value of the bit number [1] corresponding to the second start port switch 22B is “1” in the loaded switch-on buffer, thereby closing the first state. 2. It is determined whether or not the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B that detects a game ball that has passed (entered) through the start winning port is on (step SA25).

  If the detection signal from the second start opening switch 22B is OFF in step SA25 (step SA25; No), it is determined that the second start winning opening in the closed state has not been won, and the second start opening is left as it is. The abnormal winning invalidation process is terminated. On the other hand, if the bit value in the bit number [4] of the switch-on buffer is “1” in step SA25 (step SA25; Yes), there is a winning at the second start winning opening that is in the closed state. As a result, it is determined whether or not the second starting port abnormal winning flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 592 is ON (step SA26).

  If the second starting port abnormal winning flag is OFF in step SA26 (step SA26; No), the second starting port abnormal winning flag is set to ON (step SA27), and the second starting port abnormal winning error is invalid. A timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to a time (for example, 1000 ms) is set in the second starting port abnormal winning error invalid timer (step SA28), and then the second starting port abnormal winning invalid process is terminated. Here, the second start port abnormal winning error invalid time may be a time required for the game ball that has caught the ball to be detected by the second start port switch 22B. For example, when the pair of left and right open / close blades provided in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B changes from the open state to the closed state, the ball biting in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B (second start winning hole) is the second start winning hole. The game ball about to pass (enter) is stuck between the open / close blades and the nail disposed in the game area, and becomes stuck. Further, the necessary time may be a sufficient time until all the game balls that have been bitten are detected after the first ball is won from the state where the balls are bitten.

  It should be noted that the second start port abnormal winning error invalid time may be other time as long as it can be reliably detected by the second start port switch 22B even if it is a time other than 1000 ms. . In the process of step SA28, if it is sufficient time for the game ball that has caught the ball to be detected by the second start port switch 22B, for example, a timer initial corresponding to 2000 ms set in step S348 of FIG. A value may be set. In other words, the setting of the timer initial value corresponding to the second starting port abnormal winning error invalid time to the second starting port abnormal winning error invalid timer is such that two or more game balls enter the normal variable winning ball device 6B. In this case, all of the game balls that have been bitten by the ball are required in order to win effectively. As a result, even when a ball bit that occurs when two or more game balls enter the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game balls that have entered before the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B enters the closed state are displayed. It is possible to prevent the winning from being invalidated. Note that the timer initial value set in step SA28 may be the same as or different from the timer initial value set in step S348 of FIG. 57 described later.

  If the second start-port abnormal winning flag is on in step SA26 (step SA26; Yes), the pachinko game is checked by checking whether or not the short-time flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 592 is on. It is determined whether or not the time reduction control is performed when the gaming state in the machine 1 is the probability changing state or the time saving state (step SA29). At this time, if the hourly flag is off (step SA29; No), the bit number [1] of the switch-on buffer is cleared and the bit value is set to “0”, thereby winning the second start winning opening. Invalidate (step SA30). Specifically, by clearing the bit number [1] of the switch-on buffer and setting the bit value to “0”, in this embodiment, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls can be paid out as prize balls. The special game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition, and the output to the hall management computer in the information output process of step S94 shown in FIG. At least of the payout of a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls, the special game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition, and the output to the hall management computer in the information output process Any one or a combination of two or more may be performed. Thereafter, the abnormal winning notification flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 592 is set to the on state (step SA31).

  Following the processing in step SA31, the random value register R2D is read to clear the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM1 to “0” and the corresponding random number latch flag is turned off (step SA32). The second starting port abnormal winning invalidation process is terminated. By the processing in step SA32, the random number latch flag is turned off, and the new random number data can be stored in the random number value register R2D. The numerical data read from the random value register R2D by the process of step SA32 corresponds to the fact that the special game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not performed, The special figure display result may be discarded (erased) as it is without being used in the process of determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state as “big hit”.

  If the time reduction flag is ON in step SA29 (step SA29; Yes), the second start port abnormal winning invalidation process is terminated without clearing the bit number [1] of the switch-on buffer.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S93 of FIG. 41 as main-side error processing. In this main-side error process, the CPU 505 first determines whether or not it is a predetermined notification prohibition period (step S191). Here, the notification prohibition period is, for example, predetermined as a period in which notification of abnormal winning is prohibited when initial notification corresponding to the start of power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. That's fine.

  When it is determined in step S191 that it is not the notification prohibition period (step S191; No), it is determined whether or not the abnormal winning notification flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 592 is on (step S192). ). When the abnormal winning notification flag is on (step S192; Yes), after the abnormal winning flag is cleared and turned off (step S193), settings for transmitting the abnormal winning notification command are performed (step S194). ). For example, in the process of step S194, the storage address (head address) of the abnormal winning notification command table stored in advance in the ROM 506 is stored in the buffer designated by the transmission command pointer in the effect control command buffer included in the transmission command buffer. Set to area. The abnormal winning notification command set in this way is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the main side communication control process of step S99 shown in FIG. 41 after the main side error process is completed, for example. Is transmitted.

  When it is the notification prohibition period in step S191 (step S191; Yes), when the abnormal winning notification flag is off in step S192 (step S192; No), or after executing the process of step S194, After making settings corresponding to other errors, the main-side error processing is terminated.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S96 shown in FIG. 41 as the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 505 first executes a start winning determination process (step S131). FIG. 47 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S131.

  When the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 47 is started, the CPU 505 first checks the detection state of the game ball in the first start port switch 22A (step S201). As an example, in the process of step S201, a stored value in a predetermined switch-on buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 595 is loaded, and a bit value (bit number [0] associated with the first start port switch 22A is loaded. ] Is specified as “0” or “1”. At this time, if the checked bit value is “0”, the first start port switch 22A indicates that the game ball is not detected and is in an off state, while if it is “1”, the first start port switch 22A. Indicates that the game ball is on due to detection. Subsequent to the process of step S201, the first start opening winning table 136A is selected and set in the use table (step S202). As an example, in the process of step S202, the storage address (first address) of the first start opening winning table 136A in the ROM 506 is stored in a predetermined table pointer so that the first starting opening winning table 136A can be referred to as a use table. Should be set. Hereinafter, in the process of selecting various tables and setting them in the use table, the same setting may be performed.

  Following the processing in step S202, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state based on the check result in step S201 (step S203). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is in an ON state (step S203; Yes), a predetermined random value acquisition process is executed (step S204) and a winning random number determination process is executed (step S205). .

  When it is determined in step S203 that the first start port switch 22A is in the OFF state (step S203; No), after the winning random number determination process is performed in step S205, the second start port switch 22B. The game ball detection state at is checked (step S206). The process in step S206 may be any process as long as the process in step S201 is adapted to the second start port switch 22B. Subsequently, the second start opening prize table 136B is selected and set in the use table (step S207). Furthermore, based on the check result in step S206, it is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step S208). If the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step S208; Yes), the random number acquisition processing is executed in the same manner as in step S204 (step S209), and the random number value determination at the time of winning is performed in the same manner as in step S205. After execution (step S210), the start winning determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S208 that the second start port switch 22B is in the OFF state, the start is performed without executing the random value acquisition process in step S209 or the winning random number determination process in step S210. The winning determination process is terminated.

  The random value acquisition process executed in step S204 or step S209 is a process realized by a control code included in a user program (game control process program for game control) prepared in advance as a common process routine. Good. In this random value acquisition process, depending on whether the first start opening prize table 136A set in the process of step S202 is used or the second start opening prize table 136B set in the process of step S207 is used, One of various processes corresponding to the case where the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening and the various processes corresponding to the case where the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening is executed. can do.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in step S204 or step S209 in FIG. 47 as the random value acquisition processing. In this random value acquisition process, the CPU 505 first reads a pending storage count value corresponding to the start winning opening through which the game ball has passed (entered) (step S501). That is, when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening, the first held memory count value is read from the game control counter setting unit 594, while the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening. If it is, the second hold storage count value is read from the game control counter setting unit 594. At this time, for example, the first reserved storage counter address specified in the first start opening prize table 136A set in the process of step S202 shown in FIG. 47, or the second start opening prize table set in the process of step S207. Corresponding to the second reserved storage counter address designated by 136B, the storage address of the RAM 507 from which the reserved storage count value is read may be specified.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the read value in the process of step S501 is greater than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value (eg, “4”) (step S502). At this time, if it is less than the upper limit value (step S502; No), the pending storage count value read out in the process of step S501 is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S503). Further, the storage position of the holding data in the special figure holding storage unit corresponding to the start winning opening through which the game ball has passed (entered) is specified (step S504). That is, when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening, the storage position of the hold data in the first special figure holding storage unit 591A is specified, while the game ball passes the second start winning opening ( In the case of entering, the storage position of the hold data in the second special figure hold storage unit 591B is specified. At this time, for example, the first special figure reservation storage unit address specified in the first start opening winning table 136A set in the process of step S202 shown in FIG. 47, or the second start opening set in the process of step S207. By adding the address addition value corresponding to the reserved storage count value read out in the processing of step S501 or the like to the second special figure reservation storage unit address designated in the winning table 136B, the storage location of the reserved data is obtained. It suffices if the storage addresses of the 1 special figure reservation storage unit 591A and the second special figure reservation storage unit 592B can be specified.

  After the process of step S504 is executed, a random value register from which numerical data serving as the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is read is specified (step S505). That is, when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening, the random number value register R1D is used as a reading source of numerical data, while the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening. Uses the random number register R2D as a reading source of numerical data. At this time, for example, the random number value register R1D address specified in the first start opening prize table 136A set in the process of step S202 shown in FIG. 47, or the second start opening prize table 136B set in the process of step S207. Corresponding to the random number value register R2D address specified in (2), it is only necessary to specify the address of the random number value register from which the numerical data is read out.

  Then, by reading out the random value register specified in step S505, numerical data that becomes the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is extracted (step S506). That is, when the random number value register R1D is set as a reading source in the process of step S505, numerical data is read and extracted from the random number value register 559A as the random number value register R1D included in the random number circuit 509. On the other hand, when the random number value register R2D is set as the reading source in the process of step S505, the numerical value data is read and extracted from the random number value register 559B as the random number value register R2D included in the random number circuit 509. At this time, the random number latch flag corresponding to the random number value register R1D or the random number value register R2D from which the numerical data has been read is turned off. That is, when the random value register R1D is set as the reading source in the process of step S505, the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 is updated from “1” to “0” by reading the numerical data in the process of step S506. Then, the random number latch flag associated with the random value register R1D is turned off. On the other hand, when the random number value register R2D is set as the reading source in the process of step S505, the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM1 is changed from “1” to “0” by reading the numerical data in the process of step S506. The random number latch flag associated with the random value register R2D is turned off. Then, based on the numerical data read in step S506, the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is stored as the reserved data in the storage position of the special figure storage unit identified in the process of step S504. (Step S507).

  The numerical data read from the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D is directly stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 591A or the second special figure reservation storage unit 591B as the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. It may be stored, or may be stored after a predetermined processing. As an example, numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 509 is temporarily stored in a 16-bit general-purpose register of the CPU 505 or the like. Subsequently, a refresh register value that is a stored value of a refresh register built in the CPU 505 is read as numerical data that becomes a random number value for processing. In this case, the refresh register value may be added to the upper byte in the general-purpose register, while the lower byte may be left as it is. Here, instead of adding the refresh register value, predetermined arithmetic processing such as subtraction, logical sum, and logical product may be executed. Alternatively, the refresh register value may be added to the lower byte in the general-purpose register. Also, the upper byte and lower byte of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 509 may be exchanged and stored as the upper byte or lower byte in the general-purpose register. Furthermore, after the refresh register value is added to the high-order byte or low-order byte in the general-purpose register, or without performing arithmetic processing such as addition to the high-order byte or low-order byte in the general-purpose register, the high-order byte and the low-order byte are switched. It may be. Of the upper byte and lower byte of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 509, the data of a specific bit may be replaced with the data of other bits. In this case, for example, in a bus connecting the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D in the random number circuit 509 and the upper byte or lower byte of the general-purpose register, data of a specific bit is replaced with data of another bit. In addition, the wiring may be crossed. Thereafter, the CPU 505 performs an AND operation on the stored value of the general-purpose register and a predetermined logical value (for example, “FFFFH”), or outputs the stored value of the general-purpose register as it is and stores it in a predetermined area of the RAM 507. Thus, numerical data indicating the 16-bit random value MR1 may be set. For example, when setting numerical data indicating a 14-bit random number value, a 14-bit value can be acquired by performing an AND operation on the stored value of the general-purpose register and “7F7FH”. . Further, a logical sum operation may be executed instead of the logical product operation. At this time, the area of the RAM 507 in which numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is stored may be included in, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 594. Alternatively, the stored value of the general-purpose register may be output to the first special figure reservation storage unit 591A or the second special figure reservation storage unit 591B and used as the reservation data indicating the random value MR1.

  Further, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the addition value may be set based on the stored value of the general-purpose register. As an example, when the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the addition value takes a value in the range of “0” to “7”, the logical value of the storage value of the general-purpose register and “C0C0H” is calculated, Numerical data indicating a 4-bit random value may be set by storing it in a predetermined area of the RAM 507.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S507, for example, from a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 594, numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type and numerical values indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type The data is extracted and stored together with the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 stored in step S507 as the storage data in the storage position of the special figure storage unit specified in the process of step S504 (step S508).

  After performing the process of step S508, after performing the setting for transmitting the pending storage number notification command to the effect control board 12 (step S509), the random value acquisition process is terminated. In the process of step S509, for example, the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 506 may be set in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer.

  If it is determined in step S502 that the read value is greater than or equal to the upper limit value (step S502; Yes), the random number latch flag is cleared by reading the random number value register (step S510), and the random value acquisition process is terminated. To do. Here, in the process of step S510, the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D is read out in response to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening, while the game ball is in the second start winning prize. Corresponding to the case of passing (entering) the mouth, the numerical data stored in the random value register R2D is read. At this time, similarly to the process of step S505, for example, the random number value register R1D address specified by the first start opening winning table 136A set by the process of step S202 shown in FIG. 47, or the process of step S207. In addition, it is only necessary to be able to specify the address of the random value register from which the numerical data is read out in correspondence with the random value register R2D address specified in the second start opening prize table 136B.

  When the first start winning signal SS1 or the second start winning signal SS2 is input from the first start port switch 22A or the second start port switch 22B to the random number circuit 509 without passing through the CPU 505 or the like, the first special figure Regardless of the number of stored hold data in the hold storage unit 591A or the second special figure hold storage unit 591B, the random number value register R1D or the random value corresponds to the input of the first start winning signal SS1 or the second start winning signal SS2. Numerical data serving as a random number value is stored in the register R2D. At this time, the random number latch flag corresponding to the random number value register in which numerical data is stored is turned on, and storage of new numerical data is restricted. Therefore, when the number of stored data is equal to or greater than the upper limit value, if the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D is left without being read, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening are set. When a new game ball passes (enters), new numerical data corresponding to this game ball pass (entry) cannot be taken in and stored in the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D. The numerical data stored corresponding to the game ball that has passed (entered) may be read out, and an accurate random value may not be acquired. Therefore, even when the number of stored data reaches the upper limit, the process of step S510 is executed, and the random number latch flag is cleared by reading the random number value register, so that a new game ball can be passed (entered). Thus, it is possible to obtain numerical data that is an accurate random value. Note that the numerical data read from the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D by the processing of step S510 is not used for the determination processing whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit”, but is discarded as it is. (Erase) is sufficient.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in step S205 or step S210 in FIG. 47 as the winning random number determination processing. In this embodiment, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the special symbol display result is displayed as “big hit” or “small hit” in the special symbol normal processing (step S140 in FIG. 46, FIG. 51) described later. ”Or a jackpot type is determined. In a variation pattern setting process (step S141 in FIG. 46, FIG. 52), which will be described later, the variation pattern type and the variation pattern are determined. . On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 505 determines the random number value at the time of winning at step S205 or step S210 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). By executing the process, it is specified in advance whether the special figure display result will be “big hit” or “small hit”, and whether the variation pattern of the decorative pattern will be a variation pattern with at least super reach. . As a result, before the variable display of the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, the special figure display result becomes “big hit” or “small hit”, and the reach of super reach is reached. Whether or not the effect is predicted, and whether or not the continuous notice effect is executed over a plurality of variable displays by the CPU of the effect control microcomputer 120 on the effect control board 12 side based on the prediction result, etc. Can be determined.

  In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 49, the CPU 505 first determines whether or not the first starting winning prize has been passed (entered) through the first starting winning opening (step S521). At this time, if it is the first start opening winning (step S521; Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a big hit in the big hit gaming state (step S522). For example, in the process of step S522, the CPU 505 may determine that the big hit is being hit if the value of the special figure process flag is any of “4” to “7”.

  When it is determined in step S522 that the big hit is not made (step S522; No), it is determined whether or not the time-shortening control is being performed in which the time-shortening control is being performed in the probability variation state or the time-shortening state (step S523). For example, in the process of step S523, the CPU 505 may check the state of the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 592 and determine that the time reduction control is being performed if the time reduction flag is on. When it is determined in step S522 that the game is a big hit (step S522; Yes), or in the case where it is determined in step S523 that the time reduction control is being executed (step S523; Yes), a big hit / short time / win prize is notified. After setting for transmitting the command B103H (see FIG. 5C), which is the first start opening winning designation command, from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S524), at the time of winning The random value determination process ends. In response to the first start opening winning designation command for notifying such a big hit / short / short win, the production control board 12 sets the first special figure reserved storage number in the start winning storage display area 5H of the image display device 5. The display of the effect image that can be specified can be updated, and among the stored storage information corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure, there is one based on the start winning during the big hit or the short-time control Can be specified if included.

  When it is determined in step S523 that the time reduction control is not being performed (step S523; No), the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result based on the numerical data read in step S506 of FIG. Is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step S525). For example, in the process of step S525, the first special figure display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 27A is selected and set in the use table. Subsequently, by referring to the first special figure display result determination table 130A set in the use table, the special figure display result corresponding to the random value MR1 based on the numerical data read in step S506 is “big hit”. It is determined whether or not there is. More specifically, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is compared with the determined value stored in the first special figure display result determination table 130A, and the determined value that matches the random value MR1 is assigned. It is determined whether or not the figure display result is “big hit”. Here, if the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state or the short time state, refer to the table data corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the short time state in the first special figure display result determination table 130A. Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit”, and if it is a probability change state, the table data corresponding to the case where the game state is the probability change state is referred to in the first special figure display result determination table 130A. Thus, it may be determined whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit”. Regardless of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is “1” with reference to the table data corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the short time state in the first special figure display result determination table 130A. You may make it determine whether it is a "hit".

  Note that a change in the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be predicted, and the table data referred to in the first special figure display result determination table 130A may be switched based on the prediction result. As an example, in the case where the probability variation control is continuously performed until the variable display result becomes “big hit”, when it is determined in step S525 that the special figure display result is decided as “big hit”, FIG. By referring to the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 28 based on the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random value MR2 extracted in step S508, the jackpot type is “non-probable change”, “probability change”, It is determined which of the “accuracy” is determined. When it is determined that the big hit type is not “non-probability change” but “probability change” or “surprise”, the probability change determination flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 592 or the like is set to the on state. On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit type is “non-probable change”, the probability change determination flag is cleared and turned off. Then, in the process of step S525, it is determined whether the probability variation determination flag is on or off. At this time, if the probability change determination flag is ON, the special figure display result is “big hit” with reference to the table data corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the probability change state in the first special figure display result determination table 130A. Specify whether it exists. On the other hand, when the probability change determination flag is OFF, the table data corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the short time state may be referred to in the first special figure display result determination table 130A. Corresponding to the case where the game state when the special figure game based on the hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 591A is started is such that the process state is executed, The special figure display result can be specified using table data in which the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” at a higher rate than in the normal state or the short time state, and adapted to the actual gaming state, More accurate special figure display results can be specified.

  When it is determined in step S525 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S525; No), it is determined whether or not the random value MR1 is within the small hit determination range (step S526). When it is determined in step S525 that the random value MR1 is within the big hit determination range (step S525; Yes), or when the random value MR1 is determined to be within the small hit determination range in step S526 ( Step S526; Yes), a command B102H serving as a first start port winning designation command for notifying that a winning time determination has been made based on the detection of a game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning port (FIG. 5 ( C)) is set for transmission from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S527), and the random number determination process at the time of winning is completed. By means of the first start opening prize designation command for notifying the winning time per hour determination, the production control board 12 can specify the first special figure reserved memory number in the start prize memory display area 5H of the image display device 5. The display of the effect image can be updated, and the special figure display result is determined as “big hit” or “small hit” in the stored storage information corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure. It can be specified that something that indicates what is to be done is included.

  It should be noted that the first start opening winning designation is different in the EXT data setting when it is determined in step S525 that it is within the big hit determination range and when it is determined in step S526 that it is within the small hit determination range. By transmitting a command or the like, it may be possible to specify on the side of the effect control board 12 whether the special figure display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. Alternatively, when it is determined in step S525 that the jackpot type is within the jackpot determination range, it is determined which jackpot type is determined based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the jackpot type is set to “surprising”. If it is determined to be determined, the first start opening winning designation command common to the case where it is determined in step S526 that it is within the small hit determination range is transmitted, while the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change”. If it is determined that the big hit type is determined to be “surprise” or different from the case where it is determined that the big hit type is within the small hit determination range, a first start opening winning designation command is transmitted. May be. As a result, on the side of the production control board 12, among the stored storage information corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure, the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change”. ”Is included, and the special figure display result is“ big hit ”and the big hit type is“ surprise ”or the special figure display result is“ small hit ” Can be distinguished and specified.

  When it is determined in step S526 that the random value MR1 is not within the small hit determination range (step S526; No), numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted in step S508 of FIG. Is within the specific pattern common range (step S528). Here, in the setting example of the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133C shown in FIG. 30A or the loss variation pattern type determination table (short time) 133D shown in FIG. Regardless of the number of reserved memories, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is within the range of “230” to “251”, a specific variation pattern involving at least super reach (super reach α or super reach β) is present. The included variation pattern types CA2-4 are determined. Therefore, in the process of step S528, for example, as shown in FIG. 50, if the random value MR3 is in the range of “230” to “251”, it may be determined that it is within the specific pattern common range. In other words, the CPU 505 determines any one of the same determined values “230” to “251” set as at least a part of the determined value corresponding to the variation pattern type CA2-4 including the specific variation pattern with super reach and the random value. By determining whether or not SR3 matches, it is possible to determine whether or not the variation pattern with super reach is determined. Note that the decision value corresponding to the variation pattern type CA2-4 may include a decision value different from the same decision value, or only the same decision value is set and a decision other than the same decision value is determined. It may be set such that no value is assigned.

  When it is determined in step S528 that the random number MR3 is within the specific pattern common range (step S528; Yes), the random pattern MR3 is within the specific pattern common range based on the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening. Is set to transmit a command B101H (see FIG. 5C), which is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that, from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S529), the winning random number determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S528 that the random number MR3 is not within the specific pattern common range (step S528; No), based on the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening. A setting for transmitting a command B100H (see FIG. 5C) serving as a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the pattern is outside the specific pattern common range from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is set. After performing (step S530), the winning random number determination process is terminated. In response to the first start opening prize designation command for notifying whether or not the specific pattern is within the common range, the effect control board 12 side stores the first special figure hold memory in the start prize storage display area 5H of the image display device 5. The display of the effect image that can specify the number can be updated. In addition, it is possible to specify whether or not the on-hold storage information corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure includes information indicating that the specific fluctuation pattern is determined.

  If it is not the first start opening winning in step S521 (step S521; No), for example, the second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result based on the numerical data read in step S506 is within the jackpot determination range (step S531). At this time, it is the same as the process of step S525 that the table data to be referred to may be switched by predicting the change in the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  If it is determined in step S531 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S531; No), it is determined whether or not the random value MR1 is within the small hit determination range (step S532). When it is determined in step S531 that it is within the big hit determination range (step S531; Yes), or when it is determined in step S532 that it is within the small hit determination range (step S532; Yes), the second start winning prize A command B202H (see FIG. 5C) serving as a second start opening winning designation command for notifying that a winning time determination has been made based on the detection of a game ball that has passed (entered) through the mouth is made on the main board 11. Is set to transmit to the effect control board 12 (step S533), the winning random number determination process is terminated. With the second start opening prize designation command for notifying the winning time per hour determination, the production control board 12 can specify the second special figure reserved memory number in the start prize memory display area 5H of the image display device 5. The display of the effect image can be updated, and the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small hit” in the hold storage information corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure. It can be specified that what is indicated is included.

  Note that the winning time determination shown in the second start opening winning designation command is notified only when the special figure display result is “big hit”, and is not notified when the special figure display result is “small win”. You may do it. In this case, if the random value MR1 is within the big hit determination range in step S531, the process proceeds to step S533. If the random value MR1 is within the small hit determination range in step S532, the process proceeds to step S536 described later. What is necessary is just to advance to a process etc. Alternatively, the winning time per hour determination shown in the second start opening winning designation command is notified only when the special figure display result is “big hit” and “non-probable change” or “probable change” big hit type. The notification may not be made when the type is a big hit type or when the special figure display result is “small hit”. In this case, if the random value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range in step S531, it is further determined whether or not the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is within the determination range of “non-probable change” or “probability change”. If it is within the determination range, the process proceeds to step S533. On the other hand, if it is within the determination range of “probability” or if the random value MR1 is within the small hit determination range in step S532, step S536 is performed. It is sufficient to proceed to the process. If it is determined that the big hit type is determined to be “surprise”, the second start opening winning designation command common to the case where it is determined in step S532 that the special figure display result is determined to be “small hit”. May be transmitted in the same manner as the processing in steps S525 to S527.

  When it is determined in step S532 that the random value MR1 is not within the small hit determination range (step S532; No), numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted in step S508 of FIG. Is within the specific pattern common range (step S534). At this time, similarly to the processing in step S528, if the random value MR3 is within the range of “230” to “251”, it may be determined that it is within the specific pattern common range.

  When it is determined in step S534 that the random value MR3 is within the specific pattern common range (step S534; Yes), the random pattern MR3 is within the specific pattern common range based on the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening. Is set to transmit the command B201H (see FIG. 5C), which is the second start opening winning designation command for notifying that, from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step) S535), the winning random number determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S534 that the random number MR3 is not within the specific pattern common range (step S534; No), based on the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening. A setting for transmitting a command B200H (see FIG. 5C) serving as a second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the pattern is outside the common pattern common range from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. After that (step S536), the winning random number determination process is terminated. By the second start opening winning designation command for notifying whether or not it is within the specific pattern common range, on the side of the effect control board 12, the second special figure hold memory is stored in the start winning storage display area 5H of the image display device 5. The display of the effect image that can specify the number can be updated. In addition, it is possible to specify whether or not the on-hold storage information corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure includes information indicating that the specific fluctuation pattern is determined.

  When the winning random number determination process as described above is executed, when a game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening is detected (at the time of the first start winning or second Whether the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small hit” regardless of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the special figure holding memory number which is the holding memory number of the special figure game. Whether or not a specific variation pattern with super reach is determined is determined, and the first start opening prize specifying command and the second starting opening prize specifying command which differ depending on the determination results are 11 to the effect control board 12 can be transmitted.

  In the present embodiment, among the determination values corresponding to the variation pattern types CA2-4 by assignment of the determination values in the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (short time) 133D. At least a part of is set with the same determined values “230” to “251” regardless of the total number of reserved storage at the start of variable display based on the establishment of the first start condition and the second start condition. Then, by determining whether or not the random value MR3 matches any one of the same determined values, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern with super reach is determined. The determination to be determined can be made with certainty. That is, even when it is determined in step S528 or step S534 that it is not within the specific pattern common range, it may be determined to be a variation pattern with super reach, while it is determined to be within the specific pattern common range. Sometimes, it is always determined to be a variation pattern with super reach and not a variation pattern without super reach.

  The determination values corresponding to the variation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-3 and the variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-3 different from the variation pattern type CA2-4 with super reach are the first start condition and the second start condition. Different decision values are set according to the total number of reserved memories at the start of variable display based on the establishment of. Among these, the decision value corresponding to the variation pattern type CA1-2 including the variation pattern PA1-2 that is a non-reach variation pattern for shortening is the total retention when the total retention storage number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number. The number of memories is set to be larger than when the number is less than the predetermined number. For example, when the gaming state is a normal state, when the total number of reserved memories is “3” or more or “6” or more, it is more than when it is less than “3” or less than “6”. The determined value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-2. In addition, when the time reduction control is performed when the game state is a probabilistic state or a short time state, when the total number of reserved memories is “1” or more or “2” or more, it is less than “1” or less than “2”. Compared with a certain case, many determination values are assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-2. Therefore, when the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the average variable display time (such as special figure fluctuation time) is shortened compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number, and the operation rate in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reduced. Can be prevented.

  After the start winning determination process is executed in step S131 of FIG. 46, one of the processes of steps S140 to S150 is selected according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 592. And execute.

  The special symbol normal process of step S140 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol are based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the first special symbol storage unit 591A and the second special symbol storage unit 591B. It is determined whether or not to start the special game using the display device 4B. Further, in the special symbol normal process, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is “big hit” or “small hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. The variable display result is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (big hit symbol, the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B) Either a small hit symbol or a lost symbol) is set.

  The variation pattern setting process of step S141 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a pre-decision result on whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, a reach decision result on whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state, etc. The process includes determining a variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types, and determining a variation pattern as a plurality of types in accordance with the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  The special symbol variation process of step S142 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure For example, every time the special symbol variation process is executed in step S142, the value (special diagram variation timer value) in the special diagram variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 593 is subtracted by 1 or added by 1, Regardless of whether the game is a special game using the first special graphic in the first special symbol display device 4A or a special game using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display device 4B. The elapsed time is measured by. It is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. As described above, the special symbol variation processing uses the special symbol variation in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. This is a process for controlling the variation of special symbols in the special game by a common processing routine. When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S143 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the change of the special symbol, and the fixed special symbol which is the variable symbol display result is stopped and displayed. A process for setting is included. Then, a determination is made as to whether one of the big hit flag and the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 592 is on. If the big hit flag is on, the special process flag The value is updated to “4”, and when the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The pre-opening process for the special winning opening in step S144 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for the big winning opening is a process for starting the execution of the round in the big winning gaming state and setting the opening for the big winning opening based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” Etc. are included. At this time, for example, an upper limit of a period during which the big prize opening is in an open state may be set corresponding to the setting of the maximum number of big prize opening times. As an example, when the maximum value of the number of times of winning the big winning opening is set to “15” corresponding to the 15 round big hit state, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”. On the other hand, if the maximum value for the number of times a big winning opening is opened is set to “2” corresponding to the two round big hit state, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.5 seconds”. Set to.

  The special winning opening opening process in step S145 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. This processing during opening of the big winning opening is based on processing for measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the elapsed time measured, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. Processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state is included. When the big prize opening is changed from the closed state to the open state, a process for starting the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door may be executed. On the other hand, when returning the prize winning port to the closed state, a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the prize winning door may be executed.

  The special winning opening opening post-processing in step S146 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. The post-opening process for the big prize opening includes a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big prize opening is in an open state has reached the maximum number of open big prize openings, This includes a process for making a setting for transmitting an end designation command when hit.

  The big hit end process in step S147 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the jackpot ending process, an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed by an effect electrical component (effect device) such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. A process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period of time elapses, a process of performing various settings corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state, and the like.

  The small hit release pre-processing in step S148 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits is a setting for starting the execution of variable winning action in the small hit game state and opening the big winning opening based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, etc. The processing to perform is included. At this time, for example, the maximum value of the number of times that the winning a prize opening is open is “2” because the variable display result is “small hit”, and the upper limit of the period during which the winning a prize opening is opened is set to “0. “5 seconds” may be set.

  The small hit releasing process in step S149 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process for measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included.

  The small hit end process in step S150 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. In this small hit end processing, a period during which an effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed by an electric component (effect device) for effects such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 The process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the elapses is included. Here, when the small hit gaming state is finished, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued without changing the state of the probability change flag and the short time flag.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S140 of FIG. 46 as the special symbol normal process. In this special symbol normal process, the CPU 505 first determines whether or not the second reserved memory count value indicating the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special diagram is “0” (step S221). . For example, in the process of step S221, it may be determined whether or not the second reserved storage count value read from the game control counter setting unit 594 is “0”. When the second reserved memory count value is other than “0” in step S221 (step S221; No), for example, the value of the variation special figure designation buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 595 is updated to “2”. (Step S222).

  When the second hold memory count value is “0” in step S221 (step S221; Yes), the first hold memory count value indicating the number of hold memories of the special figure game using the first special figure is “0”. It is determined whether or not (step S223). For example, in the process of step S223, it may be determined whether or not the first pending storage count value read from the game control counter setting unit 594 is “0”. When the first pending storage count value is other than “0” in step S223 (step S223; No), for example, the value of the variation special figure designation buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 595 is updated to “1”. (Step S224). Thus, in the process of step S223, when it is determined in step S221 that the second reserved memory count value is “0”, it is determined whether or not the first reserved memory count value is “0”. To do. Therefore, execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

  It should be noted that the special game using the second special figure is not limited to a game that starts with priority over the special graphic game using the first special figure, and the first start prize opening and the second start prize opening are played. Each special game may be executed sequentially according to the order in which the balls have passed (entered). In other words, the execution may be started sequentially from the special game corresponding to the previously established start condition without distinguishing between the first start condition and the second start condition. Alternatively, it is determined which one of the first reserved memory count value and the second reserved memory count value is larger, and the special game using a special symbol corresponding to the larger count value is preferentially executed. You may make it do. In this case, the first reserved memory count value is compared with the second reserved memory count value, and when the first reserved memory count value is larger, the value of the variable special figure designation buffer is set to “1”. On the other hand, if the second reserved storage count value is larger, the value of the variable special figure designation buffer may be updated to “2”. If the first reserved memory count value and the second reserved memory count value match, the special game using the first special figure may be executed with priority, or the second special figure will be used. The special figure game that has been given may be executed with priority. In this way, by giving priority to the special figure game using the special symbol corresponding to the person with the larger reserved memory count value, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of invalid start winnings.

  After executing one of the processes in steps S222 and S224, the hold data is read from the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the variable special figure designation buffer value (step S225). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the special figure display result determination result is stored as the hold data stored in association with the hold number “1” in the first special figure hold storage unit 591A. Numeric data indicating the random value MR1, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are read out. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the special figure display result is shown as the hold data stored in association with the hold number “1” in the second special figure hold storage unit 591B. Numeric data indicating the random number value MR1 for determination, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are read out. The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for variation provided in the game control buffer setting unit 595 or the like and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S225, the reserved memory count value corresponding to the variable special figure designation buffer value is decremented by one, and the special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to the variable special figure designation buffer value is subordinate to the holding number “1”. The stored contents of the hold data stored in the entries (for example, entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted up by one entry (step S226). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the first hold storage count value is decremented by 1, and the storage content of the hold data in the first special figure hold storage unit 591A is increased by one entry. Shift to. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory count value is decremented by 1, and the storage content of the reserved data in the second special figure reservation memory unit 591B is set to 1 Shift entries up one place.

  After that, a special figure display result determination table corresponding to the variable special figure designation buffer value is used as a use table for determining whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. Select and set (step S227). For example, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the first special figure display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 27A is set as the use table, while the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2”. If so, the second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in FIG. 27B is set as the use table. The CPU 505 refers to the special figure display result determination table set in this way, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination included in the pending data read in step S225. The special figure display result is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S228). Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result determined in step S228 is “big hit” (step S229).

  When it is determined in step S229 that it is not “big hit” (step S229; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S230). When it is determined that the game is “small hit” (step S230; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 592 is set to the on state (step S231).

  If it is determined in step S229 that the game is a “hit” (step S229; Yes), the big win flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 592 is set to the on state (step S232). At this time, the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 28 is selected and set as a use table for determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S233). The CPU 505 refers to the jackpot type determination table 131 set in this manner, and determines the jackpot type based on the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random number MR2 included in the pending data read in step S225. One of a plurality of types such as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, and “surprising change” is determined (step S234). If the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” in step S222, since no decision value is assigned to the big hit type of “surprise” in the big hit type decision table 131, the big hit type is “ It is not determined to be “accurate”. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in step S234 in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 595, the decision is made in the process of step S234. The jackpot type that has been set is stored (step S235). As an example, if the big hit type is “non-probable change”, the big hit type buffer value may be “0”, “probable change” may be “1”, and “surprise” may be “2”.

  If it is determined in step S230 that it is not “small hit” (step S230; No), or after performing any of the processing in steps S231 and S235, whether to control the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state? A determined special symbol is set in accordance with the result of the prior determination or the determination result of the jackpot type when the jackpot gaming state is set (step S236). As an example, when it is determined in step S230 that the special figure display result is not “small hit”, a lost symbol is obtained corresponding to the pre-determined result indicating that the special figure display result is “lost”. The special symbol of the symbol indicating “−” is set to the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S230 that the special figure display result is “small hit”, the small figure corresponding to the pre-determined result indicating that the special figure display result is “small hit”. The special symbol of the number indicating “5” as the symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. If it is determined in step S229 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, the big hit symbols “1”, “3”, “7” are determined according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S234. Among the special symbols of the numbers indicating "", one of the special symbols is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the big hit type is “non-probable change”, the special symbol indicating the number “3” that becomes the non-probable big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is “probability change”, the special symbol indicating the number “7” that becomes the probability change big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. In accordance with the determination result that the big hit type is “accuracy”, the special symbol indicating the number of the big hit symbol “1” is set as the confirmed special symbol.

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S236, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S237), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. . If the first reserved memory count value is “0” in step S223 (step S223; Yes), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step S238), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. In the demonstration display setting in step S238, for example, a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In contrast, it is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if not yet transmitted, the transmission setting of the customer waiting demonstration designation command may be performed by setting the storage address of the customer waiting demonstration designation command table in the ROM 506 in the transmission command buffer, for example.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S141 in FIG. 46 as the variation pattern setting process. In this variation pattern setting process, the CPU 505 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S251). If the big hit flag is on (step S251; Yes), the big hit variation pattern type determination table 133A is selected and set as a use table for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types (step S252). ). At this time, for example, by reading a jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 595 or the like, it is specified whether the jackpot type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” (step) S253).

  When the big hit flag is off in step S251 (step S251; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S254). If the small hit flag is ON (step S254; Yes), the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133B is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types (step S254; Yes). Step S255).

  When the small hit flag is OFF in step S254 (step S254; No), for example, adding the first reserved memory count value and the second reserved memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 594, Alternatively, the total number of reserved memories is specified by reading the total reserved memory count value (step S256). Then, it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag is on (step S257). At this time, if the time reduction flag is off (step S257; No), the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133C is selected corresponding to the normal time when the time reduction control is not performed, The change pattern type is set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types (step S258). When the time reduction flag is on in step S257 (step S257; Yes), the loss variation pattern type determination table (medium time reduction) 133D is selected corresponding to the time reduction control being performed. The variation pattern type is set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types (step S259).

  After executing any of the processes of steps S253, S255, S258, and S259, the usage table is created based on numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type stored in the random number buffer for variation, for example. By referring to the set variation pattern type determination table, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S260). Here, in the process of step S260, the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the establishment of the first start condition is determined. Whether or not to determine the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied. First, using the numerical data indicating the common random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type updated by a common random counter or the like, the variation pattern type may be determined as one of a plurality of types by a common processing module. it can.

  In the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133C shown in FIG. 30 (A) and the loss variation pattern type determination table (short time) 133D shown in FIG. 30 (B), the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more. In addition, as compared with the case where the total number of reserved memories is less than the predetermined number, more determined values are assigned to the variation pattern types CA1-2. For example, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133C, when the total reserved memory number is “3” or more, the variation pattern type CA1 is compared to the case where the total reserved memory number is less than “3”. -2 is assigned a large number of decision values, and when the total number of reserved memories is “6” or more, the variation pattern is larger than when the total number of reserved memories is less than “6”. Many decision values are assigned to the type CA1-2. In the loss variation pattern type determination table (short time medium) 133D, when the total reserved memory number is “1” or more, the variation pattern is compared with the case where the total reserved memory number is “0” less than “1”. Many decision values are assigned to the type CA1-2, and when the total number of reserved memories is “2” or more, compared to the case where the total number of reserved memories is less than “2”, Many determination values are assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-2. The variation pattern type CA1-2 includes a variation pattern PA3-1, a variation pattern PA3-2, a variation pattern PB3-1, and a variation pattern PB3-2 with super reach, and a non-reach variation pattern with a short special pattern variation time. Variation pattern PA1-2 is included. Accordingly, when the special figure display result is “losing”, the total reserved memory is stored when the total reserved memory number when the start condition (first start condition or second start condition) is satisfied is equal to or greater than the predetermined number. The variation pattern type is determined using a decision value in which the number of decision values corresponding to the variation pattern PA1-2 is set larger than when the number is less than the predetermined number. As a result, the average special figure fluctuation time can be made different according to the total number of reserved memories when the start condition is satisfied, especially when the number of special figure pending memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. By shortening the time, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the situation in which the operating rate of variable display decreases.

  After the variation pattern type is thus determined in step S260, the hit variation pattern determination table 134A is used as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation patterns according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. , One of the loss variation pattern determination table 134B is selected and set (step S261). Subsequently, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination table set in step S261 based on numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern (step S262). The numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern may be extracted from a random counter of the game control counter setting unit 594 when the process of step S262 is executed, 2 In the first special figure reservation storage unit 591A and the second special figure reservation storage unit 591B, together with the random numbers MR1 to MR3, the game balls that have passed (entered) through the start winning opening are detected. It may be stored as reserved data.

  In the process of step S262, whether or not the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the first special symbol is determined by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the establishment of the first start condition, Regardless of whether or not the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed by using the second special symbol is determined by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the second starting condition is satisfied, The variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types using numerical data indicating a common random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern updated by a counter or the like. As an example, in the process of step S262, the variation pattern may be determined with reference to the determination table stored at the address of the ROM 506 set in the determination table pointer.

  Following the determination of the variation pattern in step S262, a special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determination result is set (step S263). Thereafter, according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value, the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. The setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start any of the above (step S264). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B.

  After executing the process of step S264, settings are made to transmit various commands for starting the change of the special symbol (step S265). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 505 sends a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a display result designation command, a game state designation from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to transmit commands sequentially, setting data indicating a storage address (first address) in the ROM 506 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is set in the transmission command buffer. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 505 performs the second variation start command, variation pattern designation command, display result designation command, game state designation from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to transmit commands sequentially, setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 506 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is set in the transmission command buffer. When the setting in step S265 is performed, every time the main-side communication control process in step S99 shown in FIG. 41 is executed after the special symbol process process is completed, the main board 11 changes to the effect control board 12. In contrast, the first variation start command or the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, the display result designation command, and the gaming state designation command are sequentially transmitted. It should be noted that the order in which the plurality of types of effect control commands are transmitted may be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like.

  Following the setting in step S265, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation process (step S266), and then the fluctuation pattern setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S143 of FIG. 46 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 505 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S281). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S281; Yes), the big hit start production waiting time is set (step S282). For example, in the process of step S282, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the jackpot start time production waiting time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 593.

  Subsequent to the process of step S282, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S283). For example, in the process of step S283, setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 506 of the hit start specifying command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start specifying command may be stored in the transmission command buffer. Thereafter, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S284). In addition, a setting for ending the probability variation state and the time reduction state is performed (step S285). For example, in step S285, processing for clearing the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag to turn it off, processing for clearing the special figure fluctuation count counter for counting the number of times the special figure game is executed in the probability variation state and time reduction status, and the like. It only has to be executed. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to “4” which is a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S286), the special symbol stop process is terminated.

  If the big hit flag is off in step S281 (step S281; No), it is determined whether the small hit flag is on (step S287). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step S287; Yes), a small hit start production waiting time is set (step S288). For example, in the process of step S288, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the small hitting start time production waiting time may be set in the game control process timer.

  Subsequent to the process in step S288, as in the process in step S283, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S289). Thereafter, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S290). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”, which is a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step S291).

  If the small hit flag is off in step S287 (step S287; No), the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S292). . After executing one of the processes in steps S291 and S292, it is determined whether or not to end the probability variation state or the time reduction state (step S293). For example, in the process of step S293, the value of the special figure fluctuation number counter (special figure fluctuation number count value) is updated by, for example, subtracting 1 or adding 1, and the updated special figure fluctuation number count value is a predetermined value. It is determined whether or not the special game state end determination value is met. At this time, if it matches the special game state end determination value, the probability variation state or the time reduction state may be terminated by clearing the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag, etc., and controlled to the normal state. On the other hand, if it does not match the special game state end determination value, the state of the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag may be maintained and the process of step S293 may be ended. After executing the end determination of the probability variation state or the short time state, the special symbol stop process ends. Note that the end determination based on the special figure variation count value may be performed only in the short-time state, and the probability variation state may be continued until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”. . Alternatively, for example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining the probability change state end from a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 594 and referring to a probability change state end determination table stored in advance in the ROM 506 or the like. Further, it may be determined whether or not to end the probability variation state.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S147 of FIG. 46 as the big hit end process. In this jackpot end process, the CPU 505 first determines whether or not the jackpot end time effect waiting time has elapsed (step S301). As an example, in the post-opening process for the big prize opening in step S146 shown in FIG. 46, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”, A value is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S301, for example, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 and the updated game control process timer value matches a predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value (for example, “0”). Whether or not the big hit end production waiting time has elapsed may be determined according to whether or not the game has been done. If the big hit end presentation waiting time has not elapsed in step S301 (step S301; No), the big hit end processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed in step S301 (step S301; Yes), the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 595 or the like is read out to determine the big hit type. Is "non-probability change", "probability change", or "surprising change" (step S302). At this time, it is determined whether or not the identified jackpot type is “uncertain change” (step S303).

  When it is determined in step S303 that the big hit type is “non-probable change” (step S303; Yes), a setting for starting control for changing the gaming state to the time-saving state is performed (step S304). For example, the CPU 505 sets the time reduction flag to the on state and sets a predetermined count initial value (for example, “100”) corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game executable in the time reduction state to the time reduction counter Set to. On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit type is “probability change” or “probability” (step S303; No), a setting for starting the control for changing the gaming state to the probability change state is performed (step S305). For example, the CPU 505 sets both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag to the on state. Further, even when the probability variation state is set, a count initial value may be set in the time reduction counter corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game in which the time reduction control is performed.

  After executing one of the processes in steps S304 and S305, the special figure process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (step S306), and then the jackpot end process ends.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S97 of FIG. 41 as normal symbol process processing. In this normal symbol process, the CPU 505 first executes a gate passage determination process (step S161). For example, in the gate passage determination process in step S161, it is determined whether or not a game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 has been detected based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21, and if there is no detection, the gate passage determination process is performed as it is. finish. On the other hand, if there is a detection of a game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41, a general-purpose reserved storage count value indicating the number of reserved general-purpose memories stored in the general-purpose reserved storage unit 591C It is determined whether or not the value is a predetermined value (for example, “4”) as the holding upper limit value. At this time, if the usual figure holding upper limit value has been reached, the passage of the current game ball at the passing gate is invalidated and the gate passing determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the usual figure hold upper limit value has not been reached, the random number value MR5 for determining the usual figure display result is indicated from among the numerical data updated by the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 594, for example. Extract numerical data. The numerical value data indicating the random value MR5 extracted at this time is set as reserved data at the head of the empty entry in the general-purpose reserved storage unit 591C, whereby the random value MR5 is stored. In this case, after updating so as to add 1 to the usual reserved memory number count value, the gate passage determination process is terminated.

  After executing the gate passage determination process of step S161, the CPU 505 selects one of the processes of steps S170 to S173 shown in FIG. And run.

  The normal symbol normal process in step S170 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “0”. In this normal symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol display device 20 starts the normal symbol game based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the normal symbol storage unit 591C. At this time, for example, when there is pending data stored in the universal figure storage unit 591C, the universal figure display result, which is a variable display result of the normal symbol in the usual figure game, is set to “per common figure” or “normal figure” After the general map display result determination process for determining whether to “miss” is performed, the value of the general map process flag is updated to “1”.

  In the general map display result determination process, the general map display result determination table 135 is referred to based on numerical data indicating the random number MR5 for determining the general map display result included in the reserved data read from the general map storage unit 591C. To determine the normal map display result. Here, in the general map display result determination table 135, when the time reduction flag is on, the ratio of the decision to make the general map display result “per map” is higher than when the time reduction flag is off. As described above, the determined value is assigned to the normal map display result. As a result, when the time reduction control is performed in the special game state such as the probability variation state or the short time state, the normal symbol in the normal game is compared with the case where the time reduction control is not performed in the normal state or the like. Since the variable display result is likely to be “per normal figure”, the frequency of the normally variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port) to be opened increases, and the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning port. It becomes easy to do.

  In the general map display result determination process, the general map change time corresponding to the general map display result is also determined. At this time, when the time reduction flag is on, the normal time fluctuation time is set to be shorter than when the time reduction flag is off. As a result, when the time reduction control is performed in the special game state such as the probability variation state or the short time state, the interval for deriving and displaying the variable display result of the normal symbol in the general game is shortened. The interval at which the variable display result is derived and displayed is shortened, the frequency of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B (second starting winning opening) being opened is increased, and the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. It becomes easy to do. Further, in the general map display result determination process, when the general map display result is “per normal map”, the time (open time) or the time during which the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B (second start winning port) is opened You may set the frequency | count (opening frequency) made into a state. At this time, when the time reduction flag is on, the opening time and the number of times of opening are set to be larger than when the time reduction flag is off. Thereby, when the time reduction control is performed in the special game state such as the probability changing state or the short time state, the time and the number of times that the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B (second start winning opening) is in the open state are increased. The game ball easily passes (enters) the second start winning opening. It should be noted that the setting for opening the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B (second start winning opening) may be performed in the normal symbol stop process in step S172 or the normal electric accessory actuating process in step S173.

  The normal symbol variation process of step S171 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “1”. In this normal symbol variation process, the normal symbol display 20 is set to vary the normal symbol, and the elapsed time after the normal symbol starts to be varied is measured. Further, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time thus measured has reached a predetermined normal time fluctuation time.

  The normal symbol stop process in step S172 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “2”. In this normal symbol stop process, the normal symbol display 20 stops the change of the normal symbol based on the elapse of the normal symbol change time, and the fixed normal symbol which is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). ) To make settings. The ordinary electric accessory actuating process of step S173 is executed when the value of the usual process flag is “4”. In this ordinary electric accessory actuating process, the movable wing piece (left and right) provided in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B corresponding to the fact that the variable display result (the general map display result) in the general game is "per normal map". The pair of opening / closing blades) is moved from the vertical position to the tilting position, and settings for changing the normally variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port) from the closed state to the open state are performed.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of FIG. 55 as the normal symbol stop process. In this normal symbol stop process, the CPU 505 first determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) has passed as the normal symbol fixed display time (step S321). At this time, if the normal symbol fixed display time has not elapsed (step S321; No), the normal symbol stop process is terminated. Until the normal symbol fixed display time elapses, the normal symbol display 20 may perform control to stop and display (derived display) the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol.

  When the normal figure fixed display time has elapsed in step S321 (step S321; Yes), it is determined whether or not the variable symbol display result (normal figure display result) of the normal symbol is “per normal figure” (step S322). . At this time, if it is not “per normal map” but “normal map loss” (step S322; No), the general process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (step S323). The normal symbol stop process is terminated.

  If it is “per normal map” in step S322 (step S322; Yes), it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag is on (step S324). In this embodiment, when the high opening control is performed together with the time reduction control in the probability variation state or the time reduction state, the time reduction flag is set to the on state. Therefore, it is possible to specify whether or not to perform the high opening control depending on whether or not the time reduction flag is on.

  When the time reduction flag is ON in step S324 (step S324; Yes), the release pattern for high release control is selected as the usage pattern (step S325). As an example, in the opening pattern for high opening control, the accessory operation control time is 8000 ms (8.0 seconds), and the opening time for opening the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B (second start winning opening) is 2000 ms ( 2.0 seconds), the number of releases is set to 3 times. Here, it is only necessary to provide a closing time as an interval period of 1000 ms (1.0 second) between the three opening operations. When the time reduction flag is OFF in step S324 (step S324; No), the release pattern for normal release control is selected as the use pattern (step S326). As an example, in the opening pattern for normal opening control, the accessory operation control time is 500 ms (0.5 seconds), and the opening time for opening the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B (second start winning opening) is 500 ms ( 0.5 seconds), the number of releases is set to one.

  After executing either of the processes of steps S325 and S326, the accessory operation control time corresponding to the selected opening pattern is set (step S327). For example, in the process of step S327, a timer initial value corresponding to the accessory activation control time may be set in the ordinary electric accessory release control timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 593 or the like. Thereafter, the value of the normal process flag is updated to “3”, which is a value corresponding to the normal electric accessory operation process (step S328), and then the normal symbol stop process is terminated.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S173 of FIG. 55 as the normal electric accessory operating process. In this ordinary electric accessory operation process, the CPU 505 first determines whether or not the accessory operation control time has elapsed (step S341). For example, in the process of step S341, the normal electric accessory release control timer value is updated by subtracting 1 or the like, and whether or not the updated timer value matches a predetermined control end determination value (eg, “0”). What is necessary is just to determine.

  When the accessory operation control time has not elapsed in step S341 (step S341; No), it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is on (step S342). For example, in the process of step S342, after loading the switch-on buffer into a predetermined register, it is checked whether the bit value in the bit number [1] corresponding to the second start port switch 22B is “1”. Thus, it may be determined whether or not the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is turned on.

  When the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is ON in step S342 (step S342; Yes), the number of game balls that have passed (entered) the normal variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port). The second start winning count value, which is the stored value of the second starting winning counter that counts the number, is updated to add 1 (step S343). At this time, it is determined whether or not the updated second start winning count value is less than a predetermined winning upper limit value (for example, “8” or the like) (step S344).

  When the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is OFF in step S342 (step S342; No), or when the second start winning count value is less than the winning upper limit value in step S344 (step S344; Yes), for setting the normal variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning opening) to the open state or the closed state based on the setting of the normal electric accessory release control timer value, the open pattern, etc. After performing the closing setting (step S345), the ordinary electric accessory operating process is terminated. For example, in the process of step S345, when the opening time is started, output of a drive signal to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is started to close the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning opening). Change from open to open. Further, when the opening time has elapsed, the output of the drive signal to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is stopped, and the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning opening) is changed from the opened state to the closed state.

  When the second starting winning count value is equal to or greater than the winning upper limit value in step S344 (step S344; No), for example, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is configured to stop the output of the drive signal to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory. A closing setting is performed to close the (second start winning opening). As a result, when the number of game balls that have passed (entered) the second start winning opening reaches the winning upper limit value even before the time of the accessory operation control time elapses, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B (second start winning prize) Mouth) is closed.

  When the accessory actuating control time has elapsed in step S341 (step S341; Yes), after executing the processing of step S346, the second starting port abnormal winning flag is cleared and turned off (step S347). . Also, a second start port abnormal winning error invalid timer is set (step S348). For example, in the process of step S348, a timer initial value corresponding to a predetermined time (for example, 2000 ms) that becomes the second start port abnormal winning error invalid time may be set. The second starting port abnormal winning error invalid time is until the game ball that has passed (entered) immediately before the normally variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) is closed is detected by the second starting port switch 22B. It is sufficient if it is necessary time. It should be noted that even when the second start opening abnormal winning error invalid time is other than 2000 ms, the game ball that has passed (entered) immediately before the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B (second starting winning opening) is closed is second started. Other times may be used as long as they can be reliably detected by the mouth switch 22B. For example, a timer initial value corresponding to 1000 ms set in step SA28 in FIG. 44 may be set.

  After executing the process of step S348, the ordinary process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (step S349), and then the ordinary electric accessory operation process is terminated.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the CPU of the effect control microcomputer 120 is activated, and the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 58 is executed. Also in the production control microcomputer 120, the security check process may be executed by the CPU when the power is turned on or the system is reset, and the production control microcomputer 120 may be in the security mode. In this case, after it is determined in the security check process that no unauthorized changes have been made to the ROM, after the security time has elapsed, the process shifts to a user mode in which execution of the effect control main process is started. That's fine. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 58 is started, the CPU of the effect control microcomputer 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S401) and is built in or externally attached to the effect control microcomputer 120. The RAM is cleared, various initial values are set, and the register of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the microcomputer 120 for effect control is set.

  Thereafter, the effect random number update process is executed (step S402), and numerical data indicating random values counted by a random counter provided in the RAM of the effect control microcomputer 120 as various random values used for effect control. Is updated by software. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S403). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) elapses based on the CTC register setting in the effect control microcomputer 120, for example.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt may be an interrupt generated when the received data is full in the serial communication circuit included in the production control microcomputer 120, for example. Alternatively, when a signal line for transmitting an effect control INT signal is wired between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12, an interrupt is generated when the effect control INT signal is turned on. Also good. In response to the occurrence of such an interrupt, the CPU of the production control microcomputer 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt prohibition state is used, an interrupt prohibition instruction (DI It is desirable to issue an order). The CPU of the effect control microcomputer 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt due to reception data full or an interrupt due to the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, communication data stored in a communication data register or the like provided corresponding to the serial communication circuit of the effect control microcomputer 120 is fetched. Alternatively, in the command reception interrupt process, a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 18 among the input ports included in the PIP or the like included in the effect control microcomputer 120. A control signal that becomes an effect control command may be captured. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM of the effect control microcomputer 120, for example. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the CPU of the effect control microcomputer 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is off in step S403 (step S403; No), the process returns to step S402. On the other hand, if the timer interrupt flag is on in step S403 (step S403; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S404), and command analysis processing is executed (step S405). . In the command analysis process executed in step S405, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S405, an effect control process is executed (step S406). In the effect control process, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a lighting operation in the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are performed. With respect to the control content of the effect operation using the (effect device), determination, determination, setting, and the like according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 are performed. After performing the effect control process, the notification control process is performed (step S407), and the process returns to step S402.

  In the notification control process in step S407, for example, when an abnormal winning notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, a predetermined notification screen such as an abnormality notification screen as shown in FIG. 59 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Or a predetermined warning lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, a predetermined warning sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a combination of some or all of these is received. What is necessary is just to alert | report that there was a start winning by abnormal passing of a game ball (entrance) in the ball | bowl apparatus 6B (2nd start winning opening).

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S404 in FIG. 58 as effect control command analysis processing. In this effect control command analysis process, the CPU of the effect control microcomputer 120 first determines whether or not a first start opening winning designation command has been received (step S551). For example, the effect control command received on the side of the effect control board 12 is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer. It is only necessary to be able to identify the effect control command.

  When it is determined in step S551 that the first start opening winning designation command has been received (step S551; Yes), display update setting corresponding to the first starting opening winning is set (step S552). For example, in the process of step S552, one of the display parts corresponding to the first start winning opening that is not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H provided in the display area of the image display device 5 is displayed in the first place. A display setting for changing to blue display may be performed in accordance with the establishment of the first start condition by detecting the game ball that has passed (entered) the 1 start winning opening.

  Following the processing of step S552, for example, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice fluctuation count value, which is the stored value of the continuous notice fluctuation counter provided in a predetermined area in the RAM of the effect control microcomputer 120, is “0”. (Step S553). Here, the continuous notice variation counter is informed of the winning time per hour determination and the specific pattern common range by the first starting port winning designation command and the second starting port winning designation command transmitted from the main board 11. Sometimes, the total number of reserved memories and the second special figure reserved memory number after the start winning are set, and the decorative symbols are variably displayed corresponding to the start of the execution of the special figure game until the count value becomes “0”. It is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time it is started. Therefore, when the continuous notice variation count value is other than “0”, the variable storage in which the winning time determination is made or the variable display in the specific pattern common range is included in the stored storage information.

  When the continuous notice variation count value is other than “0” in step S553 (step S553; No), the winning storage time determination or the determination within the specific pattern common range is performed on the stored storage information based on the start winning that has occurred previously. Therefore, the effect control command analysis process is terminated. When the continuous notice variation count value is “0” in step S553 (step S553; Yes), for example, whether or not the winning time determination is notified by reading the EXT data in the first start opening winning designation command or the like. Is determined (step S554). At this time, if the winning time determination is not notified (step S554; No), it is determined whether it is notified that it is within the specific pattern common range (step S555).

  If it is not notified in step S555 that it is within the specific pattern common range (step S555; No), the effect control command analysis process is terminated. When the winning time determination is notified in step S554 (step S554; Yes), or when it is notified in step S555 that it is within the specific pattern common range (step S555; Yes), for example, production control The continuous notice flag provided in a predetermined area or the like in the RAM of the microcomputer 120 is set to the on state (step S556).

  After the process of step S556 is executed, the total reserved storage number after the start winning is set as the continuous notice variation count value (step S557), and the effect control command analysis process is terminated. When the special figure game using the second special figure is executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure, the total number of reserved memories is set to the continuous notice fluctuation count value in the process of step S557. By setting, it is possible to specify the number of variable displays that are executed before the variable display based on the stored information that has been determined per winning time or determined within the specific pattern common range is executed. The total reserved memory number only needs to be specified, for example, by reading the EXT data of the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11.

  When it is determined in step S551 that the first start opening winning designation command has not been received (step S551; No), it is determined whether or not the second starting opening winning designation command has been received (step S558). And when it determines with having received the 2nd start opening winning designation | designated command (step S558; Yes), the setting of the display update corresponding to the 2nd starting opening winning is performed (step S559). For example, in the process of step S559, one of the display parts corresponding to the second start winning opening that is not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H provided in the display area of the image display device 5 is displayed in the first place. The display setting for changing to red display may be performed in accordance with the establishment of the second start condition by detecting the game ball that has passed (entered) the 2 start winning opening.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S559, whether or not the continuous notice fluctuation count value is “0”, that is, determination of winning storage per time based on the stored winning information based on the start winning that has occurred or determination within the common range of the specific pattern. It is determined whether or not has been made (step S560). At this time, if the continuous notice variation count value is other than “0” (step S560; No), the effect control command analysis process is terminated. When the special figure game using the second special figure is executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure, the first special figure to be notified by the continuous notice effect is used. If the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the special game using the second special figure is executed before the special figure game is started, This causes a shift in the variable display. Therefore, even when the continuous notice fluctuation count value is other than “0” in the process of step S560, as in the case where the continuous notice fluctuation count value exceeds the second special figure holding memory number, the winning time per time determination is made. If the reserved storage information that has been determined within the specific pattern common range is based on the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening, for example, the continuous notice variation count value is cleared and “ After the initialization to “0”, the process may proceed to step S561.

  When the continuous notice variation count value is “0” in step S560 (step S560; No), for example, whether or not the winning time per hour determination is notified by reading the EXT data in the second start opening winning designation command or the like. Is determined (step S561). At this time, if the winning time determination is not notified (step S561; No), it is determined whether or not it is notified that it is within the specific pattern common range (step S562).

  If it is not notified in step S562 that it is within the specific pattern common range (step S562; No), the effect control command analysis process is terminated. When the winning time determination is notified in step S561 (step S561; Yes), or when it is notified in step S562 that it is within the specific pattern common range (step S562; Yes), the continuous notice flag Is set to the ON state (step S563).

  After executing the process of step S563, after setting the second special figure holding memory number after the start winning prize as the continuous notice variation count value (step S564), the effect control command analysis process is ended. When the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, the number of the second special figure reservation memory is continuously changed in the process of step S564. By setting the count value, it is possible to specify the number of variable displays to be executed before the variable display based on the pending storage information that has been determined per winning time or determined within the specific pattern common range. The second special figure reserved storage number only needs to be specified based on, for example, the difference between the reception number of the second start opening winning designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the reception number of the second variation start command. For example, the second special figure hold specific count value, which is the stored value of the second special figure hold specific counter, is updated so as to be incremented by 1 every time the second start opening winning designation command is received, and the second variation start command is received. It is only necessary to update so that 1 is subtracted every time so that the second special figure reserved memory number can be specified.

  When it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "surprise", or when the special figure display result is "small hit", the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big hit When EXT data different from that determined to be “non-probable change” or “probable change” is set in the first start opening winning designation command or the like, the jackpot type is set to “non-probable change” or “probability change”. When it is determined that it will be, the setting such as setting the continuous notice flag to the ON state (setting for executing the continuous notice effect) is performed, while when it is determined that the big hit type is “surprise” or a special figure display When it is determined that the result is “small hit”, the setting for executing the continuous notice effect may not be performed. As a result, it is controlled to a two-round big hit state or a small hit game state in which it is difficult for the player to obtain a prize ball while maintaining a high expectation that the special notice display result will be “big hit” by executing the continuous notice effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the decline of the game entertainment interest.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S406 of FIG. 58 as the effect control process. In this effect control process, the CPU of the effect control microcomputer 120 performs the following steps S180 to S186 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM of the effect control microcomputer 120, for example. Select one of the processes to execute.

  The decorative symbol variation start waiting process in step S180 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. In the decorative symbol variation start waiting process, the image display device 5 depends on whether one of the first variation start command and the second variation start command is received as the variation start command transmitted from the main board 11. Including a process for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area It is. At this time, if it is determined to start variable display, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The decorative symbol variation setting process in step S181 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this decorative symbol variation setting process, the start of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the start of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to perform various production operations including variable display of decorative symbols, the final decorative symbols and temporary stop symbols that are the final stop symbols according to the variation pattern and variable display results, etc. And a process of selecting and setting one of a plurality of types of effect control patterns prepared in advance as usage patterns according to the determination result. After such determination and setting are performed, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”.

  The decorative pattern changing process in step S182 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the decorative symbol variation processing, for example, an effect control pattern to be used corresponding to a value of an effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in the RAM of the effect control microcomputer 120 or the like A process for reading out various control data from, and performing various effects control during variable display of decorative symbols is included. Then, for example, the decoration control process timer value becomes a predetermined variable display end value (for example, “0”), or the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. A final decorative symbol as a final stop symbol that is a variable display result of the symbol is displayed in a completely stopped state. If the effect control process timer value is set to the variable display end value and the fixed decorative symbol is displayed in a completely stopped state, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed. Sometimes, without depending on the effect control command from the main board 11, it is possible to determine and display the variable display result by autonomously deriving and displaying the determined decorative symbol on the effect control board 12 side. When the finalized decorative symbol is displayed as a complete stop, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The decorative symbol variation end process in step S183 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. This decoration symbol variation end process includes a process of determining whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. At this time, if it is determined that the hit start designation command has been received, the value of the rendering process flag is updated to “4” when the variable display result specified from the hit start designation command is “big hit”. Is done. On the other hand, when the variable display result specified from the hit start designation command is “small hit”, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”. Further, when a predetermined time has elapsed without receiving the hit start designation command, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” in response to the variable display result being “lost”.

  The effect process during the big hit control in step S184 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In the effect processing during the big hit control, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” or the like is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Or by outputting sound number data to the sound control board 13 and outputting sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, and turning on the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED by outputting an electric decoration signal to the lamp control board 14 This includes processing for controlling various performance operations in the big hit gaming state such as turning off / off / flashing. Then, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6” in response to receiving a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

  The effect process during small hit control in step S185 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In the effect process during the small hit control, for example, an effect control pattern is set in response to the variable display result being “small hit”, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed on the image display device 5. Displaying in the area, outputting sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the sound number data to the sound control board 13, and outputting the electric decoration signal to the lamp control board 14 for the game effect lamp 9 and decoration Processing for controlling various performance operations in the small hit gaming state such as turning on / off / flashing the LED is included. Then, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6” in response to receiving a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

  The ending effect process in step S186 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this ending effect process, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. In addition, sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the sound number data to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are turned on / off by outputting an electric decoration signal to the lamp control board 14. This includes processing for controlling various performance operations corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, such as blinking / flashing. Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to “0” in response to the completion of the production operation.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S181 shown in FIG. 61 as the decorative symbol variation setting processing. In this decorative pattern variation setting process, the CPU of the production control microcomputer 120 first reads the EXT data in the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and the special figure display result is “lost”. It is determined whether or not (step S601). At this time, if it is determined that the special figure display result is “lost” (step S601; Yes), it is designated by reading the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example. It is determined whether or not the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to a case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” (step S602).

  If it is determined in step S602 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S602; Yes), a combination of fixed decorative symbols that is the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination is determined (step S603). As an example, in the process of step S603, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like built in the effect control microcomputer 120 is extracted, and the effect control microcomputer 120 is extracted. By referring to a predetermined left determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM or the like, the left that is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 among the determined decorative symbols. Determine the final decorative pattern. Next, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like is extracted, and a predetermined decorative symbol is determined by referring to a predetermined right determined symbol determining table stored in advance in a ROM or the like. Among them, the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table or the like. Subsequently, by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining the medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like and referring to a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in a ROM or the like, the fixed decorative symbol is Among them, the medium fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined.

  When it is determined in step S602 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S602; No), a combination of a confirmed decorative symbol that is a final stop symbol constituting a reach combination is determined (step S604). As an example, in the process of step S604, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a left / right fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like built in the effect control microcomputer 120 is extracted, and the effect control microcomputer 120 is extracted. The left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 among the determined decorative symbols by referring to a predetermined left / right determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM or the like. The decorative symbols having the same symbol number that are stopped and displayed are determined. Further, by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining the medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like and referring to a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in a ROM or the like, Among them, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. Here, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, an arbitrary value (For example, “1”) may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol so that the finalized decorative symbol is not the jackpot combination but the reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol, a difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-decorated decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in step S601 that the special figure display result is not “lost” (step S601; No), the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, or the special figure display It is determined whether the result is “small hit” or other cases (step S605). At this time, if it is determined that the big hit type is “surprise” or the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S605; Yes), one of a plurality of predetermined two-time open chances, A combination of determined decorative symbols that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the case where the big hit type is “surprise” or the special symbol display result is “small hit” is determined (step S606). As an example, in response to a case where any one of the fluctuation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3 is designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command (see FIG. 25), any one of a plurality of types of second-open chances is selected. The combination of the finalized decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols to be configured is determined. In this case, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the chance index updated by a random counter or the like incorporated in the effect control microcomputer 120 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM or the like of the effect control microcomputer 120. By referring to a predetermined chance eye determination table, a combination of the determined decorative symbols constituting any of a plurality of types of second chances of opening may be determined. Further, when either the variation pattern PC1-4 or the variation pattern PC1-5 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, for example, by executing the same process as in step S604, the final stop symbols constituting the reach combination What is necessary is just to determine the combination of the definite design which becomes.

  When it is determined in step S605 that the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probability change” or “probability change” other than “probability” (step S605; No), the final stop constituting the big hit combination A combination of the determined decorative symbols to be symbols is determined (step S607). As an example, in the process of step S607, first, numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the big hit fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like incorporated in the production control microcomputer 120 is extracted, and the production control microcomputer 120 is used. By referring to a predetermined jackpot fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM or the like, “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, A decorative symbol having the same symbol number that is stopped and displayed in line with 5R is determined.

  After executing any of the processes of steps S603, S604, S606, and S607, settings for executing variable display effects such as “pseudo-continuous” and “slip” are performed (step S608). For example, in the process of step S608, variable display effects such as “pseudo-continuous” and “slip” are executed in accordance with the variation pattern specified by reading the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not. At this time, if it is determined that the variable display effect of “pseudo train” or “slip” is to be executed, the variable display effect of “pseudo train” is temporarily stopped and displayed as one of a plurality of types of pseudo train chances. And the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the variable display effect of “slip” are determined.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S608, settings for executing the probability change promotion effect are performed (step S609). For example, in the process of step S609, whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect when the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change”, and the re-lottery in the case of execution A re-lottery effect pattern or the like corresponding to the effect mode of the effect may be determined. Further, in the process of step S609, whether or not the promotion effect during the big hit is executed when the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change”. A jackpot middle promotion effect pattern or the like corresponding to the effect mode of the middle promotion effect may be determined.

  After executing the process of step S609, a continuous notice setting process is executed (step S610). Subsequently, the effect control pattern is determined as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S611). At this time, for example, corresponding to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command or the like, any one of a plurality of special figure variation production control patterns is selected and set as a use pattern. Also, a plurality of special-figure fluctuation effect control prepared corresponding to the setting of the variable display effect in step S608, the setting of the probability change promotion effect (particularly the re-lottery effect) in step S609, and the setting of the continuous notice effect in step S610. Any one of the patterns may be selected and set as a use pattern.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S611, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer incorporated in the effect control microcomputer 120 is set in accordance with the change pattern indicated in the change pattern designation command (step S612). And the setting for starting the fluctuation | variation of the decoration design in the image display apparatus 5 is performed (step S613). At this time, for example, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the special-figure variation effect control pattern determined as the use pattern in step S611 is transmitted to the VDP 121, etc. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation processing (step S614), and the decorative symbol variation setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S610 of FIG. 62 as the continuous notice setting processing. In the continuous notice setting process, the CPU of the production control microcomputer 120 first determines whether or not the continuous notice flag is on (step S701). At this time, if the continuous notice flag is off (step S701; No), the continuous notice setting process is terminated.

  When the continuous notice flag is on in step S701 (step S701; Yes), the continuous notice fluctuation count value is updated to be subtracted by 1 (step S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the updated continuous notice fluctuation count value has become “0” (step S703). At this time, if the continuous notice fluctuation count value is “0” (step S703; Yes), the continuous notice flag is cleared and turned off (step S704), and then the continuous notice setting process is terminated. Note that even when the continuous notice fluctuation count value becomes “0” in step S703, determination or setting for executing the continuous notice effect may be performed. In step S703, the continuous notice fluctuation count value becomes “0” when the variable display of the decorative symbol to be notified of the possibility that the special figure display result becomes “big hit” by the continuous notice effect is started. It is. Therefore, by performing determination and setting for executing the continuous notice effect at this time as well, the continuous notice effect can be executed even during the variable display of the decorative symbol to be notified.

  When the continuous notice fluctuation count value is other than “0” in step S703 (step S703; No), it is determined whether or not the continuous notice fluctuation count value is “3” or more (step S705). When the continuous notice variation count value is “3” or more (step S705; Yes), the continuous notice effect of the notice effect YD1 is determined from among a plurality of kinds of effect forms (effect contents) prepared in advance. (Step S706), the continuous notice setting process is terminated.

  When the continuous notice fluctuation count value is less than “3” in step S705 (step S705; No), it is determined whether or not the continuous notice fluctuation count value is “2” (step S707). Then, when the continuous notice variation count value is “2” (step S707; Yes), it is determined as a continuous notice effect of the notice effect YD2 among a plurality of types of effect modes (effect contents) prepared in advance ( In step S708, the continuous notice setting process is terminated.

  When the continuous notice variation count value is not “2” in step S707 (step S707; No), corresponding to the fact that the continuous notice variation count value is “1”, a plurality of types of effect forms (effect contents). Among them, after determining to be the continuous notice effect of the notice effect YD3 (step S709), the continuous notice setting process is ended.

  Thus, after the continuous notice flag is turned on based on the winning time determination or the notification of the specific pattern common range, the continuous notice effect is executed until the continuous notice fluctuation count value becomes “0”. be able to. In addition, when the winning time determination or notification within the specific pattern common range is notified, it is not limited to the case where the continuous notice effect is always executed, and it is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect is executed at a predetermined rate. You may do it. As an example, when the winning time determination is notified, it may be determined to execute the continuous notice effect at a higher rate than when the specific pattern common range is notified. Further, even when the winning time determination or the specific pattern common range is not notified, it may be determined that the continuous notice effect is executed at a predetermined rate. In this case, it may be determined that the continuous notice effect is to be executed at a different rate depending on whether or not the winning time determination or the specific pattern common range is notified. As an example, when notification per winning time or within a specific pattern common range is notified, it may be determined that the continuous notice effect is executed at a higher rate than when these are not notified.

  In the continuous notice setting process shown in FIG. 63, until the variable display of the decorative symbol to be notified of the possibility that the special figure display result becomes “big hit” by the continuous notice effect indicated by the continuous notice variation count value is started. Depending on the remaining number of special figure games to be executed, the continuous notice effect of different effect modes (effect contents) is determined. On the other hand, regardless of the remaining number of times of the special figure game (continuous notice variation count value) that is executed until the variable display of the decorative symbol to be notified is started, the same effect mode (effect content) is obtained. The notice effect may be determined to be executed as a continuous notice effect. Moreover, you may make it vary the determination ratio of the production | presentation aspect (production content) in a continuous notice production | presentation according to which was notified among winning determination and specific pattern common range. As an example, when a winning time determination is notified, a specific effect mode (for example, a notice effect that notifies a message of “It's intense heat!”) At a higher rate than when the specific pattern common range is notified It may be determined as follows.

  Continuous notice effects over a plurality of variable displays may be determined collectively. As an example, a plurality of continuous notice effect patterns showing the effect mode (effect contents) corresponding to each of multiple variable displays are prepared in advance, and the total is obtained when the winning time determination or the specific pattern common range is notified. Any continuous notice effect pattern may be determined based on the number of reserved memories. In this case, the determination ratio for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect may be varied depending on the total number of reserved memories. For example, when the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, it may be determined that the continuous notice effect is executed at a higher rate than when the total number is less than the predetermined number.

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S182 of FIG. 61 as the decorative symbol variation process. In this decorative pattern changing process, the CPU of the effect control microcomputer 120 updates the effect control process timer value (for example, 1) (step S621), and then uses the updated effect control process timer value as the effect control pattern. Is compared with the production control process timer determination value indicated by (2), it is determined whether or not it matches any one of the timer determination values (step S622).

  If the timer judgment value is matched in step S622 (step S622; Yes), the presentation control execution data (for example, display control data, voice control data, etc.) stored in the presentation control pattern in association with the timer judgment value. The lamp control data, a part or all of the operation detection control data) or the end code is read (step S623). Here, when the plurality of timer determination values indicated by the effect control pattern match the effect control process timer value in step S622, the plurality of effect controls stored in association with the matched timer determination values. The execution data may be read in step S623. In step S623, it is determined whether an end code has been read (step S624). At this time, when it is determined that it is not the end code (step S624; No), after executing the effect control command process for controlling the effect operation according to the effect control execution data read in step S623. (Step S625), the decorative symbol variation processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S624 that it is an end code (step S624; Yes), for example, by setting a predetermined timer initial value in the effect control process timer, the hit start designation command reception waiting time is set. This is performed (step S626). Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3” that is a value corresponding to the process at the end of decoration symbol variation (step S627), and then the process during decoration symbol variation is terminated. Thus, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the decorative symbol variation end process is executed, and if the hit start designation command is not received before the hit start designation command reception waiting time elapses, the effect process flag is cleared, The value is initialized to “0”. On the other hand, if a hit start designation command is received before the hit start designation command reception waiting time elapses, effect control is performed depending on whether the special figure display result is “small hit” or “big hit”. When the process flag value is updated to “4” (when the special figure display result is “big hit”) or “5” (when the special figure display result is “small hit”), the small hit or big hit It is only necessary that the production operation is controlled.

  In addition, when it does not match any of the timer determination values in step S622 (step S622; No), the decorative symbol changing process is ended. However, if it is determined that the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received after executing the process of step S622 or before executing the process of step S622, the process proceeds to step S626. The decorative symbol variation end process may be executed when the next timer interrupt occurs.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S625 shown in FIG. 64 as the effect control command processing. In this effect control command process, the CPU of the effect control microcomputer 120 specifies the type of effect control execution data read out in the process of step S623 shown in FIG. 64 (step S721). At this time, it is only necessary to specify which control data is included among the display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, and operation detection control data included in the presentation control execution data.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the specified effect control execution data is display control data (step S722). At this time, if it is determined that the data is display control data (step S722; Yes), a setting for sending a display control command designated by the display control data to the VDP 121 or the like is performed (step S723).

  When it is determined in step S722 that the display control data is not (step S722; No), after executing the process of step S723, it is determined whether or not the specified effect control execution data is audio control data. (Step S724). At this time, when it is determined that it is voice control data (step S724; Yes), a sound effect signal corresponding to the sound number data designated by the voice control data is sent to the voice control board 13. Setting is performed (step S725).

  When it is determined in step S724 that the data is not voice control data (step S724; No), after the process of step S725 is executed, it is determined whether or not the specified effect control execution data is lamp control data. (Step S726). At this time, if it is determined that the data is lamp control data (step S726; Yes), a setting is made to send an illumination signal designated by the lamp control data to the lamp control board 14 (step S727). ).

  When it is determined in step S726 that the data is not lamp control data (step S726; No), after executing the process of step S727, it is determined whether or not the specified effect control execution data is operation detection control data. Determination is made (step S728). At this time, when it is determined that it is not the operation detection control data (step S728; No), the effect control command process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation detection control data is determined (step S728; Yes), based on the operation detection control data, a predetermined instruction operation (for example, a pressing operation or the like) for the player's operation button or the like. ) Is effectively detected, and it is determined whether or not it is an effective detection period in which the effect operation can be switched according to the detection result (step S729). For example, in each of the continuous notice effects of the notice effect YD1 to the notice effect YD3, the period from when the effect image prompting the instruction operation to the operation button is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until the predetermined time elapses is the effective detection period. As described above, the operation detection control data associated with a predetermined production control process timer determination value may be set in advance.

  If it is determined in step S729 that it is the valid detection period (step S729; Yes), after performing the effect control based on the detection result of the instruction operation on the operation button (step S730), the effect control command process is performed. finish. For example, in the process of step S730, based on an operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button to the effect control board 12, it is determined whether a predetermined instruction operation (for example, a pressing operation) for the operation button has been detected. And when instruction operation with respect to an operation button is detected, the setting for changing the production content etc. should just be performed according to the detection result.

  If it is determined in step S729 that it is not the valid detection period (step S729; No), other operation detection control based on the operation detection control data is performed (step S731), and the effect control command process is terminated. To do. For example, in the process of step S731, based on the operation detection control data, a setting may be made to limit the effective detection period so that an instruction operation or the like by the player is not detected thereafter.

  Hereinafter, a specific operation example in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B are executed, Corresponding to the variable display of special symbols in these special symbol games, the ornaments are displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R included in the display area of the image display device 5. Variable display of symbols is executed. And, for example, based on the variable display result in a special game such as a fixed special symbol or the variable display result of a decorative symbol such as a combination of fixed decorative symbols, a predetermined game value such as being controlled to a big hit gaming state is given. It becomes possible. The game value that can be imparted by the pachinko gaming machine 1 is advantageous to a player who is controlled to the big hit game state and the game winning ball is easy to enter (win) by changing the big prize opening from the closed state to the open state. What is necessary is just to be in a state or to generate a right to be in an advantageous state for the player. In addition, for example, the maximum number of rounds that can be executed in the big hit gaming state, the upper limit number of special figure games that can be executed in the short time state, the big hit probability in the probability variation state, and control to the big hit gaming state without being controlled in the normal state Arbitrary items related to the degree of advantage of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the number of consecutive times that is the number of times played reaches a predetermined number, or some or all of these can be the gaming value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A, or the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is formed. When a game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening is detected by the second start opening switch 22B, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result based on the numerical data read in step S506 of FIG. Alternatively, using the random value MR2 for determining the variation pattern type extracted in step S508, a winning random number determination process is executed in step S205 or step S210 shown in FIG.

  In the winning random number determination process, when it is determined in step S525 in FIG. 49 that the special figure display result determination random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range (step S525; Yes), step S527 is performed. Based on the transmission setting, the first start opening winning designation command for notifying the winning time determination is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, when it is determined in step S531 in FIG. 49 that the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is within the big hit determination range (step S531; Yes), the transmission setting in step S533 is performed. Based on this, the second start opening winning designation command for notifying the winning time determination is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  The effect control board 12 turns on the continuous notice flag when it is determined in step S551 in FIG. 60 that the first start opening winning designation command has been received, and in step S554 that the winning time determination is notified. The state is set (step S556), and the continuous notice fluctuation count value is set (step S557). In addition, when it is determined in step S558 that the second start opening winning designation command has been received and it is determined in step S561 that the winning time determination is notified, the continuous notice flag is set to ON ( In step S563), a continuous notice fluctuation count value is set (step S564). By setting the continuous notice fluctuation count value in this way, the variable display holding position (holding number) in which the variable display result becomes “big hit” due to the random value MR1 being within the big hit determination range or the like is specified. be able to.

  Thereafter, it is determined in step S701 of FIG. 63 that the continuous notice flag is on (step S701; Yes), and when it is determined that the updated continuous notice fluctuation count value is not “0” (step S703; No). ), The continuous notice effect of the effect mode (effect contents) corresponding to the continuous notice fluctuation count value is determined (steps S705 to S709).

  FIG. 66 shows an example of a display operation when a continuous notice effect based on the fact that the notice effect YD1 is determined in step S706 of FIG. 63 is executed. In this display operation example, first, as shown in FIG. 66 (A), for example, in response to the start of variation of special symbols in a special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas are displayed. As shown in FIG. 66 (B), the decorative symbols that have been stopped and displayed at 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. Start fluctuation. Thereafter, for example, in accordance with the display control data read out from the effect control pattern for the continuous notice effect determined in the process of step S611 shown in FIG. 62, as shown in FIG. Effect image YH11 is displayed. When the player performs an instruction operation on the operation button within the validity detection period and the operation detection signal transmitted to the effect control board 12 is turned on accordingly, for example, FIG. 66 (D) An effect image YH21 showing the lines of the character image as shown is displayed. This effect image YH21 shows a character string for notifying the occurrence of super reach such as “super reach may”. On the other hand, when the instruction operation for the operation button is not performed within the validity detection period, for example, the effect image YH11 is erased as shown in FIG. . After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (F), the decorative symbol variable display proceeds, such as temporarily displaying the decorative symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L.

  FIG. 67 shows a display operation example when the continuous notice effect based on the fact that the notice effect YD2 is determined in step S708 of FIG. 63 is executed. In this display operation example, as shown in FIGS. 67A to 67C, display operations similar to those in FIGS. 66A to 66C are performed. Thereafter, when the player performs an instruction operation on the operation button within the validity detection period, for example, as shown in FIG. 67 (D), an effect image YH22 different from the effect image YH21 shown in FIG. 66 (D) is displayed. By displaying the information, notification is performed in an effect mode (effect content) different from the case of the notice effect YD1. This effect image YH22 shows a character string that suggests that the reach is close, such as “Is it soon reach?”. If no instruction operation is performed on the operation button within the valid detection period, as shown in FIG. 67 (E), the same rendering operation control as in FIG. 66 (E) may be performed. The subsequent display operation may be controlled in the same manner as in FIG. 66 (F) as shown in FIG. 67 (F).

  FIG. 68 shows an example of a display operation when a continuous notice effect based on the fact that the notice effect YD3 is determined in step S709 in FIG. 63 is executed. In this display operation example, as shown in FIGS. 68A to 68C, the same display operation as in FIGS. 66A to 66C is performed. Thereafter, when the player performs an instruction operation on the operation button within the validity detection period, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (D), the effect image YH21 shown in FIG. 66 (D) or FIG. 67 (D). For example, by displaying an effect image YH23 different from the effect image YH22 shown, notification is made in an effect mode (effect content) different from the case of the notice effect YD1 and the notice effect YD2. The effect image YH23 shows a character string that suggests that the occurrence of super reach such as “Looking to become super reach next time” is even closer. When an instruction operation on the operation button is not performed within the valid detection period, as shown in FIG. 68 (E), it is only necessary to perform the same rendering operation control as in FIG. 66 (E). The subsequent display operation may be controlled in the same manner as in FIG. 66 (F), as shown in FIG. 68 (F).

  In the display operation examples shown in FIG. 66 to FIG. 68, as the continuous notice effect corresponding to the notice effect YD1 to the notice effect YD3, the notice effect that notifies a predetermined message when an instruction operation on the operation button is performed is executed. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, as long as a continuous notice effect that notifies the possibility that the special figure display result will be a “big hit” in any effect form (effect content) may be executed. As an example, a notice effect that notifies a predetermined message without requiring an instruction operation on the operation button may be executed as a continuous notice effect corresponding to the notice effect YD1 to the notice effect YD3. As another example, by changing the display mode (for example, display color, display shape, character, etc.) of the reserved storage in the start winning storage display area 5H, it may be executed as a continuous notice effect over a plurality of variable displays.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is within the range of “230” to “251”, it is determined that it is within the specific pattern common range, and steps S528 to S530 are performed. The first start opening winning designation command indicating whether or not the specific pattern is within the specific pattern common range is transmitted by the processing of step S534 to S536. 2 Start opening winning designation command is transmitted. On the other hand, a plurality of threshold values for determining whether or not a specific variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern with super reach) is provided, and which threshold value is used to determine a specific variation pattern or not. Depending on whether or not is determined, a different first start opening prize designation command or second start opening prize designation command may be transmitted.

  As an example, even when it is determined in step S525 or step S531 shown in FIG. 49 that the random value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, a random pattern MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is used to determine a specific variation pattern. You may make it determine whether it is determined. In this case, when it is determined in step S525 or step S531 that the random value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, the jackpot type determination table 131 is referred to based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit type is determined as “non-probable change” or “probability change”. When the big hit type is determined to be “non-probability change” or “probability change”, the variation pattern type CA3-3 (for example, including a variation pattern with super reach) is used by using the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. 26). In the setting example of the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 133A shown in FIG. 29A, when the jackpot type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”, at least a part of the determination value corresponding to the change pattern type CA3-3 is used. By determining whether or not the random number MR3 matches any of the set identical determination values “100” to “251”, it is possible to determine whether or not the variation pattern with super reach is determined. . Therefore, when the big hit type is determined to be “non-probability change” or “probability change”, the random determination value MR3 matches any of the same determination values “100” to “251” different from the case where the variable display result is “losing”. It is determined whether or not it is within the range of the specific pattern common range. And when it determines with it being in a specific pattern common range, the 1st start opening from which the EXT data differs from the 1st start opening winning designation command and the 2nd starting opening winning designation command set in Step S529 or Step S535 The transmission setting of the winning designation command or the second start opening winning designation command may be performed.

  The threshold value that defines the common range of the specific pattern when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is determined as “non-probable change” or “probable change” and when the variable display result is determined as “losing”. For example, even when the variable display result is “losing”, the threshold value that defines the specific pattern common range is set according to the number of special figure reserved memories (total number of reserved memories) and the gaming state. You may make it differ. Even in such a case, the first start port winning designation command and the second starting port winning designation command are set to be transmitted depending on which threshold value is used to determine whether or not the specific variation pattern is used. do it.

  For example, by executing the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 49, the first starting opening winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command for notifying the determination per winning time or within the specific pattern common range are the main board 11. To the effect control board 12. On the other hand, a range of values that can be taken by the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type (specifically, a range of “0” to “251”) is divided into a plurality of extraction value ranges in advance. Depending on which extracted value range the random value MR3 extracted in the process of step S508 shown in FIG. 48 is, a different first start opening prize designation command or second start opening prize designation command is transmitted. It may be. As an example, among the ranges “0” to “251”, the range “230” to “251” is the first extraction value range, the range “225” to “229” is the second extraction value range, The range of “220” to “224” is set as the third extraction value range. In this case, for example, in the processing of step S528 and step S534 shown in FIG. 49, it is determined in which extraction value range the random value for determining the variation pattern type is included. Then, the setting of the EXT data in the first start opening winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command may be made different according to the determination result of the extraction value range. On the side of the effect control board 12, determination as to whether or not a specific variation pattern is obtained according to the extraction value range specified from the EXT data of the first start opening winning designation command or the second starting opening winning designation command, etc. Can be done.

  In step S140 of FIG. 46, when the special symbol normal process as shown in FIG. 51 is executed and it is determined in step S221 that the second reserved storage count value is “0” (step S221; Yes), in step S223, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage count value is “0”. Accordingly, the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure. In addition, when the big hit gaming state based on the result that the special figure display result is “big hit” is ended, based on the determination that the big hit type is “non-probable change” in step S303 of FIG. 54, In step S304, the setting for starting the control for changing the gaming state to the time-saving state is performed, and the time-saving flag is set to the on state. If it is determined in step S303 that the big hit type is “probability change” or “surprise probability”, in step S305, a setting for starting the control for changing the gaming state to the probability change state is performed. May be set to the on state. Thus, when the time reduction flag is turned on, when the high release control is started together with the time reduction control in the time reduction state or the probability change state, for example, the normal time fluctuation time in the normal game is set to a short time, The percentage of decision to make the figure display result “per normal figure” becomes high, and when the normal figure display result is “per normal figure”, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B (second start prize opening) is opened. Increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening, or combining a part or all of these, makes it easier for the game ball to pass (enter) the normal variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port). . If it is determined in step S523 in FIG. 49 that the time reduction control is being performed (step S523; Yes), in step S524, a first start opening winning designation command for notifying the big hit / short time middle winning is transmitted. For example, the execution of the determination based on the random value MR1 in step S525 is restricted.

  When the high opening control is performed in the short-time state or the probability variation state, the game ball easily passes (enters) through the normally variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port), and the first special figure is used. When the execution of the continuous notice effect is started based on the reserved memory information of the special figure game, the special figure game using the second special figure that is preferentially executed by passing (entering) the game ball to the second start winning opening By continuing to execute the variable display, it is possible to continue to execute variable display many times while holding the stored storage information in which the variable display result is “big hit”. In this case, the continuous notice effect is an effect of notifying the state in which the hold storage information whose variable display result is “big hit” is held, and the variable display result is obtained by executing the special figure game using the second special figure. Becomes a “hit” and is repeatedly controlled to the big hit gaming state, there is a possibility that the gambling of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is remarkably enhanced. In addition, while recognizing that the variable display result is “big hit” in the special game using the first special figure, the player repeatedly passes (enters) the game ball to the second start winning opening to make the second special game. Depending on whether the special figure game using the figure is repeatedly executed or the special figure game using the first special figure is executed without passing (entering) the game ball to the second start winning opening, the variable display result is “ There is a possibility that the timing at which the game is set to “big hit” and controlled to the big hit gaming state may be greatly changed depending on the skill of the player. Therefore, during the time-shortening control, the special game using the first special figure is set so that the execution of the continuous notice effect based on the detection of the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening is not started. Thus, the player can not recognize that there is a possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit”, thereby ensuring a healthy game playability.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, for example, the CPU 505 shows the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result based on the numerical data read from the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D of the random number circuit 509 in step S506 of FIG. Using the numerical data, the special figure display result is determined as “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing” in step S228 of FIG. In the random number circuit 509, for example, the random number sequence change circuit 555 changes the count value permutation RCN output from the random number generation circuit 553 based on a random number update rule set in advance by the setting of the random number sequence change setting circuit 556. A random number sequence RSN obtained by updating numerical data by a predetermined procedure is output. Based on the fact that the first start winning signal SS1 from the first start port switch 22A input to the input port P0 is turned on, the numerical data constituting the random number sequence RSN is stored in the random number value register R1D as a random value. Captured and stored. Further, based on the fact that the second start winning signal SS2 from the second start port switch 22B input to the input port P1 is turned on, the numerical data constituting the random number sequence RSN is stored in the random number value register R2D as a random value. Captured and stored.

  FIG. 69 is a timing chart for explaining the operation of the random number circuit 509. In FIG. 69A, a control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 111 mounted on the main board 11 is shown. FIG. 69B shows the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 112. Note that the various signals shown in FIG. 69 are negative logic signals that are turned off at a high level and turned on at a low level. As shown in FIGS. 69A and 69B, the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK and the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK are different from each other. It does not become an integral multiple of the other oscillation frequency.

  As shown in FIG. 69B, the random number clock RCLK falls from the high level to the low level at timings T10, T11, T12,. The random number clock RCLK is supplied to the random number external clock terminal ERC of the game control microcomputer 100 and input to the clock terminal CK in the clock flip-flop 552 provided in the random number circuit 509 shown in FIG. The clock flip-flop 552 responds to the falling edge of the random number clock RCLK input to the clock terminal CK with the latch clock RC0 fed back from the negative phase output terminal (inverted output terminal) Q bar to the D input terminal. Then, it is taken in (latched) and outputted as a random number update clock RGK from the positive phase output terminal (non-inverted output terminal) Q. As a result, the random number update clock RGK falls from the high level to the low level at the timings T10, T12, T14,..., As shown in FIG. The signal has an oscillation frequency of. For example, if the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK is 20 MHz, the oscillation frequency of the random number update clock RGK is 10 MHz. Since the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK is neither an integer multiple nor a fraction of the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK, the oscillation frequency of the random number update clock RGK is the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK. Different frequency. The random number generation circuit 553 updates the numerical data in the count value permutation RCN in response to, for example, the falling edge of the random number update clock RGK. The random number sequence change circuit 555 changes the numerical data update order in the count value permutation RCN output from the random number generation circuit 553 based on the setting of the random number update rule by the random number sequence change setting circuit 556 as a random number sequence RSN. Output. Thus, the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN is updated in response to the falling edge of the random number update clock RGK, for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (D).

  As described above, the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 112 and the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 111 are different from each other. One oscillation frequency does not become an integral multiple of the other oscillation frequency. Therefore, the oscillation frequency of the random number update clock RGK and the latch clock RC0 generated by the clock flip-flop 552 of the random number circuit 509 is ½ of the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK, but the oscillation of the control clock CCLK. The frequency and the oscillation frequency of the internal system clock SCLK that is ½ of the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK are different. In this way, the control clock CCLK, the internal system clock SCLK, and the random number update clock RGK are prevented from being synchronized. From the operation timing of the CPU 505, the random number circuit 509 generates the random number generation circuit 553 and the random number sequence change circuit 555. It becomes difficult to specify the update timing of the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN to be performed. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent aiming and the like based on the result of analyzing the update operation of the numerical data serving as the random number value in the random number circuit 509 from the operation timing of the CPU 505.

  The latch clock RC0 output from the clock flip-flop 552 is an inverted signal of the random number update clock RGK, the oscillation frequency thereof is the same as the oscillation frequency of the random number update clock RGK, and its phase is equal to the phase of the random number update clock RGK and π It differs by (= 180 °). The latch clock RC0 is branched into a latch clock RC1 and a latch clock RC2 at a branch point BR1. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 69E, each of the latch clocks RC0, RC1, and RC2 is an oscillation signal whose signal state changes in a common cycle. The latch clock RC1 is input to the clock terminal CK of the latch flip-flop 557A. The latch clock RC2 is input to the clock terminal CK of the latch flip-flop 557B.

  Thus, the oscillation frequencies of the latch clocks RC1 and RC2 generated by branching the latch clock RC0 are different from the oscillation frequencies of the control clock CCLK and the internal system clock SCLK. Therefore, it is possible to prevent synchronization between the control clock CCLK and the internal system clock SCLK and the latch clocks RC1 and RC2, and an operation in which numerical data serving as a random number value is captured by the random number circuit 509 from the operation timing of the CPU 505. It becomes difficult to specify the timing. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent aiming and the like based on the result of analyzing the operation of fetching numerical data as a random value in the random number circuit 509 from the operation timing of the CPU 505.

  In response to the falling edge of the latch clock RC1, the latch flip-flop 557A takes in (latches) the first start winning signal SS1 transmitted from the first start port switch 22A and supplied to the input port P0. Then, it is output from the output terminal Q as a start winning latch signal SL1. Then, if the capturing method in the random number latch selector 558A is designated as signal input to the input port P0, the start winning latch signal SL1 is output as the random number latch signal LL1. Thereby, for example, the latch clock RC1 falls in the first start winning signal SS1 whose signal state changes between the off state (high level) and the on state (low level) at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (F). After being taken into the latch flip-flop 557A at timings T11, T13, T15,..., A random number latch signal whose signal state changes between an off state and an on state at timings T11 and T13 as shown in FIG. LL1 is output from the random number latch selector 558A. Here, the first start winning signal SS1 transmitted from the first start opening switch 22A is turned off when the start winning of the game ball at the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected. Change to ON state. The random number latch signal LL1 output from the latch flip-flop 557A via the random number latch selector 558A is supplied to the random number value register 559A serving as the random number value register R1D, and in the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555. Used to obtain numerical data. In this way, the latch flip-flop 557A and the random number latch selector 558A acquire numerical data as a random number value using the latch clock RC1 based on the detection of the start winning of the game ball at the first start winning opening. The random number latch signal LL1 is generated separately from the case where the start winning of the game ball at the second start winning opening is detected.

  The latch flip-flop 557B captures (latches) the second start winning signal SS2 transmitted from the second start port switch 22B and supplied to the input port P1 in response to the falling edge of the latch clock RC2. Then, it is output from the output terminal Q as a start winning latch signal SL2. Then, if the capturing method in the random number latch selector 558B is designated as signal input to the input port P1, the start winning latch signal SL2 is output as the random number latch signal LL2. Thereby, for example, in the second start winning signal SS2 in which the signal state changes between the off state (high level) and the on state (low level) at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (I), the latch clock RC2 falls. After being taken into the latch flip-flop 557B at timings T11, T13, T15,..., A random number latch signal whose signal state changes between an off state and an on state at timings T13 and T15 as shown in FIG. LL2 is output from the random number latch selector 558B. Here, the second start winning signal SS2 transmitted from the second start opening switch 22B is turned off when the start winning of the game ball at the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected. Changes from ON to ON. The random number latch signal LL2 output from the latch flip-flop 557B via the random number latch selector 558B is supplied to the random number value register 559B serving as the random number value register R2D, and the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 Used to obtain numerical data. Thus, the latch flip-flop 557B and the random number latch selector 558B acquire numerical data as a random number value using the latch clock RC2 based on the detection of the start winning of the game ball at the second start winning opening. The random number latch signal LL2 is generated separately from the case where the start winning of the game ball at the first start winning opening is detected.

  In this manner, the latch flip-flop 557A and the latch flip-flop 557B each have a common cycle by branching the latch clock RC0 generated by the common clock flip-flop 552 at the branch point BR1. Using the latch clocks RC1 and RC2 whose signal states change, a start winning latch signal SL1 and a start winning latch signal SL2 for obtaining numerical data as a random value are generated. Thereby, the circuit configuration in the random number circuit 509 can be simplified, and the manufacturing cost in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be reduced.

  The random value register 559A serving as the random value register R1D receives the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 at the falling edge of the random number latch signal LL1 input from the random number latch selector 558A to the clock terminal. In response, the data is fetched (latched), and the numerical data serving as stored data is updated. The random value register 559B serving as the random value register R2D receives the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 at the falling edge of the random number latch signal LL2 input from the random number latch selector 558B to the clock terminal. In response, the data is fetched (latched), and the numerical data serving as stored data is updated.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 69 (G), when a falling edge occurs in which the random number latch signal LL1 changes from the off state to the on state at timing T11, the random number sequence change circuit 555 outputs the timing at this timing T11. As shown in FIG. 69 (H), the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN that has been read is taken into the random value register R1D and acquired as numerical data that becomes a random value. As a result, in the random value register 559A serving as the random value register R1D, the numerical data used as the random number value based on the detection of the start winning of the game ball at the first start winning opening is used as the game at the second starting winning opening. It can be acquired and stored separately from the case where the start winning of the ball is detected.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 69 (J), when a falling edge occurs in which the random number latch signal LL2 changes from the off state to the on state at timing T13, the random number sequence change circuit 555 at timing T13. As shown in FIG. 69 (K), the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN output from is taken into the random value register R2D and acquired as numerical data that becomes a random value. As a result, the random value register 559B serving as the random value register R2D, based on the detection of the start winning of the game ball at the second start winning opening, converts the numerical data used as the random number value into the game at the first starting winning opening. It can be acquired and stored separately from the case where the start winning of the ball is detected.

  Thus, the random value register 559A responds to the falling edge of the start winning latch signal SL1 generated by the latch flip-flop 557A using the latch clock RC1 and the random number latch signal LL1 output from the random number latch selector 558A. The numerical data in the random value RSN is stored. The random value register 559B is responsive to the falling edge of the start winning latch signal SL2 generated by the latch flip-flop 557B using the latch clock RC2 and the random number latch signal LL2 output from the random number latch selector 558B. The numerical data in the random number sequence RSN is stored.

  As described above, in the random number circuit 509, the clock flip-flop 552, the random number generation circuit 553, the random number sequence change circuit 555, and the like acquire numerical data that becomes a random number value based on the start winning of the game ball at the first start winning opening. Based on the combination of the latch flip-flop 557A, the random number latch selector 558A, and the random value register 559A configured as described above, and numerical data that becomes a random value based on the starting winning of the game ball at the second starting winning opening is obtained. The latch flip-flop 557B, the random number latch selector 558B, and the combination of the random value register 559B are shared. Therefore, the random number update clock RGK output from the clock flip-flop 552 and supplied to the random number generation circuit 553 and used for updating the numerical data in the count value permutation RCN and the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN is the first starting prize opening. A common random number update configuration for acquiring numerical data that is a random value based on a starting winning of a game ball and a configuration that acquires numerical data that is a random value based on a starting winning of a gaming ball at the second starting winning opening This is a clock signal. Thereby, the circuit configuration in the random number circuit 509 can be simplified, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be reduced.

  In the random number latch flag register RDFM shown in FIG. 21 (A), the operation for reading and reading numerical data in the random value register 559A serving as the random value register R1D, and the numerical data in the random value register 559B serving as the random value register R2D. The corresponding bit value changes to “0” and “1” in response to the fetch operation and read operation. FIG. 70 is a timing chart for explaining changes in the random number latch flag data RDFM0 and the random number latch flag data RDFM1 stored in the bit numbers [0] and [1] of the random number latch flag register RDFM.

  As shown in FIG. 70A, at the timing T20 when the random number latch signal LL1 and the random number latch signal LL2 fall, numerical data is taken into the random value register R1D and the random value register R2D as shown in FIG. Corresponding to this, the bit values of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 and the random number latch flag data RDFM1 change from “0” to “1” as shown in FIG. For example, when numerical data is stored in the random value register R1D in response to the random number latch signal LL1 being turned on (low level) at the timing T20, the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 is “0”. By changing from “1” to “1”, the random number latch flag corresponding to the random number value register R1D is turned on. Further, when numerical data is stored in the random value register R2D in response to the random number latch signal LL2 being turned on (low level) at the timing T20, the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM1 is “0”. By changing from “1” to “1”, the random number latch flag corresponding to the random number value register R2D is turned on.

  When the random number latch flag is turned on in this manner, storage of new numerical data in the corresponding random number value register R1D or random number value register R2D is restricted. For example, when the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 changes from “0” to “1”, the random number latch flag corresponding to the random number value register R1D is turned on, and new numerical data is stored in the random number value register R1D. Is limited. When the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM1 changes from “0” to “1”, the random number latch flag corresponding to the random number value register R2D is turned on, and new numerical data is stored in the random number value register R2D. Is limited. Therefore, the random number value register R1D and / or the random number value register R2D in which the corresponding random number latch flag is in the ON state captures numerical data corresponding to the input of the first start winning signal SS1 and / or the second starting winning signal SS2. Even when the random number latch signal LL1 and / or the random number latch signal LL2 is input, new numerical data included in the random number sequence RSN cannot be stored.

  Thus, after numerical data is temporarily stored in the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D, before the numerical data is read from the CPU 505 or the like, for example, the first start winning signal SS1 or the second start winning signal SS2 Even when the signal is erroneously turned on due to noise or the like, the numerical data already stored is updated, and it is possible to prevent inaccurate random number reading. Further, the bit values of the random value acquisition specification data RDLT0 and the random value acquisition specification data RDLT1 are intentionally set to “1” from the outside, or the first start winning signal SS1 and the second starting winning signal SS2 are set. It is also possible to prevent an illegal act such as modifying already stored numerical data by intentionally turning it on from the outside. On the other hand, when the numerical data once stored in the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D is not read from the CPU 505 or the like for a long time, the first start prize signal SS1 and the second start prize signal SS2 are thereafter normal. When the ON state is turned on, accurate numerical data corresponding to the passage (entrance) of the game ball at the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening can be stored in the random value register R1D and the random value register R2D. become unable.

  Therefore, for example, the CPU 505 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes a predetermined random value register reading process as shown in FIG. 70D when a predetermined random value reading condition is satisfied. Then, the random number value register R1D and the random number value register R2D are read to turn off the random number latch flag, thereby setting a state in which storage of new numerical data is permitted. The random number read condition is that the CPU 505 starts executing the game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the special game when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. When the number of reserved memories has reached a predetermined upper limit and invalidating the establishment of the second start condition based on the detection of a game ball that has passed (entered) the normal variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) The bit number [1] of the switch-on buffer is cleared to “0”, or a part or all of them may be included. In the operation example shown in FIG. 70, in response to the completion of the random value register reading process shown in FIG. 70B at timing T25, as shown in FIG. 70C, the random number latch flag data RDFM0 and the random number latch The bit value of the flag data RDFM1 is updated from “1” to “0”, and the corresponding random number latch flag is set to the off state.

  As an example, the CPU 505 executes a predetermined security check process or the like when the system reset of the gaming control microcomputer 100 is canceled based on the start of power supply in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and then executes a user program from the ROM 506. The control code indicating (game control game control program for game control) is read and the execution of the game control is started. At this time, the CPU 505 reads the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D and the random value register R2D by executing the process of step S56 shown in FIG. 39 as the random value register read process, and sets the corresponding random number latch flag. Turn off. In the process of step S56 shown in FIG. 39, the CPU 505 determines whether the random number latch flag is on based on the result of checking the bit values of the random number latch flag data RDFM1 and the random number latch flag data RDFM0. May be read out only. Alternatively, each random number latch flag may be turned off by reading numerical data from both the random value register R1D and the random value register R2D regardless of whether the random number latch flag is on.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, various power supply voltages gradually rise to specified values, such as the power supply voltage VSL and the power supply voltage VCC shown in FIGS. During such an increase in the power supply voltage, some of the various circuits such as the built-in circuit of the game control microcomputer 100 may operate normally, while the other components may not operate normally. As an example, when the power supply voltage is unstable, the first start prize signal SS1 and the second start prize signal SS2 are erroneously turned on, and the random number circuit 509 causes the random value register R1D and the random value register R2D to There is a possibility that numerical data is captured and stored, and the corresponding random number latch flag is turned on, which limits the storage of new numerical data. In addition, after the execution of game control by the CPU 505 or the like is started and before the switch process of step S92 shown in FIG. 41 is executed, the random number latch signal LL1 and the random number latch signal LL2 are stored in the random number value register R1D and the random number latch signal LL2 at a predetermined timing. By inputting to the random value register R2D, it is possible to perform an illegal act of obtaining numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result with the special figure display result being “big hit” and controlling it to the big hit gaming state. There is sex. As described above, when the storage of new numerical data is restricted when the random number latch flag is turned on, the game ball passes (enters) the start winning opening such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. It is possible to prevent erroneous numerical data due to noise or the like from being taken in and stored in the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D after the start prize is generated, while the power supply voltage is unstable before the start prize is generated. When numerical data is fetched and stored in the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D due to malfunction or fraud, even if a start prize is subsequently generated, it is already stored before the start prize generation timing. There is a possibility that the numerical data is acquired as a random number value and used for determining the special figure display result.

  Therefore, when the system reset in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is released and the gaming control is started, the random number latch flag is set to the off state to allow the storage of new numerical data. As a result, for example, the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D in error when the power supply voltage is unstable, such as when the power is turned on in the pachinko gaming machine 1, is acquired as a random value, and the game control It can be prevented from being used for various decisions. In addition, after the execution of the game control is started, an illegal act of inputting a random number latch signal and controlling it to the big hit game state before the state of the first start port switch 22A or the second start port switch 22B is checked. Can be prevented.

  As another example, an on-state power-off signal is output from the power supply monitoring circuit 303 mounted on the power supply board 10 based on a decrease in the predetermined power supply voltage in the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the power supply voltage VSL. The CPU 505 outputs an on-state power-off signal in step S111 of FIG. 42 (step S111; Yes), and further, after the backup monitoring timer value reaches the backup determination value in step S114, the steps S115 to S118 are performed. By executing the above process to prepare for an unstable operation or stoppage of the pachinko gaming machine 1 due to a decrease in power supply voltage, the process of step S119 is repeatedly executed until the game control microcomputer 100 enters an operation stop state. The input state of the power-off signal is repeatedly determined. Thereafter, when it is determined during the process of step S119 that the power-off signal is in an off state and is not input, the CPU 505 completes the power-off process after executing the process of step S124 and the game. By returning (returning) from the control timer interrupt process, the execution of the game control is started from the head of the control code indicating the user program (game control process program for game control) stored in the ROM 506. Here, after it is determined in step S119 that the power-off signal has been turned off and is not input, before the power-off processing is terminated and the execution of the game control is started from the beginning of the control code, By executing the processing from step S120 to step S123 as the random value register reading processing, the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D is read, and the corresponding random number latch flag is set to the OFF state.

  FIG. 71 is a timing chart illustrating an operation example in the case where the power supply voltage VSL decreases during the execution of game control. First, based on the start of power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, at a timing T30 before the timing T31 when the power supply voltage VSL shown in FIG. The power supply voltage VCC shown in (B) reaches a predetermined value VCC1. At this timing T30, the reset signal shown in FIG. 71C is changed from the on state to the off state. Subsequently, when the power supply voltage VSL reaches the predetermined value VSL1 at timing T31, the power-off signal shown in FIG. 71 (D) changes from the on state to the off state. Thereafter, for example, at timing T32, the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 shown in FIG. By changing from “1” to “1”, the random number latch flag corresponding to the random number register R1D is turned on.

  After the numerical data is stored in the random value register R1D at the timing T32 in this way, the power supply voltage VSL shown in FIG. 71A becomes the predetermined value VSL1 at the timing T33 before the numerical data is read by the CPU 505 or the like. Suppose that it is lower. At this time, based on the determination that the power-off signal shown in FIG. 71D is on (step S111 in FIG. 42; Yes), is the power-off signal on in step S119? It is repeatedly determined whether or not. Thereafter, for example, at timing T34, when the power supply voltage VSL shown in FIG. 71A returns to the predetermined value VSL1, it is determined in step S119 shown in FIG. 42 that the power-off signal is off and is not input. (Step S119; No). Further, based on the determination that the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 is “1” and the random number latch flag is on in step S120 shown in FIG. 42, the process of step S121 is executed. Then, the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D is read, the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 is updated from “1” to “0”, and the random number latch flag corresponding to the random number register R1D is turned off. Set to state. Thereafter, when the power-off process ends, for example, based on the contents specified in the power-off recovery vector table set in step S124 shown in FIG. 42, the user program stored in the ROM 506 (for game control) The game control main process as shown in FIG. 38 is executed from the beginning by starting the execution of the game control from the beginning of the control code indicating the (game control process program).

  In the random number circuit 509, numerical data that becomes a random number value is captured and stored in the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D in response to the rising edge of the first start winning signal SS1 or the second start winning signal SS2. In this case, for example, when the switch operating power supply voltage VDD drops below a predetermined switch voltage after the process of step S119 shown in FIG. 42 is repeatedly executed, the normal voltage value is restored. During the restoration to the value, rising edges of the first start winning signal SS1 and the second starting winning signal SS2 occur, and numerical data is captured and stored in all of the random value register R1D and the random value register R2D. May turn on. If such an ON state of the random number latch flag is left unattended, the random number latch flag is in the ON state when the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening after the power supply voltage is restored. Therefore, the storage of new numerical data is limited, and the special figure display result is determined based on the numerical data captured during the restoration of the power supply voltage, etc. There arises a problem that determination using numerical data fetched at different timings is performed. Therefore, the CPU 505 of the game control microcomputer 100 reads the random value register R1D and the random value register R2D in step S56 shown in FIG. 39 and step S121 and / or step S123 shown in FIG. The above-described problem can be solved by starting (resuming) the execution of the game control after turning off.

  As another example of the random number value reading condition, there is a case where the reserved memory number of the special figure game has reached a predetermined upper limit value when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. is there. Here, for example, after it is determined in step S203 shown in FIG. 47 that the first start port switch 22A is on, the read value of the first hold storage counter is set to a predetermined upper limit value in step S502 shown in FIG. (For example, “4”) or more, if it is determined to be greater than or equal to (eg, “4”), all entries (for example, entries corresponding to the hold numbers “1” to “4”) are stored in the first special figure storage unit 591A Is stored, and the number of reserved data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 591A has reached the upper limit storage number, so that new reserved data cannot be stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 591A. . Further, for example, after it is determined in step S208 shown in FIG. 47 that the second start-up switch 22B is in the ON state, the read value of the second reserved storage counter is greater than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value in step S502 shown in FIG. Is determined, the reserved data is stored in all entries in the second special figure storage unit 591B, and the number of stored data in the second special figure storage unit 591B is the upper limit storage number. Therefore, new hold data cannot be stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 591B. In such a case, in general, the starting condition of the special game based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening or the second starting prize opening is not established, and the prize ball is paid out. Only done.

  For this reason, it may be considered not to read out numerical data that is a random value generated by the random number circuit 509. However, in the random number circuit 509, in response to the first start winning signal SS1 and the second starting winning signal SS2 being turned on and being input regardless of the number of stored data, the random number value register R1D and the random number circuit 509 Numeric data that is a random number value is fetched and stored in the numeric register R2D, and the corresponding random number latch flag is turned on. Then, when the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening next time, even if the first start winning signal SS1 and the second start winning signal SS2 are turned on and input, Since the storage of new numerical data in the random value register R1D and the random value register R2D is restricted, it is impossible to acquire an accurate random value corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 505 of the game control microcomputer 100 determines in step S502 shown in FIG. 48 that the read value of the hold storage counter is equal to or greater than the predetermined upper limit value (step S502; Yes), the step By executing the processing of S510 and reading the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D, the corresponding random number latch flag is turned off, and the random value acquisition process is terminated. In the process of step S510, the random number value register R1D is read when the first start opening prize table 136A is set in step S202 of FIG. 47, while the second start opening prize is obtained in step S207 of FIG. When the table 136B is set, the random number value register R2D is read. Thus, for example, when a plurality of display devices that variably display special symbols, such as the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, are provided, the reserved memory number of the special symbol game reaches the upper limit value. When a game ball that passes (enters) a start winning opening associated with a special symbol is detected, numerical data is read from the random value register associated with the starting winning opening and new numerical data is stored. On the other hand, the numerical data is not read from the random value register not associated with the starting winning opening. As a result, when a game ball passes (enters) one of a plurality of start winning openings, the operation of updating or obtaining numerical data that becomes a random value corresponding to another starting winning opening is affected. Can not be.

  As another example of the random value reading condition, the establishment of the second starting condition based on the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the normal variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) corresponds to the occurrence of the abnormal winning. In some cases, the bit number [1] of the switch-on buffer is cleared and the bit value is set to “0”. Here, for example, after it is determined in step SA25 shown in FIG. 44 that the second start port switch 22B is on, it is determined that the second start port abnormal winning flag in step SA26 is on (step SA26; Yes) or when it is determined that the time-short flag is OFF in step SA29 (step SA29; No), the bit number [1] of the switch-on buffer is cleared in step SA30 and the bit value is “ 0 ". As a result, the start condition of the special figure game based on the game ball passing (entering) the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B (second starting winning opening) is not established, and the winning ball is also paid out. Avoid it.

  At this time, it may be possible not to read out the numerical data that is the random value generated by the random number circuit 509. However, in the random number circuit 509, regardless of the invalidity determination based on the abnormal winning in the CPU 505, the random number value register R2D becomes a random value in response to the second start winning signal SS2 being turned on and input. Numerical data is captured and stored, and the corresponding random number latch flag is turned on. Then, when the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening next time, even if the second start winning signal SS2 is turned on and input, the storage of new numerical data in the random value register R2D is restricted. Therefore, it becomes impossible to obtain an accurate random value corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning.

  On the other hand, when clearing the bit number [0] of the switch-on buffer at step SA30 shown in FIG. 44, the CPU 505 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes the process at step SA31 to execute the random value register. By reading the numerical data stored in R2D, the corresponding random number latch flag is turned off, and then the second start port abnormal winning invalid process is terminated. Thus, when the establishment of the second start condition based on the passing of the game ball through the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B (second starting winning opening) is made invalid due to the abnormal winning, the random value register By reading R2D and turning off the corresponding random number latch flag, it is possible to acquire an accurate random number value corresponding to the start winning that occurs thereafter.

  When the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning port or the second start winning port, the CPU 505 determines whether or not the game ball has passed (entered) in step S204 or step S209 shown in FIG. Execute common random value acquisition process. Then, in a common processing routine, such as the processing of step S501 to step S510 shown in FIG. 48, regardless of the start winning opening through which the game ball has passed, in particular, by executing the processing of step S505 and step S506, etc. Among the random value register R1D and the random value register R2D included in the 509, numeric data serving as a random value is read out from the random value register corresponding to the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening through which the game ball has passed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with a plurality of start winning ports such as the first starting winning port and the second starting winning port, the random number value can be read out by making it possible to read the numerical data as a random value by such a common processing routine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessive increase in the amount of programs for acquiring numerical data.

  In the main board 11, the security check program 506A stored in the ROM 506 or the like is stored in the ROM 506 or the like when the initial power is supplied from the power board 10 (when power is turned on without a backup power source) or when the CPU 505 is restarted after a system reset occurs. Is read out and executed, the gaming control microcomputer 100 enters the security mode. At this time, as a process corresponding to the security check program 506A, for example, a security check process as shown in FIG. 37 is executed. Here, the security time when the game control microcomputer 100 is in the security mode is set in advance in the bit number [2-0] or the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES stored in the program management area of the ROM 506. Depending on the stored bit value, a time component different from the fixed time can be included.

  For example, if the bit value in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES is a value other than “000” (step S2 shown in FIG. 37; No), the setting contents as shown in FIG. Correspondingly, in addition to the fixed time, any one of a plurality of extension times that can be selected in advance can be set as a time component included in the security time (step S4). If the bit value [4-3] of the security time setting KSES is a value other than “00” (step S6; No), the short mode or the long mode as shown in FIG. 11C is supported. Then, a variable setting time that changes in a predetermined time range each time the initial setting process is executed based on system reset or power-on can be set as a time component included in the security time (step S8).

  Until the security time set in this way has elapsed (step S14; No), the execution of the game control main process by the user program stored in the ROM 506 is not started. Then, the operation of generating numerical data to be a random number value by the random number circuit 509 may not be started during the period in which the game control microcomputer 100 is in the security mode. As a result, it becomes difficult to specify the operation start timing of the random number circuit 509 or the numerical data to be updated from the operation start timing due to power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or system reset, and the analysis result of the game control processing program By connecting a so-called “hanging board” and inputting a fraud signal at a predetermined timing, it is possible to reliably prevent actions such as illegally generating a big hit gaming state.

  As an example, the bit value in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES is set to a different value for each model of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this case, the extension time set in step S4 shown in FIG. 37 can be made different for each model of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the operation start timing of the random number circuit 509 is determined from the operation start timing of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It becomes difficult to specify. Further, by setting the bit value in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES to “01” or “10”, the variable setting time set in step S8 is varied for each system reset. This makes it extremely difficult to specify the operation start timing of the random number circuit 509 from the operation start timing of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  If it is determined in step S14 shown in FIG. 37 that the security time has elapsed (step S14; Yes), the CPU 505 reads the user program stored in the ROM 506, and the game control main process as shown in FIG. Executed. For example, the setting process in step S33 includes a random number circuit setting process as shown in FIG. Here, if the bit value at the bit number [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 as shown in FIG. 10B is set to “1”, the random number circuit 509 is instructed by the processing in step S55 shown in FIG. The start value of the numerical data, which is a random value generated in this way, can be changed every time the system is reset. Thereby, even if the operation start timing of the random number circuit 509 can be specified, it becomes difficult to specify numerical data read from the random value register 559A and the random value register 559B included in the random number circuit 509. It is possible to reliably prevent actions such as illegally generating a big hit gaming state by aiming based on the analysis result of the control processing program or inputting a fraud signal at a predetermined timing by connecting a so-called `` hanging board '' it can.

  The random number circuit 509 and the like are provided with a free-run counter 554A that updates a count value serving as initial value determination data separately from the operation of the CPU 505. When the bit value [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is “1”, the free run counter 554A is set at the initial setting based on the setting by the start value initial setting circuit 554 of the random number circuit 509. The start value is randomly determined by using the count value as it is, or by using a value obtained by substituting the count value into a predetermined arithmetic function (for example, a hash function). As a result, it becomes difficult to specify the numerical data as the start value in the random number circuit 509 from the operation mode of the CPU 505, and aiming based on the analysis result of the game control processing program or connecting a so-called “hanging board” to a predetermined timing By inputting the fraud signal at, actions such as illegally generating a big hit gaming state can be reliably prevented.

  The CPU 505 of the game control microcomputer 100 sets the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 133A shown in FIG. 29A in the use table in step S252 shown in FIG. 52, or in step S255, FIG. After setting the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133B shown in FIG. 30 to the usage table, after setting the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133C shown in FIG. 30A to the usage table in step S258, or In step S259, the loss variation pattern type determination table (short time medium) 133D shown in FIG. 30B is set in the usage table, and then the process of step S260 is executed to obtain a plurality of variation pattern types prepared in advance. Decide on one. Then, based on the variation pattern type determined at this time, the hit variation pattern determination table 134A shown in FIG. 31A or the loss variation pattern determination table 134B shown in FIG. 31B is set in the use table in step S261. Later, the process of step S262 is executed to determine one of a plurality of types of variation patterns prepared in advance. Thereby, when adding the variation pattern type or changing the occurrence rate, it is only necessary to change the setting of the determined value in the variation pattern type determination table, so that the setting time can be shortened. In addition, when adding a detailed variation pattern or changing the occurrence rate, it is only necessary to change the setting of the determination value in the variation pattern determination table, so that the setting time can be shortened. That is, since the determination ratio of the variation pattern type and the determination ratio of the variation pattern can be set separately, the design change related to the variation pattern type and the distribution of the variation pattern can be easily performed.

  In the setting example of the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table 133A shown in FIG. 29A, corresponding to the case where the big hit type is “surprising”, the big hit types such as the fluctuation pattern type CA4-1 and the fluctuation pattern type CA4-2. The table data is configured so as to include a variation pattern type that is different from the case where is “non-probability variation” or “probability variation”. In this way, when the big hit type is “accuracy”, it is determined that the variation pattern type or the fluctuation pattern is different from that other than “surprise accuracy”. Despite being controlled in the round big hit state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrusted by performing the same production operation as in the case of being controlled in the 15 round big hit state.

  In the setting example of the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133C shown in FIG. 30A or the loss variation pattern type determination table (short time) 133D shown in FIG. In this case, more decision values are assigned to the variation pattern types CA1-2 than in the case where the total number of reserved memories is less than the predetermined number. The variation pattern type CA1-2 includes only a variation pattern PA1-2 that is a non-reach variation pattern for shortening. Therefore, when the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the average variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is shortened compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. Thereby, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the situation where the variable display operating rate (operating rate) decreases.

  In step S341 in FIG. 57, when the accessory actuating control time has elapsed and the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B (second starting winning port) is closed, the second starting port abnormal winning error invalid timer is set in step S348. Is set. Thereafter, in the second starting port abnormal winning invalidation process shown in FIG. 44, when it is determined in step SA21 that the value of the ordinary drawing process flag is other than “3”, the second starting port abnormal winning is determined in step SA22. Until it is determined that the error invalid timer has timed out, the process of steps SA23 to SA32 is restricted from being executed. Thereby, the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning port immediately before the normal variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) is closed is effectively detected by the second starting port switch 22B. Can do.

  If the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is first determined to be on in step SA25 after the second start port abnormal winning error invalid timer has timed out, the process proceeds to step SA28. Then, the second starting port abnormal winning error invalid timer is set again. Thereby, the game ball by the second start port switch 22B is caused by the ball biting or the like even though the normal variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port) enters the second starting winning port just before the closed state. Even if the detection of is delayed, this can be detected effectively, and there is no disadvantage to the player.

  After that, after the second starting port abnormal winning error invalid timer set again in step SA28 times out, it is determined in step SA25 that the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B is turned on. In the case where there is an abnormal winning at the second starting winning opening, the second starting is performed in the switch-on buffer, except when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probable change state or in a short time state and the time reduction control is performed. The bit number [1] corresponding to the detection signal from the mouth switch 22B is cleared, and the abnormal winning notification flag is set to the on state. Thereby, the abnormal winning to the second start winning opening can be invalidated.

  As described above, after the opening / closing operation of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B (second start winning opening) is finished and the state is shifted to the closed state, before the second starting opening abnormal winning error invalid timer times out, When a game ball is detected by the switch 22B, the bit number [1] of the switch-on buffer is validated without being cleared. On the other hand, if a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 22B after the second start port abnormal winning error invalid timer times out, the bit number [1] of the switch-on buffer is cleared and disabled. It is said. As a result, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B (second starting winning opening) passes (enters) after shifting to the closed state, invalidates the winning of the game ball detected by the second starting opening switch 22B, and takes illegal measures. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B (second start winning opening) enters immediately before shifting to the closed state while securing, and the winning of the game ball detected by the second starting port switch 22B after entering the closed state is invalid This can prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

  In addition, after the second start port abnormal winning error invalid timer times out, when the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is first turned on, the second start port abnormal winning error invalid timer is set again. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged because the normal winning to the second start winning opening 58a becomes invalid when the ball is bitten.

  When the abnormal winning notification flag is set to the on state, an abnormal winning notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 based on the setting in step S194 shown in FIG. On the effect control board 12, the CPU of the effect control microcomputer 120 displays an abnormality notification screen for notifying that there has been an abnormal winning at the second start winning opening in the notification control process of step S407 shown in FIG. Let Thereby, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can make the store clerk recognize that an abnormal state has occurred.

  After the second starting port abnormal winning error invalid timer set again in step SA28 in FIG. 44 times out, it is determined in step SA25 that the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B is on. Even in this case, when the time reduction flag is on and the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probability change state or the time reduction state and the time reduction control or the high release control is performed, the process of step SA30 is restricted from being executed. The bit number [1] of the switch-on buffer is not cleared. As a result, processing such as clearing the bit number [1] of the switch-on buffer is omitted when the time reduction control or the high release control is performed in the probability variation state or the short time state where the possibility of fraud is low. Therefore, an increase in processing load on the CPU 505 can be prevented.

  In the switch process shown in FIG. 43, the stored value of the input port register PI is periodically fetched at step SA05, and the logical product with the judgment mask value is taken at step SA06. Subsequently, in the process of step SA08, the logical product of this operation result and the exclusive OR of the previous AND operation result and the previous AND operation result is taken, and this operation result is obtained in step SA09. Stored in the switch-on buffer. Thus, the switch-on buffer stores the operation result obtained from each bit value stored at different timings in the input port register PI. The CPU 505 can collectively determine the input state of detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the like based on the contents of the switch-on buffer. it can. Accordingly, the detection signal input state is determined for each of the plurality of switches, or the switch circuit 114 is masked so that the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is not input. When the winning ball device 6B (second start winning opening) is in a closed state, it is necessary to provide a program for setting the bit number [1] of the switch-on buffer so that the bit value does not become “1”. Disappear. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the processing load on the CPU 505 from increasing due to the complicated program configuration.

  Such a switch process is executed before the special symbol process process in step S96 and the prize ball process in step S98 in the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Then, the second starting port abnormal winning invalidation process is executed at step SA10 in the switch process shown in FIG. 43, and the bit number [1] of the switch-on buffer is cleared at step SA30 shown in FIG. By setting it to “0”, winning at the second start winning opening is invalidated. Therefore, the stored value of the switch-on buffer based on the abnormal winning at the second starting winning opening is used for paying out a prize ball, a special drawing game using the second special drawing based on the establishment of the second starting condition, and the like. Can be surely prevented.

  When determining the universal symbol display result, which is the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol in the normal symbol normal processing in step S170 shown in FIG. 55, by referring to the universal symbol display result determination table 135, when the time reduction flag is on. The map display result is determined as “per map” at a higher rate than when the time flag is off. In addition, when the time reduction flag is on, the normal symbol variation time, which is a variable symbol display time, is set shorter than when the time reduction flag is off. In addition, when the hourly flag is on, the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B (second start prize opening is based on the fact that the usual figure display result is “per figure” compared to when the hourly flag is off. ) Is set to increase the number of times and the opening time. Thus, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probabilistic state or in a short time state, the time shortening control or the high opening control is performed, compared with the case where the time shortening control or the high opening control is not performed in the normal state or the like The frequency of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B (second start winning opening) being opened is increased, the possibility that a lot of winning balls are paid out is increased, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table 133 shown in FIG. 28, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the decision value is assigned to the “surprise” big hit type, while the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value. If “2”, the decision value is not assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type. Therefore, after the first start condition is established based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A, the first start condition is If established, after the second start condition is established based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B, The jackpot type is determined at a different rate than when the second start condition is satisfied. Thereby, based on which one of the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has entered the game ball, the big hit gaming state It is possible to increase the player's interest and improve the gaming interest in the game.

  In the setting example of the second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in FIG. 27B, the determination value is not assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit”. Also, in the setting example of the big hit type determination table 133 shown in FIG. 28, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, no decided value is assigned to the big hit type of “surprise”. 51, the special figure game using the second special figure is executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure by the processes of steps S221 and S223 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probabilistic state or a short time state, the time reduction control or the high opening control is performed, and the frequency that the normally variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning opening) is in the open state is increased. The big hit type is determined to be “surprise” in the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition, and the special figure display result is decided to be “small hit” There is no. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interests due to the prolongation of the game in the probability variation state or the short time state.

  In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the plunger of the solenoid 81 moves forward and backward (moves back and forth) with respect to the opening and closing blades, so that the linear forward and backward movement force of the plunger is a connecting arm locking member or a linkage arm as a plunger linkage portion. Is converted to the rotational force of the transmission member, and the rotational force of this transmission member is converted to the rotational force of the opening and closing blades via the linkage pin locking portion or the linkage pin as the opening and closing blade linkage portion. The opening / closing operation is performed by the rotation. The transmission member rotates in conjunction with the forward / backward movement of the plunger. The forward / backward movement of the plunger includes a forward movement as a demagnetization operation (first operation) by stopping driving of the solenoid 81 and a backward movement as an excitation operation (second operation) by starting driving of the solenoid 81. Then, in response to the excitation operation of the plunger, the transmission member rotation shaft is formed on the support member by moving from the front end (regulation position) of the bearing oblong hole formed in the support member to the rear end (rotation position). The rotation restriction in the second direction (upper and rear) of the guide pin of the transmission member by the upper straight surface which is the rotation restriction portion of the guide groove is released, and the transmission member rotates in the second direction to change from the closed posture to the open posture. As a result, the open / close blade is opened. After rotating in the first direction (downward and forward) around the transmission member rotation shaft located at the rear end (rotation position) of the bearing oblong hole according to the demagnetization operation of the plunger, after changing from the open position to the closed position When the transmission member rotation shaft moves from the rear end (rotation position) of the bearing oblong hole to the front end (regulation position) in the closed position, the guide pin of the transmission member comes into contact with the upper straight surface of the guide groove. The rotation in the second direction is restricted. At this time, since the open / close blade cannot be forcibly rotated from the closed state to the open state, an illegal act such as illegally rotating the open / close blade with a wire or other unauthorized member to win a game ball as much as possible Can be prevented.

  Even if a fraud that applies an external force, such as hooking a piano wire or the like on the opening / closing blade to make it easy to win a game ball once the opening / closing blade has been opened, is performed again in step SA28 shown in FIG. After the set 2nd start opening abnormal winning error invalid timer has timed out, all abnormal winnings to the 2nd starting winning opening will be invalidated, preventing damage to the player while minimizing damage. Can fit.

  In the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, when the open / close blade is in the closed state, the rotation of the transmission member is guided and regulated by the linear groove portion of the guide groove formed on the side wall of the support member constituting the apparatus main body. Therefore, a load such as when the opening / closing blade is forced to rotate is not directly transmitted to the plunger via the transmission member, and the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory can be protected to prevent a failure. .

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment, the random number circuit 509 is based on the input of a predetermined signal such as the first start winning signal SS1 or the second starting winning signal SS2 being turned on, for example. When numerical data included in the random number sequence RSN updated by a predetermined procedure by the random number generation circuit 553, the random number sequence change circuit 555, or the like is stored in the random value register R1D (559A) or the random number value register R2D (559B). In addition, by changing the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 and the random number latch flag data RDFM1 stored in the random number latch flag register RDFM from “0” to “1”, the random number value register R1D storing numerical data (559A) or a random number latch corresponding to the random value register R2D (559B) Lag storage of new numerical data turned on is limited. On the other hand, for example, when the CPU 505 executes the processing of step S506 shown in FIG. 48, numerical data that becomes a random value from the random value register R1D (559A) or the random value register R2D (559B) at the read timing of the random value. Is read, the random number latch flag corresponding to the random value register R1D (559A) or the random value register R2D (559B) from which the numerical data is read is turned off, and storage of new numerical data is permitted. The Thus, the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D (559A) or the random value register R2D (559B) based on the input of the predetermined signal is not altered by noise or the like before being read by the CPU 505 or the like. Numerical data that is an accurate random value can be acquired.

  When the game control is started by the CPU 505 of the game control microcomputer 100 or the like, for example, in the process of step S56 shown in FIG. 39 or the processes of steps S120 to S123 shown in FIG. (559A) and random number value register R2D (559B) can read numerical data, and each random number latch flag can be set to an OFF state. As a result, for example, when the power is cut off in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the power supply voltage is unstable such as when the power is turned on, it is erroneously stored in the random value register R1D (559A) or the random value register R2D (559B). Numerical data can be prevented from being acquired as a random value.

  When a game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening is detected and it is determined in step S203 shown in FIG. 47 that the first start opening switch 22A is on, in step S204, the second start winning prize is also received. When the game ball that has passed (entered) through the mouth is detected and it is determined in step S208 shown in FIG. 47 that the second start port switch 22B is on, in step S209, the start winning that the game ball has passed (entered) is received. A common random number acquisition process is executed regardless of the mouth. Then, in a common processing routine, such as the processing of step S505 and step S506 shown in FIG. 48, regardless of the start winning opening through which the game ball has passed, the random number value register R1D (559A) and the random number value register R2D included in the random number circuit 509. Among (559B), the numerical data serving as the random number value is read from the random value register corresponding to the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening through which the game ball has passed. Thereby, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with a plurality of start winning ports such as the first starting winning port and the second starting winning port, for example, an excessive increase in the program amount can be prevented.

  In response to the determination that the read value of the hold storage counter is greater than or equal to the upper limit value in step S502 shown in FIG. 48, the first special figure hold storage unit 591A and the second special figure are read at the random number read timing. When the storage number of the hold data in the hold storage unit 591B has reached the upper limit storage number, in the process of step S510, the random value register R1D (corresponding to the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening through which the game ball has passed). 559A) or the random number value register R2D (559B), the corresponding random number latch flag is set to the OFF state by reading the numerical value data to be the random number value. As a result, after the number of stored data in the first special figure reservation storage unit 591A or the second special figure reservation storage unit 591B reaches the upper limit storage number, for example, when the random number value is read out after being less than the upper limit storage number, When this happens, an accurate random value based on the input of a predetermined signal such as the first start winning signal SS1 or the second start winning signal SS2 can be acquired.

  In step SA30 shown in FIG. 44, the bit number [1] of the switch-on buffer is cleared and the bit value becomes “0”, and the game ball passes (enters) the normal variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port). When the establishment of the second starting condition based on the above is invalidated due to the occurrence of an abnormal winning, in the process of step SA31, from the random value register R2D (559B) corresponding to the second starting winning opening through which the game ball has passed, By reading the numerical data to be a random value, the corresponding random number latch flag is set to the off state. Thereby, after the establishment of the second starting condition is invalidated due to the occurrence of an abnormal winning, for example, a new game ball passes (enters) the normal variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) and the random number value An accurate random number value based on the input of a predetermined signal such as the second start winning signal SS2 can be acquired when the read timing comes.

  When the bit value in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES shown in FIGS. 8A, 11A, and 11C is set to a value other than “00”, it is based on system reset or power-on. A variable setting time that changes in a predetermined time range each time the initial setting process is executed is set as a time component included in the security time. Further, when the bit value in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES shown in FIG. 8A, FIG. 11A and FIG. 11D is set to a value other than “000”, in addition to the fixed time One of a plurality of extension times that can be selected in advance is set as a time component included in the security time. As a result, it becomes difficult to specify the operation start timing of the random number circuit 509 or the numerical data to be updated from the operation start timing due to power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or system reset, and the analysis result of the game control processing program By connecting a so-called “hanging board” and inputting a fraud signal at a predetermined timing, it is possible to reliably prevent actions such as illegally generating a big hit gaming state.

  In the random number circuit 509, the random number sequence changing circuit 555 changes the count value permutation RCN output from the random number generating circuit 553 based on a predetermined random number changing rule, whereby the numerical data is changed to a predetermined update initial value by a predetermined procedure. To a predetermined update final value cyclically. When the bit value at the bit number [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 shown in FIGS. 8A and 10B is “1”, the CPU 505 executes the process of step S55 shown in FIG. As a result, the start value of the numerical data to be a random number generated by the random number circuit 509 is changed every time the system is reset. Thereby, even if the operation start timing of the random number circuit 509 can be specified, the numerical data read from the random value register R1D (559A) and the random value register R2D (559B) included in the random number circuit 509 is specified. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent aiming based on the analysis result of the game control processing program and input of an illegal signal due to connection of a so-called “hanging board”.

  More specifically, a free run counter 554 provided in the random number circuit 509 or the like updates a count value serving as initial value determination data separately from the operation of the CPU 505 of the game control microcomputer 100. Then, based on the setting by the start value initial setting circuit 554 of the random number circuit 509 and the like, the start value of the numerical data that becomes the random number value is determined using the count value of the free run counter 554. This makes it difficult to specify numerical data that is a random value from the operation mode of the CPU 505 of the game control microcomputer 100, and is based on aiming based on the analysis result of the game control processing program or connection of a so-called “hanging board”. It is possible to reliably prevent an illegal signal from being input.

  In the external bus interface 501 provided in the game control microcomputer 100, the internal resource access control circuit 501A allows external data other than the internal circuit such as the CPU 505 to externally read the internal data of the game control microcomputer 100 such as data stored in the ROM 506. Limited. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a game control processing program such as a game control user program stored in the ROM 506 from being read from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 and provided for analysis or the like. Further, it is possible to reliably prevent aiming based on the analysis result of the game control processing program and input of an illegal signal due to connection of a so-called “hanging board”.

  In the frequency monitoring circuit 551 of the random number circuit 509 built in or externally attached to the game control microcomputer 100, the input state of the random number clock RCLK from the random number clock generation circuit 112 to the random number external clock terminal ERC is set as the internal system clock SCLK. In comparison, when a frequency abnormality is detected in the random number clock RCLK, the bit value of the internal information data CIF4 stored in the bit number [4] of the internal information register CIF is set to “1”. Then, the CPU 505 determines that the number of times that the read value of the internal information data CIF4 is continuously determined to be “1” in step S63 shown in FIG. 40 has reached the clock abnormality determination value in step S65, for example. When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the operation state of the random number circuit 509. Thereby, it is possible to reliably prevent an illegal act by inputting an illegal signal as the random number clock RCLK.

  The CPU 505 of the game control microcomputer 100 performs the steps shown in FIG. 39 as random number value register read processing when the system reset of the game control microcomputer 100 is canceled based on the start of power supply in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. By executing the processing of S56, the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D (559A) or the random value register R2D (559B) is read, and the corresponding random number latch flag is turned off. As a result, for example, the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D (559A) or the random value register R2D (559B) is erroneously acquired as a random value when the power supply voltage is unstable, such as when the power is turned on. Can be prevented.

  Further, in response to the determination that the power-off signal is in the on state in step S111 shown in FIG. 42, for example, after a decrease in a predetermined power supply voltage such as the power supply voltage VSL is detected, the game control microcomputer Until 100 is in the operation stop state, the process of step S119 is executed to repeatedly determine the input state of the power-off signal. Then, when it is determined in step S119 that the power-off signal has been turned off and is not input, before game control is started from the beginning of the control code stored in the ROM 506 based on the setting in step S124. In addition, the processing of step S120 to step S123 is executed to turn off the random number latch flag that is in the on state. As a result, for example, the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D (559A) or the random value register R2D (559B) erroneously in a state where the power supply voltage is unstable such as when the predetermined power supply voltage VSL is lowered is changed to Can be prevented from being acquired.

  A random number value for determining a special figure display result based on the numerical data read out in step S506 of FIG. 48 when a start winning occurs when a game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. Based on MR1, a winning random number determination process as shown in FIG. 49 is executed in steps S205 and S210 shown in FIG. 47, and whether or not the random value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range in steps S525 and S531. It is determined whether or not the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit”. Then, in response to the notification of winning time per win determination in step S554 or step S561 in FIG. 60, the continuous notice flag is set to ON in step S556 or step S563. Prior to the start of the variable display to be determined, a specific effect operation such as, for example, a continuous notice effect over a plurality of variable displays is executed. As a result, before the variable display that is the target of winning prize determination etc. is started, the possibility of the display result being a “big hit” is notified, and the variable display result is “big hit” over a long period of time. Can maintain a sense of expectation and improve game entertainment.

  The numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted in step S508 of FIG. 48 when the start winning occurs when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. Based on this, it is determined in step S528 and step S534 in FIG. 49 whether or not it is within the range of the specific pattern common range, and whether or not a specific variation pattern such as a variation pattern with super reach is determined. judge. Then, in response to the notification of the inside of the specific pattern common range in Step S555 or Step S562 in FIG. 60, the specific notice pattern is set by turning on the continuous notice flag in Step S556 or Step S563. Prior to the start of variable display, which is a determination target within the common range, for example, a specific effect operation such as continuous notice effect over a plurality of variable displays is executed. Thus, before the variable display that is a determination target such as within the specific pattern common range is started, the possibility that the variable display becomes a specific variation pattern is notified, and the variable display result is obtained over a long period of time. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation to be a “hit” and to improve the gaming fun.

  Further, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (during short time) 133D, the variation pattern type CA1-1 is determined depending on whether or not the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more. The assignment of determination values to the variation pattern types CA1-3 and the variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-3 is different. This makes it possible to adjust the variable display time of the special pattern and decoration pattern by varying the rate of determination of the variation pattern according to the number of reserved memory of the special figure game, so that the variable display is possible when the number of reserved memory is large. While increasing the efficiency, it is possible to prevent the variable display from being interrupted when the number of reserved memories is small, thereby reducing the game interest.

  On the other hand, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (during short time) 133D, at least a part of the determination values corresponding to the variation pattern type CA2-4 is the gaming state and the total. The same decision values “230” to “251” are set regardless of the number of reserved memories. This makes it possible to reliably determine that a specific variation pattern is determined regardless of the gaming state and the total number of reserved memories.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, in the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B has been described, but only one special symbol display device is provided. Also good. In this case, for example, the combination of the latch flip-flop 557B, the random number latch selector 558B, and the random value register R2D (559B) included in the random number circuit 509 shown in FIG.

  Further, the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B are not limited to those provided as a plurality of start areas, for example, three A plurality of starting areas as described above may be provided. In this case, a start condition for executing a special game using different special symbols may be established based on the detection of a start winning game ball in each start area. The random number circuit 509 may be provided with a plurality of random value registers such as three or more corresponding to the number of start areas, and a random number latch flag corresponding to each random value register may be provided. Or, for example, a special game using the same special symbol is executed based on the detection of a start winning game ball in a part (at least two) of the starting areas of three or more starting areas. The starting condition for doing so may be satisfied. In addition, even if a start winning of a game ball is detected in any start area among a plurality of start areas, a special game using a common (or one set) special symbol is executed. The start condition may be satisfied. In this case, the start condition for starting the special game may be established in the same order as the order in which the start winnings of the game balls are detected in the plurality of start areas. Alternatively, a priority is given to a plurality of start areas, and a start condition for starting a special game based on detection of a start winning game ball in a start area having a high priority is set as a start area having a low priority. The starting condition based on the detection of the start winning of the game ball may be established with priority.

  In the process of step S119 shown in FIG. 42, it may be determined whether or not the watchdog timer has timed out instead of determining whether or not the power-off signal is in the ON state. For example, a predetermined oscillation signal such as the internal system clock SCLK is supplied to the input terminal of the watchdog timer, and the signal change is counted up. When the value counted by the watchdog timer reaches a predetermined value (time-out value), a time-out signal is output. The time-out signal is logically inverted by a predetermined inversion circuit and then input to the AND circuit as a return signal. The AND circuit takes a logical product of the reset signal and the return signal and supplies the logical product to the reset terminal of the CPU 505. The time-out value in the watchdog timer may be set to, for example, a time when the power supply voltage VSL is lower than the voltage value that can generate the power supply voltage VCC after the power-off signal is turned on. Since the watchdog timer operates using the power supply voltage VCC as a drive voltage, the timeout value is set to be equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the operable period of the watchdog timer. Therefore, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, if the power supply voltage is lowered as it is and the supply is stopped, the watchdog timer and the others before the watchdog timer times out and the return signal is output. The circuit parts of this will not work. When the CPU 505 is executing game control, a timer clear signal may be periodically supplied to the watchdog timer to clear the count value (for example, set to an initial value “0”). The output period of the timer clear signal is set to be shorter than the time required until the watchdog timer times out. Therefore, when the CPU 505 is executing normal game control, a time-out signal is not output from the watchdog timer.

  In this case, during the period in which the process of step S119 is repeatedly executed, the watchdog timer is not supplied to the watchdog timer, and if the power supply voltage VCC is a normal voltage value even after a predetermined time has elapsed, the watchdog timer Timeout occurs at. At this time, based on the return signal supplied to the CPU 505, the processing may be started (restarted) from the beginning of the game control processing program. Even in this case, for example, in the process of step S56 shown in FIG. 39, the numerical data can be read from the random value register R1D (559A) and the random value register R2D (559B), and each random number latch flag is set to the OFF state. be able to. Alternatively, when it is determined in the process of step S119 shown in FIG. 42 that a time-out has occurred in the watchdog timer, it is determined that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered from an instantaneous interruption of the power supply voltage, and after step S120 What is necessary is just to make it process. Even in this case, in the processing from step S120 to step S123 shown in FIG. 42, the numerical data can be read from the random value register R1D (559A) or the random value register R2D (559B), and each random number latch flag is turned off. Can be set. Thus, for example, the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D (559A) or the random value register R2D (559B) erroneously in a state where the power supply voltage is unstable, such as when an instantaneous interruption occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1, Can be prevented from being acquired.

  The extension time set in step S4 of FIG. 37 may be determined as one of a plurality of extension times for each system reset, for example, by setting in a user program stored in the ROM 506. In this case, the extension time set in step S4 is defined to be longer than the longest variable setting time that can be set in step S8. Then, after a rough extension time is determined in step S4, a detailed extension time may be determined in step S8. As a result, the security time for entering the security mode when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on or when the system is reset can be greatly changed every time the system is reset, and the operation of the random number circuit 509 is started from the operation start timing of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It becomes more difficult to specify the start timing and the numerical data to be updated.

  Further, the extended time to be added to the fixed time may be determined using an ID number assigned to each chip constituting the game control microcomputer 100. As an example, an extension time corresponding to the calculated value is executed by executing a part or all of an operation for performing a predetermined scramble process on the ID number and an operation such as addition / subtraction / multiplication / division using the ID number. May be set. In this case, the extension time may be randomly determined for each system reset, for example, by changing an arithmetic expression used for determining the extension time for each system reset. Furthermore, the count value of the free run counter, the ID number, and the like, for example, the arithmetic expression for determining the extension time using the ID number is determined corresponding to the count value of the free run counter stored at the time of system reset. The extended time may be determined randomly at each system reset by using a combination of the above. In addition, when changing the start value of the random number generated by the random number circuit 509 at each system reset, the start value of the random number can be changed by using a combination of the count value of the free-run counter and the ID number. You may decide.

  The clock signal supplied to the CPU 505 of the gaming control microcomputer 100 and the clock signal supplied to the random number circuit 509 are generated using an oscillation signal generated by one oscillator included in the common clock generation circuit. You may make it do. In this case, for example, a frequency divider for generating the random number clock RCLK and the control clock CCLK is provided, and the latch clocks RC0, RC1, RC2 are synchronized with the control clock CCLK or the internal system clock SCLK. What is necessary is just to set the frequency division ratio etc. in each frequency divider so that it may become difficult to produce. The control clock generation circuit 111 and the random number clock generation circuit 112 may be provided in whole or in part inside the game control microcomputer 100 or outside the game control microcomputer 100. May be.

  The oscillation signal that becomes the random number update clock RGK or the latch clock RC0 may be generated outside the random number circuit 509 such as the random number clock generation circuit 112, for example. Alternatively, a circuit for generating the random number update clock RGK and a circuit for generating the latch clock RC0 may be separately provided in the random number circuit 509. As an example, while generating a random number update clock RGK by a flip-flop similar to the clock flip-flop 552, an inversion circuit for inverting the signal state of the random number update clock RGK is provided, and a signal output from the inversion circuit is latched. It may be used as the clock RC0.

  When restricting external reading of the ROM 506 or the like, for example, the connection terminal for externally reading out the data stored in the ROM 506 in the game control microcomputer 100 cannot be connected to the external device in the provider of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be sealed.

  In the above embodiment, as the variation pattern setting process of step S141 shown in FIG. 46, the process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 52 is executed regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied. Explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the first start condition is satisfied and when the second start condition is satisfied, a process different from each other is executed, and the variation pattern type is selected from a plurality of types. It is also possible to determine whether or not one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. In this case, the process for determining the variation pattern type and the process for determining the variation pattern are varied depending on which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, while the variation pattern type The numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determination and the numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern are common numerical data regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied. May be used.

  Further, as a variation pattern type determination table such as a big hit variation pattern type determination table, a small hit variation pattern type determination table, or a loss variation pattern type determination table, depending on whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, You may prepare beforehand what made the allocation of the decision value with respect to each variation pattern type differ. Then, in the variation pattern setting process executed in response to the establishment of the first start condition, a variation pattern type determination table corresponding to the establishment of the first start condition is selected as a use table, and a random value for determining the variation pattern type Based on MR3, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types. On the other hand, in the variation pattern setting process executed in response to the establishment of the second start condition, a variation pattern type determination table that is different from the case where the first start condition is established according to the establishment of the second start condition. It may be selected as a usage table and the variation pattern type may be determined as one of a plurality of types based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type common to the case where the first start condition is satisfied.

  In the above-described embodiment, the small hit game state is controlled based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, and the game state is not changed after the small hit game state ends. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state based on the fact that the big hit type becomes “surprise”, and after the two round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the positive change state. Explained as being. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the case where the big hit type is “accurate” or the variable display result is “small hit”, A case of “suddenly normal” may be provided. As an example, “suddenly short time” and “suddenly normal” are included in the jackpot type when the variable display result is “big jackpot”. In this case, the jackpot type determination table 131 includes table data for assigning the random number MR2 for determining the big hit type to the “suddenly short” or “sudden normal” big hit types in accordance with the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value. What is necessary is just to be comprised. When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly short”, the two round big hit state is controlled in the same way as the big hit type is “surprise”, and the two round big hit state ends. After that, unlike the case where the big hit type is “accuracy”, it is controlled to the short time state. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, when the big hit type is “suddenly normal”, the two round big hit state is controlled in the same way as when the big hit type is “surprise”, and the two round big hit state ends. After that, unlike the case where the jackpot type is “surprise”, the normal state is controlled. Thereby, a player's expectation with respect to the gaming state controlled after the end of the two round big hit state can be enhanced, and the gaming interest can be improved.

  When such “sudden shortening” and “sudden normal” are provided, a variation pattern type and variation pattern different from those other than “sudden shortening” and “sudden normal” may be determined. As a result, although the big hit type is “suddenly short” or “suddenly normal”, the same effect operation as in the case of being controlled to the 15 round big hit state is performed despite being controlled to the 2 round big hit state. It can prevent the player from feeling distrust. In addition, when the big hit type is "Suddenly short" or "Suddenly normal", when the variable display result is "Small hit", or when the big hit type is "Sudden", the common variation pattern type It may be possible to make a decision. As a result, when determining the fluctuation pattern, the big hit type is “Suddenly short” or “Suddenly normal”, or the variable display result is “Small hit” or the big hit type is “Abrupt”. Regardless of whether this is the case, a common variation pattern determination table can be used, and the data capacity can be reduced.

  In the above-described embodiment, it has been described that the game state such as the probability change state or the time-short state can be controlled after the big hit gaming state based on the variable display result being “big hit”. In the probability variation state and the short-time state, it is described that the control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility of the game ball entering the second start winning opening and easily establishing the second start condition. . However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the probability variation state, the probability variation control is continuously performed and the high release control is performed to increase the possibility that the game ball enters the second start winning opening. The high base state and the high probability low base state in which the probability variation control is performed but the high opening control is not performed may be included. Also, in the short-time state, a low-accuracy base state in which the special figure fluctuation time is shortened and high-opening control is performed, and a low-accuracy low-base state in which the special figure fluctuation time is shortened but high-opening control is not performed May be included. As an example, depending on whether the big hit type is “probability change” or “surprise accuracy”, after the big hit gaming state is finished, it is controlled to either the high probability high base state or the high probability low base state. May be. As another example, depending on whether the big hit type is “probability change” or “surprise accuracy”, the ratio of being controlled to either the high probability high base state or the high probability low base state after the big hit gaming state is ended. , They may be different from each other.

  When the big hit type is “Crush Probability”, when determining the variation pattern type to be one of multiple types, whether to control to the high probability high base state or the high probability low base state after the big hit gaming state ends Accordingly, different variation pattern types may be determined. As an example, when the big hit type is determined to be “surprise” in step S234 shown in FIG. 51, it is determined whether to control to the high probability high base state or the high probability low base state after the big hit gaming state is finished. A determination process is performed to At this time, when it is determined to control to the high accuracy low base state, the case where the big hit type is “surprise” and the variable display result is “small hit”, such as the variation pattern type CA4-1. A common variation pattern type is determined. On the other hand, when it is decided to control to the high accuracy and high base state, if the big hit type is “surprise”, such as the fluctuation pattern type CA4-2, the dedicated fluctuation pattern type is determined. Good. As a result, when the big hit type is “surprise” and the high probability low base state is reached after the big hit gaming state is finished, the variable display result is displayed as an effect operation during variable display of the decorative pattern or an effect operation in the two round big hit state. After the production operation common to the case of “small hit” is performed, the highly accurate and low base state can be obtained. On the other hand, when the big hit type is “surprise” and the high probability high base state is reached after the big hit gaming state is finished, the big hit type is “surprise” After the dedicated performance operation is performed only in the case of “

  In the embodiment described above, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are provided in the display area of the image display device 5, and the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are provided. In the above description, it is assumed that one decorative symbol is stopped and displayed so that the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed on one predetermined effective line. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, three locations of “upper”, “middle”, and “lower” are provided. It is also possible that the decorative symbols can be stopped and displayed, and the finalized decorative symbols that will be the final stopped symbols are stopped and displayed on five or eight active lines.

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, the various display operations including the display operation of the display image in the display area of the image display device 5, etc. depart from the spirit of the present invention. Changes and modifications can be made arbitrarily without departing from the scope. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball, but responds to detection of a winning ball by enclosing the gaming ball. It can also be applied to enclosed game machines that give points.

  In the above embodiment, as an example of the gaming machine, the description has been given using the pachinko gaming machine 1 having a function of variably displaying special symbols and decorative symbols and a function of displaying various effect images. However, at least a part of the configuration and functions of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment can also be applied to other gaming machines such as a slot machine.

  As an example, in a random number circuit built in or externally attached to a game control microcomputer included in a slot machine, for example, among the configurations shown in FIG. 14, a latch flip-flop 557B, a random number latch selector 558B, and a random value register R2D (559B) ) Is not used. On the other hand, for example, in the configuration shown in FIG. 6, a detection signal from a start lever switch provided in the slot machine is input to an input port P0 provided in the PIP 510.

  Then, in the random number circuit built in or externally attached to the game control microcomputer, the random number generation circuit 553 shown in FIG. 14 is input based on the input of a predetermined signal, for example, that the detection signal from the start lever switch is turned on. Random number stored in the random number latch flag register RDFM when numerical data included in the random number sequence RSN updated by a predetermined procedure by the random number sequence changing circuit 555 or the like is stored in the random number value register R1D (559A). By changing the bit value of the latch flag data RDFM0 from “0” to “1”, the random number latch flag corresponding to the random value register R1D (559A) storing the numerical data is turned on, and the new numerical data Storage is limited. On the other hand, for example, when the CPU of the game control microcomputer executes a process corresponding to step S506 shown in FIG. 48, a numerical value that becomes a random value from the random value register R1D (559A) at the read timing of the random value. When the data is read, the random number latch flag corresponding to the random number register R1D (559A) from which the numerical data is read is turned off, and storage of new numerical data is permitted. Thereby, the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D (559A) based on the input of the predetermined signal is not altered by noise or the like until it is read by the CPU of the game control microcomputer. Numerical data that becomes a random value can be acquired.

  Also in the slot machine, when the execution of game control is started by the CPU of the game control microcomputer or the like, for example, the processing corresponding to step S56 shown in FIG. 39 or the processing corresponding to step S120 and step S121 shown in FIG. In the processing, numerical data can be read from the random value register R1D (559A), and each random number latch flag can be set to an OFF state. As a result, for example, numerical data stored in the random value register R1D (559A) erroneously in a state where the power supply voltage is unstable, such as when a power interruption occurs in the slot machine or when the power is turned on, is acquired as a random value. Can be prevented.

  Further, when the bit value in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES is set to a value other than “00”, similar to those shown in FIG. 8A and FIG. 11A and FIG. A variable setting time that changes in a predetermined time range every time the initial setting process is executed based on system reset or power-on is set as a time component included in the security time. In addition, the bit value in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES is set to a value other than “000” in the same manner as shown in FIG. 8 (A) and FIG. 11 (A) and (D). Sometimes, in addition to the fixed time, one of a plurality of extension times that can be selected in advance is set as a time component included in the security time. This makes it difficult to specify the operation start timing of the random number circuit and the numerical data to be updated from the operation start timing due to power-on of the slot machine, system reset, etc., and aiming based on the analysis result of the game control processing program In addition, by connecting a so-called “hanging board” and inputting an illegal signal at a predetermined timing, it is possible to reliably prevent acts such as illegally generating a special gaming state.

  In addition, in the slot machine, for example, changing the start value of the numerical data to be a random value generated by a random number circuit built in or externally attached to the game control microcomputer, for each system reset, more specifically, Separately from the operation of the CPU of the game control microcomputer, the start value of the numerical data serving as the random number value is determined using the count value read from the free run counter that updates the count value serving as the initial value determining data. In the external bus interface provided in the game control microcomputer, the internal resource access control circuit restricts external reading of the internal data of the game control microcomputer, such as the stored data in the ROM, other than the internal circuit such as the CPU. Built in microcomputer The frequency monitoring circuit of the external random number circuit detects the frequency abnormality in the random number clock by comparing the input state of the random number clock with the internal system clock, or a combination of some or all of these Thus, at least a part of the configuration and functions of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment may be realized in the slot machine.

  Slot machines are not limited to those that can play games using medals and credits. For example, slot machines that use pachinko balls to play games, and can play using credits without medals being discharged to the outside. The present invention can also be applied to a complete credit type slot machine and an image type slot machine in which a variable display device displays an image showing a symbol.

  Programs and data for realizing part or all of the configuration and functions of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the slot machine are limited to a form distributed and provided by a removable recording medium to a computer device or the like. Instead of this, a form distributed by pre-installing in a storage device such as a computer device may be adopted. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Ordinary winning ball device 6B ... Ordinary variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Audio control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Discharge control board 18 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switches 22A, 22B ... Start port switch 23 ... Count switch 31 ... Game start switch 41 ... Pass gate 100, 810 ... Game control microcomputer 501 ... External bus interface 501A ... Internal resource access control circuit 502 ... Clock circuit 503 ... Unique information storage circuit 504 ... Reset / Interrupt controller 5 5 ... CPU
506 ... ROM
507 ... RAM
508 ... CTC
509 ... random number circuit 510 ... PIP
511 ... Serial communication circuit 512 ... Address decoding circuit 551 ... Frequency monitoring circuit 552 ... Clock flip-flop 553 ... Random number generation circuit 554 ... Start value setting circuit 554A ... Free-run counter 555 ... Random number sequence change circuit 556 ... Random number sequence change setting circuit 557A, 557B ... Flip-flops for latch 558A, 558B ... Random number latch selectors 559A, 559B ... Random value register

Claims (8)

A variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can each be identified based on the establishment of a start condition that allows the start of variable display after the game medium has passed through the start area, the variable display means A gaming machine that controls a specific gaming state advantageous to a player when a specific display result is derived and displayed,
A game control microcomputer having a built-in control CPU for executing game control in the gaming machine based on the stored contents of the non-volatile memory after executing predetermined initial settings;
A random number circuit that is built in or externally attached to the game control microcomputer and generates numerical data to be random values;
The random number circuit includes:
Numeric value updating means for updating and outputting numerical data according to a predetermined procedure;
Random number storage means for capturing and storing the numerical data output from the numerical value updating means as the random number value,
The game control microcomputer is:
Random number reading means for reading out the random value from the random value storage means when a game medium passes through the starting area;
Based on the establishment of the start condition, the display result of the identification information is derived and displayed as to whether or not to control the specific gaming state using the random number value read by the random number reading means. A pre-determination means to be determined before;
Whether or not to control the specific gaming state based on the random number value read by the random number reading means when a game medium passes through the starting area before the determination by the prior determination means. Start determination means for performing a predetermined determination;
While the numerical data output from the numerical value updating means based on the input of a predetermined signal is stored in the random value storage means, the random number value is set to a first value to limit the storage of new numerical data, while the random value Predetermined data that is set to a second value and allows new numerical data to be stored when the numerical data stored in the storage means is read by the control CPU at the read timing of the random number value;
Control start time processing means for setting the predetermined data to a second value when game control by the control CPU is started;
Security check means for executing a security check for checking whether or not the storage content of the nonvolatile memory has been changed in the predetermined initial setting;
Security time setting means capable of variably setting the security check execution time by the security check means,
Furthermore, based on a determination result by the start determination unit, a specific effect execution unit that executes a specific effect before the start condition of the variable display that is the determination target is satisfied,
A gaming machine characterized by that. Variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern of the identification information based on a determination result of the prior determination means;
An extraction means for extracting a variable display determination random value for determining a variable display pattern of the identification information when a game medium passes through the start area;
For the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied even though the game medium has passed through the start area, the random number value read by the random number reading means and the random number for determining variable display extracted by the extraction means And a storage unit for storing the storage as a storage unit with a predetermined upper limit as a limit,
The variable display pattern determining means includes a storage number stored by the storage means when the start condition is satisfied, the random number for variable display determination extracted by the extracting means, and a plurality of types of variable display patterns. And determining a variable display pattern of the identification information based on the determined value corresponding to
The start determination unit has a plurality of types of variable display patterns of the identification information based on the random number for variable display determination extracted by the extraction unit and determination values corresponding to the plurality of types of variable display patterns. Determine whether it becomes a specific variable display pattern among the variable display patterns,
The specific effect executing means is capable of executing the specific effect when it is determined by the start determining means to control to the specific game state or when it is determined that the specific variable display pattern is obtained,
At least some of the determined values corresponding to the specific variable display pattern are set to the same determined value regardless of the number of reserved memories stored by the reserved storage means when the start condition is satisfied,
The determined value corresponding to the non-specific variable display pattern different from the specific variable display pattern is set to a different determined value depending on the number of reserved memories stored by the reserved storage means when the start condition is satisfied,
The start determination means determines whether or not the specific variable display pattern is obtained by determining whether or not the variable display determination random value extracted by the extraction means matches the same determination value. To
The gaming machine according to claim 1. The numerical value updating means cyclically updates the numerical data from a predetermined update initial value to a predetermined update final value within a predetermined range in which the numerical data can be updated,
The game control microcomputer includes random number initial value setting means capable of variably setting the predetermined update initial value each time the game control microcomputer is system reset.
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that. After the power supply to the gaming machine is started, it comprises a counting means for counting initial value determination data separately from the operation of the control CPU,
The random number initial value setting means determines the predetermined update initial value using the initial value determination data counted by the counting means.
The gaming machine according to claim 3. The nonvolatile memory is built in the game control microcomputer,
The game control microcomputer includes a read restriction circuit for restricting external reading of the nonvolatile memory other than by the control CPU.
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, characterized in that: A random number clock generation circuit that generates a random number clock signal outside the gaming control microcomputer and supplies the random number clock signal;
A control clock generation circuit for generating a control clock signal supplied to the control CPU;
The random number circuit is built in the game control microcomputer,
The game control microcomputer compares the input state of the random number clock signal supplied from the random number clock generation circuit with the control clock signal generated by the control clock generation circuit, thereby generating a random number clock. Including random number clock abnormality determining means for determining whether an abnormality has occurred in the input state of the signal,
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, characterized in that: The control start time processing means is a system reset that sets the predetermined data to a second value when a system reset of the game control microcomputer is released and execution of game control by the control CPU is started. Including time processing means,
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6, characterized in that: Power supply monitoring means for monitoring a predetermined power supply voltage generated based on power supply to the gaming machine and outputting a detection signal based on the decrease of the predetermined power supply voltage,
The game control microcomputer is:
After the detection signal is output from the power monitoring means, detection determination means for repeatedly determining the input state of the detection signal until the gaming control microcomputer is in an operation stop state;
Power interruption recovery time control means for starting execution of game control from the head of the game control processing program by the control CPU when the detection determination means determines that the detection signal is not input. ,
The control start time processing means determines that the detection signal is not input by the detection determination means, and then the power failure recovery time control means starts from the head of the game control processing program by the control CPU. Before starting to execute the game control, including a power failure recovery processing means for setting the predetermined data to a second value,
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 7, characterized in that:

Images